The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink About7920 Gall Blvd (4)v List Of Abbreviations A A/C AIR CONDITION E EL ELEVATION L LAV LAVATORY S SC SOLID CORE AB ANCHOR BOLT ELEC ELECTRICAL LBL LABEL SCHED SCHEDULE ACT ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE ELEV ELEVATOR LBS POUNDS SCP SCUPPER AD ADJUSTABLE, ADJACENT EMER EMERGENCY LF LINEAR FEET SD SOAP DISPENSER AFF ABOVE REF FINISHED EQ EQUAL LT WT LIGHT WEIGHT SEAL SEALANT FLOOR (SLAB) EQUIP EQUIPMENT SECT SECTION AHU AIR HANDLER UNIT ESC ESCALATOR M MAS MASONRY SF SQUARE FEET ALT ALTERNATE EWC ELECTRIC MAX MAXIMUM SHT SHEET ALUM ALUMINUM WATER COOLER MECH MECHANICAL SIM SIMILAR ANOD ANODIZED EXIST EXISTING MFR MANUFACTURER SPEC SPECIFICATION APPROX APPROXIMATE EXP EXPANSION MH MANHOLE SS STAINLESS STEEL, ARCH ARCHITECT EXT EXTERIOR MIN MINIMUM SERVICE SINK AUTO AUTOMATIC MIN MINIMUM, MINUTE STD STANDARD F FACP FIRE ALARM MISC MISCELLANEOUS STL STEEL B B 0 BOTTOM OF CONTROL PANEL MLDG MOLDING STOR STORAGE BD BOARD FD FLOOR DRAIN MO MASONRY OPENING STRUC STRUCTURAL BLDG BUILDING FDN FOUNDATION MR MOISTURE RESISTANT SUSP SUSPENDED BM BEAM FIN FINISHED MTD MOUNTED SY SQUARE YARD BRG BEARING FLR FLOOR MTL METAL BTM BOTTOM FIR FIRE RESISTANT MUL MULLION T T TREAD BUR BUILT UP ROOF FR-S FIRE -RETARDANT T&G TONGUE & GROOVE WOOD TREATMENT N NIC NOT IN CONTRACT TBL TABLE C CB CATCH BASIN FT FEET, FOOT NOM NOMINAL TELE TELEPHONE CG CORNER GUARD FTG FOOTING NTS NOT TO SCALE TEMP TEMPERED CI CAST IRON FURR FURRING THK THICK CJ CONTROL JOINT FUT FUTURE 0 OC ON CENTER TLT TOILET CL CENTER LINE OD OUTSIDE DIAMETER TO TOP OF CLG CEILING G GA GAUGE OPP OPPOSITE TPD TOILET PAPER CLO CLOSET GAL GALLON OVFL OVERFLOW DISPENSER CLR CLEAR GALV GALVANIZED TS TUBE STEEL CMU CONCRETE GB GRAB BAR P PL PLATE TV TELEVISION MASONRY UNIT GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR PLAM PLASTIC LAMINATE TYP TYPICAL CO CLEAN OUT GYP GYPSUM PLAS PLASTER COL COLUMN PLBG PLUMBING U LION UNLESS OTHER- CONC CONCRETE H HB HOSE BIBB PLWD PLYWOOD WISE NOTED CONST CONSTRUCTION HC HOLLOW CORE PNL PANEL UTIL UTILITY CONT CONTINUOUS HDW HARDWARE PR PAIR CONTR CONTRACTOR HM HOLLOW METAL PREFAB PREFABRICATED V VB VINYL BASE CORR CORRIDOR HORIZ HORIZONTAL PT POINT VCT VINYL COMPOSITE TILE CT CERAMIC TILE HR HOUR PT PRESSURE TREATED VERT VERTICAL CTR CENTER HT HEIGHT PTD PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER VEST VESTIBULE CU CONDENSING UNIT HTG HEATING PVC POLY VINYL CLORIDE VIF VERIFY IN FIELD CW COLD WATER HVAC HEATING VENTILATING VTR VENT THRU ROOF :,._ �� , 3 N I N G Q QT QUARRY TILE VWC VINYL k0JALL COVER,--"---3 D DBL DOUBLE HW HOT WATER DEPT DEPARTMENT R R RADIUS, RISER, W W WIDTH DET DETAIL I ID IkISIDE DIAMETER THERMAL RESISTANCE W/ WITH DF DRINKING FOUNTAIN IN INCH RD ROOF DRAIN W/0 WITHOUT DIA DIAMETER INCL INCLUDING RECP RECEPTACLE WC WATER CLOSET DIM DIMENSION INSUL INSULATION REF REFERENCE WD WOOD DISP DISPENSER INT INTERIOR REFR REFRIGERATOR WH WATER HEATER DN DOWN INV INVERT REG REGLET WP WATERPROOF DS DOWNSPOUT REINF REINFORCEMENT WT WEIGHT DWG DRAWING J JAN JANITOR REQ REQUIRED WWF WELDED WIRE FABRIC JB JUNCTION BOX REV REVISION WWM WELDED WIRE METAL E EA EACH JT JOINT RM ROOM EB EXPANSION P)LT RND ROUND Y YD YARD EIFS EXTERIOR INSULATING L L LENGTH RO ROUGH OPENING FINISH SYSTEM LAM LAMINATE RTU ROOF TOP UNIT EJ EXPANSION JOINT - — GRID DESIGNATION a [102 ROOM NUMBER DOOR NUMBER WINDOW TYPE 2 STOREFRONT TYPE ��--- WALL TYPE KEY NOTE REVISION NUMBER TO SOMETHING ELEVATIONS TAGS Xx-xx" 0 SPOT ELEVATION TAG • NORTH ARROW r N Z-i��- BUILDING SECTION A301-2 A301-2 SHEET NUMBER -- t — SECTION NUMBER I WALL SECTION A302-3 --- SHEET NUMBER — ---� SECTION NUMBER A501-6 _1_i SECTION DETAIL SHEET NUMBER DETAIL NUMBER A888-$8 DETAIL REFERENCE SHEET NUMBER — 1----- DETAIL NUMBER I EXTERIOR ELEVATION A201-2 �/ MARKERS SHEET NUMBER L'ELEVATION NUMBER 1 4 A401 2 INTERIOR ELEVATION MARKERS e SHEET NUMBER - 3 — ELEVATION NUMBER BRICK q . CONCRETE PLYWOOD GYPSUM BOARD1000� b DRAINAGE FILL - MASONRY \��\�� COMPACTED EARTH STEEL RIGID INSULATION :::::::: MR . . ::::: BOARD 1. ALL WORK WILL COMPLY WITH LOCAL, STATE, AND NATIONAL CODES 8. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL HAVE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR ALL RELATED TO THIS PROJECT. EQUIPMENT AND APPLIANCES ON SITE AT TIME OF INSPECTION. 2. THE. WRITTEN DIMENSIONS PREVAIL ON THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, 9. THIS BUILDING SHALL BE FULLY SPRINKLERED. CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT SIGNED AND DO NOT SCALE THESE DRAWINGS. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS SEALED SHOP DRAWINGS AND HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS TO THE ARCHITECT FOR AND CONDITIONS IN THE FIELD. IF ANY DISCREPANCY OCCURS, THE REVIEW AS WELL AS LOCAL JURISDICTION FOR PERMITTING. NO CONSTRUCTION OF THE CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT IN WRITING BEFORE FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM SHALL TAKE PLACE UNTIL THE APPROPRIATE PERMITS ARE PROCEEDING WITH ANY WORK AFFECTED BY THE DISCREPANCY. OBTAINED BY THE FIRE PROTECTION SUB CONTRACTOR 3. CONTRACTORS TO SECURE ALL PERMITS AND REQUIRED INSPECTIONS 10. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE FLORIDA PRODUCT APPROVAL SUBMITTALS FOR THE NECESSARY TO OBTAIN A CERIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY. FOLLOWING BUILDING COMPONENTS THAT COMPLY WITH RULE 9B-72: a. EXTERIOR HOLLOW METAL DOORS 4. CONTRACTORS ARE TO PROVIDE ALL TEMPORARY UTILITIES AND b. STORE FRONT SYSTEMS (WIND VELOCITY = 110 MPH) INFRASTRUCTURE REQUIRED TO PERFORM THE WORK, INCLUDING c. ROOFING AND COPING (CONFIRMING TO FM 1-120 REQUIREMENTS) FIRE PROTECTION AS REQUIRED DURING CONSTRUCTION. d. CLADDINGS (LAPPED SIDING) LCONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE THREE COPIES FOR REVIEW AND SUBMITTAL TO 5. EACH CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR IS EXPECTED TO REVIEW ALL THE LOCAL JURISDICTION AND PRODUCT SUBMITTAL FOR ARCHITECTS CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ISSUED BID. REVIEW. CHANGE ORDERS WILL NOT BE APPROVED FOR FAILURE TO DO SO. 11. ALL PLYWOOD SHEATHING TO BE FIRE RETARDANT TREATED (FRT) 6. PRODUCTS SPECIFIED OR OTHERWISE INDICATED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SHALL NOT BE SUBSTITUED WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN 12. SEE "PUBLIX CANOPY PACKAGE" DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS KEYED WITH PREFEX "PCA--" APPROVAL FROM THE ARCHITECT. 13. SEE STRUCTRUAL DRAWINGS FOR SOILS REPORT INFORMATION 7 TH!q CnN1TRACTOR SHAD rOnRDINATE ALL. TRADFc RF(JLIIRFD TO COMPLETE THIS PROJECT AS REQUIRED TO ACTIVATE THE USE OF THE 14. SEE ENERGY CALCULATION ATTACHED TO THIS SUBMISSION FACILITY AS ;'LANNED. Legal Description A TRACT OF LAND LYING IN THE NORTHEAST %4 OF SECTION 34 AND IN THE NORTHWEST 74 OF SECTION 35, TOWNSHIP 25 SOUTH, RANGE 21 EAST, PASCO COUNTY, FLORIDA. THE SAME BEING A PORTION OF THE ZEPHYRHILLS COLONY COMPANT LANDS SUBDIVISION OF SAID SECTION 34 AND 35 AS SHOWN ON THE PLAT OR MAP THEREOF RECORDED IN PLAT BOOK 1, PAGE 55 OF THE PUBLIC RECORDS OF PASCO COUNTY, FLORIDA. ALL BEING FURTHER DESCRIBED AS FOLLOWS: FOR A POINT OF REFERENCE COMMENCE AT THE SOUTHEAST CORNER OF THE NORTHWEST %4 OF SAID SECTION 35; THENCE N. 89 53'13"W., ALONG THE SOUTH BOUNDARY THEREOF, A DISTANCE OF 1638.79 FEET; THENCE N. 00 09'45" W., A DISTANCE OF 657.26 FEET TO THE INTERSECTION OF THE EASTERLY RIGHT-OF-WAY LINE OF U.S. HIGHWAY 301; THENCE NORTHERLY, ALONG SAID EASTERLY RIGHT-OF-WAY LINE, THE FOLLOWING FOUR COURSES; (2) S. 89 46'32" E., A DISTANCE OF 5.00 FEET; (4) NORHTERLY, 625.74 FEET ALONG THE ARC OF A CURVE TO THE RIGHT (SAID CURVE HAVING A RADIUS OF 625.73 FEET) TO A POINT LYING ON THE NORTH BOUNDARY OF SAID SECTION 34; THENCE S. 89 58'32" SECTION 34 ALSO BEING THE NORTHWEST CORNER OF SAID SECTION 35; THENCE S. 89 59'50" E., ALONG THE NORTH BOUNDARY OF SAID SECTION 35, A DISTANCE OF 1015.05 FEET; THENCE S. 00 09'45" W., A DISTANCE OF 2618.58 FEET TO THE POINT OF BEGINNING. LESS AND EXCEPT THAT PORTION OF SAID TRACTS 58 AND 59 CONVEYED IN OFFICIAL RECORDS BOOK 1902, PAGE 690, PUBLIC RECORDS OF PASCO COUNTY, FLORIDA. SAID LAND CONTAINING 60.76 ACRES MORE OR LESS. Vicinity Map "NID' NTS -- - aw _- CD q LA F KOSSIK RD u) PROJECT a SITE n _ _ L. 11 _. _. .:_& Trills o Avie Aw 0t _ _ An �'+2'id ruw A ,- t J� a nu`5 7-: jar C-r COUNTY ROAD 54 42 m 1= a ayeIZA- - a INTERSECTION OF KOSSIK & US HtNY 301 (GALL BLVD) ZEPHYR COMMONS CONSISTS OF NEW SITE CONSTRUCTION AND THE NEW CONSTRUCTION OF SEVERAL BUILDINGS. THE SCOPE OF WORK IN THIS SET OF DRAWINGS IS FOR RETAIL BUILDING B ONLY. THE SITE WORK AND THE OTHER BUILDINGS WILL BE DESIGNED, PERMITTED, AND CONSTRUCTED AS SEPARATE DRAWING PACKAGES. THIS SCOPE OF WORK IS FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION OF A SHELL BUILDING (SINGLE STORY MASONRY, MERCANTILE OCCUPANCY, SPRINKLERED STRUCTURE). TENANT DEMISING WALLS, TOILETS, CEILINGS, HVAC & LIGHTING TO BE PERMITTED SEPARATELY DURING TENANT FIT UP SUBMISSION. THE BUILDING SHELL IS SUBMITTED AS AN UNOCCUPIED BUILDING. uode In -formation REFER TO A121 FOR COMPLETE CODE INFORMATION CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS THREE (3) SIGNED & SEALED 5335 8TH ST SETS FOR PERMi?' SUBMISSION ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA 33542 (813) 780-0020 - PHONE (813) 780-0021 - FAX BUILDING: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, BUILDING - 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS] FIRE: FLORIDA FIRE PREVENTION CODE - 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS CHAPTER 36 - (NFPA 1 & NFPA 101 W/ STATE FIRE MARSHAL AMENDMENTS) PLUMBING: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, PLUMBING - 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS MECHANICAL: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, MECHANICAL - 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS ELECTRICAL: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, BUILDING - 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS CHAPTER 27 - (NFPA 70, NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE) FUEL/GAS: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, FUEL/GAS - 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS ACCESSIBILITY: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, BUILDING - 2004 W12006 SUPPLEMENTALS CHAPTER 11 - (FLORIDA ACCESSIBILITY CODE FOR BUILDING CONSTRUCTION). ENERGY: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, BUILDING - 2004 W12006 SUPPLEMENTALS CHAPTER 13 - (FLORIDA ENERGY EFFICIENCY FOR BUILDING CONSTRUCTION). BUILDING AND CONSTRUCTION DATA OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION (FBC 309) GROUPS M - MERCANTILE CONSTRUCTION TYPE (FBC TABLE 601) TYPE II-B, NEW CONSTRUCTION, SPRINKLERED MAXIMUM HEIGHT AND AREA (FBC TABLE 503) HEIGHT - 55'-0" AREA - 12,500 SF* ACTUAL HEIGHT = 38'-6" (SINGLE STORY) ACTUAL AREA = 15,137 SF *THE PUBLIX AND ADJACENT RETAIL BUILDINGS ARE CLASSIFIED AS UNLIMITED AREA AS ALLOWED BY FBC 507 Contact Information CLIENT: PRIMERICA GROUP ONE, INC. STRUCTURAL BBM STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING, INC 3629 MADACA LANE ENGINEER: 1912 BOOTHE CIRCLE SUITE 100 TAMPA, FL. 33618 LONGWOOD, FLORIDA 32750 (813) 933-0629 PHONE (407) 645-3423 (813) 935-3420 FAX (407) 645-3790 FAX CONTACT: LARRY GARREN CONTACT: BORA ERBILEN, P.E., MBA ARCHITECT: CUHACI & PETERSON, ARCHITECTS, LLC MECHANICAL CUHACI & PETERSON, ARCHITECTS, LLC 1925 PROSPECT AVE ENGINEER: 1925 PROS PECTAVE ORLANDO, FL 32814 ORLANDO, FL 32814 (407) 661-9100 PHONE (407) 661-9100 PHONE (407) 661-9101 FAX (407) 661-9101 FAX CONTACT: GABRIEL ROBERTSON CONTACT: JOE KEENE CIVIL AVID GROUP ELECTRICAL CUHACI & PETERSON, ARCHITECTS, LLC ENGINEER: 8659 BAYPINE ROAD, STE 304 ENGINEER: 1925 PROSPECT AVE JACKSONVILLE, FLORIDA 32256 ORLANDO, FL 32814 (904) 737-4001 PHONE (407) 661-9100 PHONE (904) 252-7030 FAX (407) 661-9101 FAX ;ON. P.L.CT: T IJARA D. SCHURIAN, .L. ! ^ITn/'T: TI\{ /�. Shell Building B Ze P h y r Commons Gall Blvd. & Kossik Road Zephyrhills, Florida --- ---- Drawing Index - --—^� -HEET NO. TITLE ON F PERMIT SET - - -®—-------_I SHEET 04111.-08 ARCHITECTURAL COVER ._ A100 A111 A121 A122 A131 A141 A201 A301 A302 A303 A304 A501 A502 _ A601 A001-AO08 STRUCTURAL X _ X X X X X X X X III F AM MA GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES X GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES X GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES X FOUNDATION PLAN - RETAIL "B" X ROOF FRAMING PLAN - RETAIL "B" X FOUNDATION SECTIONS AND DETAILS X ROOF SECTIONS AND DETAILS X STOREFRONT SECTIONS X STOREFRONT SECTIONS X FIRE PROTECTION (SEE GENERAL NOTE #9) _ FP001 --� FIRE PROTECTION FLOOR PLAN, NOTES, & DETAILS X PLUMBING I P001 PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN, NOTES, & DETAILS�— MECHANICAL M001 MECHANICAL ROOF PLAN NOTES & DETAILS — X ELECTRICAL E002 E101 E301 E401 E501 SITE WIRING X ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLAN - BUILDING B X ELECTRICAL POWER RISER & PANELS - BUILDING B X ELECTRICAL DETAILS - BUILDING B X ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS - BUILDING B X U m� Q LL U ocy) o>< w CD cd 0 rn ,0 00- 0 K 3 s cn z c. uv+ > o J 'LL_ nA6w Overall Project Site Plan (PN SCALE: 1" = 40'-0" THIS SET OF DRAWINGS IS LIMITED TO BUILDING B AND ITS ADJACENT SIDEWALKS ONLY. ALL OTHER BUILDINGS AND PARCELS SHALL BE DESIGNED, PERMITTED, AND CONSTRUCTED SEPARATELY. FOR COMPLETE SITE WORK INFORMATION, REFER TO THE CIVIL DRAWINGS PREPARED BY AVID. FOR COMPLETE LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION INFORMATION, REFER TO THE CIVIL DRAWINGS PREPARED BY AVID. FOR COMPLETE SITE LIGHTING INFORMATION, REFER TO THE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. -0-12"WM FireMarshal's Checklist EGRESS TRAVEL AND EXITS RE: LIFESAFETY PLAN & CODE INFO ON A121 EXIT AND EMERGENCY LIGHTS RE: LIFESAFETY PLAN ON A121 A FIRE ALARM SYSTEM WILL BE DESIGNED AND PERMITTED BY SMOKE DETECTORS CONTRACTOR'S SHOP DRAWINGS. RE: CODE INFORMATION ON A121 RE: LIFESAFETY PLAN ON A121 FOR LOCATIONS FIRE EXTINGUISHERS RE: DETAIL 4 ON A121 FOR MOUNTING DETAIL RE: LIFESAFETY PLAN ON A121 FOR LOCATIONS FIRE RATED WALLS RE: DETAILS ON A121 & A122 FOR UL ASSEMBLY DETAILS ALL DOORS SHALL HAVE HARDWARE THAT COMPLIES WITH REQUIREMENTS FOR EGRESS AND ADA ACCESSIBILITY. PANIC HARDWARE RE: LIFESAFETY PLAN ON A121 FOR DOOR LOCATIONS RE: A601 FOR COMPLETE HARDWARE INFORMATION DUCT DETECTORS SHALL BE PROVIDED AS REQUIRED BY SMACNA, NFPA, DUCT DETECTORS AS WELL AS ANY OTHER APPLICABLE CODE RE: MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR HVAC INFORMATION EMERGENCY GENERATOR NONE REQUIRED. NONE PROVIDED. RE: LIFESAFETY PLAN ON A121 FOR CALL OUTS FOR EACH ROOM INTERIOR FINISHES RE: SCHEDULE ON A121 FOR SPECIFIC FINISH INFORMATION RE: CODE INFO ON A121 FOR FLAME SPREAD RATINGS SITE PLAN SHOWING ADJACENT RE: OVERALL PROJECT SITE PLAN ON A100. FOR COMPLETE SITE ROADWAYS, BUILDINGS, AND WORK AND UTILITY INFORMATION, RE: CIVIL DRAWINGS BY AVID. FIRE HYDRANTS FULL SYSTEM PROVIDED. TO BE DESIGNED AND PERMITTED BY FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR'S SHOP DRAWINGS. RE: CODE INFORMATION ON A121 FULL SYSTEM PROVIDED. TO BE DESIGNED AND PERMITTED BY SPRINKLERS CONTRACTOR'S SHOP DRAWINGS. RE: CODE INFORMATION ON A121 GAS USAGE NONE REQUIRED. NONE PROVIDED. U O O Q- O �Ln V (� CV 00 0= co � L � CO U /11C O E2 cow C2 a)z C35 > z J /� 0— Cl) l� in U I O O i UUJ ., I C W 0 Z 06 � 0 O w -J U -0 U3 C1 U) �YNa- o _ o a z o O ~ _n M c+> LL1 Lu N w o CD U m Q� LLJ a d' Q CL S o 0- O r) U Al 00 HANDIC RE: All Elevation & Grading Notes 1. ABBREVIATIONS: TOC - TOP OF CURB AT EDGE OF SIDWALK TOS - TOP OF FLOOR SLAB INSIDE BUILDING TOG - TOP OF GRADE IN LANDSCAPE AREAS TOP - TOP OF PAVING 2. TOS=113.00'. 3. ALL SIDEWALKS TO START 114" BELOW THE TOS AT ALL DOORS. 4. ALL EXTERIOR DOORS TO HAVE THRESHOLDS THAT WILL NOT EXCEED 1/2" IN HEIGHT. 5. ALL SIDEWALKS TO SLOPE AWAY FROM THE BUILDING AT A RATE NOT TO EXCEED 1 % MIN AND 2% MAX. 6. FOR ALL FRONT SIDEWALKS, ALL TOC ELEVATIONS SHALL BE 6" MAX ABOVE ADJACENT TOP. REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT ELEVATIONS. 7. FOR ANY LOCATIONS WHERE THERE IS GREATER THAN A 6" DIFFERENCE BETWEEN TOC AND ADJACENT TOP, NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY. 8. FOR ALL REAR SIDEWALKS, ALL TOC ELEVATIONS SHALL BE FLUSH WITH ADJACENT TOP. REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT ELEVATIONS. 9. ALL HANDICAP RAMPS TO SLOPE AT 1:14 MAX. THE SURFACE OF ALL CURB RAMPS TO HAVE RAISED DETECTABLE WARNING FINISH. REFER TO DETAIL ON THIS SHEET. 10. THE BOTTOM OF ALL HANDICAP RAMPS TO BE FLUSH WITH ADJACENT TOP. REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT ELEVATIONS OF PAVING. REAR 2 Sidewalk Plan LEFT RIGHT Scale 118"=V-0" FN' FRONT EXPOSED AGGREGATE CONCRETE FINISH 5/8" SMOOTH RIVER ROCK MIX INTEGRAL WITH CONCRETE 2 Handicap Ramp Detail SCALE: 1 1/2" = V-0" CONCRETE SIDEWALK RE: CIVIL PLANS 4" THICK 3,000 PSI CONCRETE REINFORCED W/ 6 X 6 X 1.4 X 1.4 WWF OVER COMPACTED. 1/2" EXPANSION JOINT I o� �v v vv vvv vv v�� vv��K wwvv vv%��ww� vv vv�� BUILDING I CIVIL 6" EXPANSION JOINT oe y„ /— SINGLE -COMPONENT POLYURETHANE I SEALANT 14" THICK -- CONTROL JOINT 1" DEEP STRUCK JOINT r >1a X X1 6' O.C. MAX RE: SIDEWALK PLAN FOR SPACING JOINTS AT FRONT OF BUILDING ° 1. ALL JOINTS TO BE TOOLED UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE 2. ALL EXTERIOR CONCRETE SIDEWALKS TO BE 4" THICK 3,000 PSI CONCRETE REINFORCED WITH GRADE. 6 X 6 X 1.4 X 1.4 W.W.F. OVER COMPACTED FILL. 3. CONTROL JOINTS SPACED AT 6' OC MAX. RE: SIDEWALK PLAN FOR EXACT SPACING AND LOCATION nF JOINTS. 3 Sidewalk Detail SCALE: 1 1/2" = l'-0" CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY PAVEMENT FIN. GRADE PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF RAMP. NOTIFY ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY IF RISE EXCEEDS 6". DETECTABLE WARNING AREA CONTRASTING COLOR EXPOSED AGGREGATE FOR TACTILE WARNING SURFACE @ ALL RAMPS, RE: A100 on F��SN��NG 4116.s ��b 4 Handicap Ramp Detail KCAL _ REFER TO BUILDING C DRAWINGS FOR ALL INFORMATION PERTAINING TO THE ADJACENT BUILDING U i O O QL O rLn V (� 00 c j r J � CO C U s� y Co J O W Cd LL (0 � 2 CDLL Q Q O z g` > W (MD Co p4—�� I� VJ U ` cn O E E O cn C� U) LLI0 06'-EU z �.— >' O w� U) 0- Ui 0 WYNd d 'I 1 I 1 'i w w w U) may, an ui m ul ATV Z w mow. U) �0e o ti a Z rn o O W N w o 3 � U cJ7 o U FN A501-6 ncz 0 ao zn 1 Retail B Floor/Life Safety Plan Scale 1/8"=l'-O" Soil Poisoning for Termite Control 1.GENERAL 1.1 Scope: Furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the application of soil poisoning for the termite control as specified herein. 1.2 Contractor's Qualifications: Applicator shall be licensed in the state where the project is located and shall be nationally known company. 1.3 Guarantee: a. Termite protection treatment shall be guaranteed for period of five years against termite infestation. Guarantee shall include any yearly renewal costs. Repairs for termite damage paid by termite company. b. At the Owner's option, at the termination of the guarantee, an extension renewal of inspection and service treatment shall be made available to the Owner. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials A. Materials shall be a chemical formulated as an emulsible concentrate for subsequent dilution with water. Fuel oil or other petroleum -based products are permitted as a dilutent. B. For soil areas to be treated, apply the following chemical at not less than the designated concentration: 1. Premise by Bayer Corporation: 1.0 % applied in water emulsion. 2. Prelude by Zenech Corporation: 1.0 % applied in water emulsion. C. Other Brands of chemical components using one of the following: 1. imidacioprid: 0.5 % to 0.1 % Concentration in water emulsion. 2. Permethrin: 1.0 % Concentration in water emulsion. D. Use treatment solutions which are not injurious to plantings in landscape areas. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 Restrictions: do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling and and grading operations are completed, except as otherwise required in construction operations. to ensure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to excessively wet soil or during inclement weather. 3.2 Surface Preparation: Remove foreign matter which could decrease effectiveness of treatment on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and foundations. Toxicants may apply before placement of compacted fill under slabs, if acceptable to the Architect. 3.3 Application Rates: Apply soil treatment solution as follow: Within building area, with or without slabs -on -grade, at the rate of 1.5 gal. per 10 sq. ft. Under foundations and footings, including horizontal and vertical surfaces of excavations, at the rate of 1 gal. per 10 sq. ft. Outside building perimeter in a strip at least 2' wide and under porches, areaway, aprons, walks, pads, stair landings, or paved extensions, at a rate of 1 gal. per 5 sq. ft. Allow not less than 12 hours for drying after application, before beginning concrete placement or other construction activities. 3.4 Post signs in the areas of application warning workers that soil poisoning has been applied. Remove signs when areas are covered by other construction. 3.5 Re -apply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation or other construction activities following application. �' RIGHT FRONT BUILDING WAND CONNECTING BREEZEWAY TO BE CONSTRUCTED AS PART OF A FUTURE PHASE RE: STRUCTURAL FOR COMPLETE INFORMATION FOR FRAMING CONTINUOUS STUD AT TOP OF WALL MTL STUD FRAMING 60OS200-43 @ 16" OC R-19 BATTEN INSULATION GYP BOARD & FRAMING ALL THE WAY TO THE UNDERSIDE OF THE ROOF DECK ABOVE AS PER 1HR FIRE RATING REQUIREMENTS. RE: UL DETAILS U415 & HW-S-0001 CONTINUOUS STUD TRACK 60OT200-43 CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB RE: STRUCTURAL 21 Hr Rated Framed Wall Scale 1 1/2"=V-0" RE: FLOOR PLAN FOR LOCATIONS Finish Schedule A_2-A-2 OR NUMBER FLOOR MATERIAL WALL BASE MATERIAL WALL MATERIAL CEILING MATERIAL A SEALED 1 NONE A UNFINISHED 1 ACOUSTICAL CONCRETE CMU OR GYP LAY -IN TILE B VCT TILE 2 VINYL B ENAMEL PAINTED 2 PAINTED GYPSUM BOARD GYPSUM BOARD C CERAMIC TILE 3 CERAMIC C ENAMEL PAINTED 3 NONE CONC. BLOCK 8" MASONRY WALL RE: STRUCTURAL CEILING AND INTERIOR FINISH TO BE PROVIDED AS PART OF FUTURE TENANT INTERIOR BUILD OUT EXTERIOR FINISH RE: ELEVATIONS COREFILL 500 FOAM INSULATION IN ALL MASONRY CELLS NOT REQUIRED BY STRUCT TO BE GROUT OR CONCRETE FILLED. RE: SIDEWALK PLAN FOR ALL SIDEWALK INFORMATION CONCR. FLOOR SLAB RE: STRUCTURAL 3 Masonry Wall Scale 1 1/2"=V-0" RE: FLOOR PLAN FOR LOCATIONS B-J — BLOCKING IN WALL AS REQUIRED WALL MOUNTED FIRE EXTINGUISHER, POTTER ROEMER (2A1 OBV) MODEL # 3005 W/3903 MOUNTING BRACKET SEE FLOOR PLAN FOR LOCATION SHOWN AS (F.E.) FIN. FLOOR 4 Fire Extinguisher Detail Scale 1 1/2"=V-0" REFER TO BUILDING C DRAWINGS FOR ALL INFORMATION PERTAINING TO THE ADJACENT BUILDING B-14 Code Information CITY OF ZEPHYRH ILLS THREE (3) SIGNED & SEALED 5335 8TH ST SETS FOR PERMIT SUBMISSION ZEPHYRH ILLS, FLORIDA33542 (813) 780-0020 - PHONE (813) 780-0021- FAX BUILDING: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, BUILDING - 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS] FIRE: FLORIDA FIRE PREVENTION CODE - 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS CHAPTER 36 - (NFPA 1 & NFPA 101 W/ STATE FIRE MARSHAL AMENDMENTS) PLUMBING: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, PLUMBING - 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS MECHANICAL: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, MECHANICAL-2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS ELECTRICAL: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, BUILDING - 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS CHAPTER 27 - (NFPA 70, NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE) FUEL/GAS: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, FUEL/GAS - 2004 W12006 SUPPLEMENTALS ACCESSIBILITY: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, BUILDING - 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS CHAPTER 11 - (FLORIDA ACCESSIBILITY CODE FOR BUILDING CONSTRUCTION). ENERGY: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, BUILDING - 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS CHAPTER 13 - (FLORIDA ENERGY EFFICIENCY FOR BUILDING CONSTRUCTION). BUILDING AND CONSTRUCTION DATA OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION (FBC 309) GROUPS M - MERCANTILE CONSTRUCTION TYPE (FBC TABLE 601) TYPE II-B, NEW CONSTRUCTION, SPRINKLERED MAXIMUM HEIGHT AND AREA (FBC TABLE 503) HEIGHT - 55'-0" AREA -12,500 SF* ACTUAL HEIGHT = 38'4' (SINGLE STORY) ACTUAL AREA = 15,137 SF *THE PUBLIX AND ADJACENT RETAIL BUILDINGS ARE CLASSIFED AS UNLIMITED AREA AS ALLOWED BY FBC 507 FIRE RATING REQUIREMENTS FIRE RATING REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION TYPE II-B (FBC 601 & 602) ELEMENT REQUIRED FIRE RATING STRUCTURALFRAME OHR NON BEARING EXTERIOR WALLS 0 HR NON BEARING INTERIOR WALLS 0 HR FLOOR CONSTRUCTION 0 HR ROOF CONSTRUCTION 0 HR OTHER FIRE RATING REQUIREMENTS TENANT SEPARATION TENANTS SHALL BE SEPARATED BY A MIN 1 HR FIRE BARRIER THE SCOPE OF WORK SHOWN IN THIS SET OF DRAWINGS IS FOR SHELL ONLY. INTERIOR TENANT DEMISING WALLS ARE NOT BEING PROVIDED AS PART OF THIS WORK. DEMISING WALLS SHALL BE PROVIDED AS PART OF THE FUTURE TENANT INTERIOR BUILD OUT. THE FRONT WALLS OF THE BUILDING SHALL BE A 1 HR FIRE RATED WALL IN ORDER TO SEPARATE THE INTERIOR OF THE BUILDING FROM THE CANOPY. THE BUILDING WILL BE SEPARATED FROM ANY ADJACENT BUILDINGS BY A MASONRY WALL WITH A MINIMUM 2 HR FIRE RATING. REFER TO THE UL DETAILS ON A122. INTERIOR FINISHES, FBC 803 INTERIOR FINISHES SHALL BE PROVIDED AS PART OF THE FUTURE TENANT INTERIOR BUILD OUT FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS, FBC 900 SPRINKLERS, FBC 903 DESIGN STANDARD NFPA 13 AS MODIFIED BY NFPA 231, NFPA 231C B-K OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS FBC 903.2.5 FIRE SPRINKLERS REQUIRED IN GROUP M WHEN GROSS AREA > 12,000 SQ. FT. (REQUIRED) FIRE ALARMS, FBC 907.2.7 FIRE ALARMS REQUIRED IN GROUP M WHEN OCCUPANT LOAD > 500 (REQUIRED) IN ORDER TO QUALIFY FOR THE UNLIMITED AREA ALLOWANCE, THIS BUILDING SHALL HAVE A FULL FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE SHOP DRAWINGS FOR THE DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF THE FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT SIGNED AND SEALED SHOP DRAWINGS TO THE LOCAL JURISDICTION AS REQUIRED FOR PERMITTING. BY CODE, THIS BUILDING IS REQUIRED TO HAVE FULL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE DRAWINGS FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF THE SYSTEM. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT SIGNED AND SEALED SHOP DRAWINGS TO THE LOCAL JURISDICTION AS REQUIR: .-OR PERMITTING. MEANS OF EGRESS, FBC 1000 OCCUPANCY MERCANTILE (GRADE FLOOR AREAS) OCCUPANT LOAD, FBC TABLE 1004.1.2 1 PERSON 130 SF (GROSS) MAX. TRAVEL DISTANCE (SPRINKLERED) 250 FT. MAX. EGRESS WIDTH/PERSON SERVED 0.2"- LEVEL MINIMUM CLEAR OPENING DOORS 32" MINIMUM NUMBER OF EXITS, FBC 1018.1 2 WHEN OCCUPANT LOAD 1-500 3 WHEN OCCUPANT LOAD 501-1,000 EGRESS WIDTH # OF EXITS BLDG GROUP SIZE OCCUPANCY LOAD (REQ'D I PROV'D) (REQ'D I PROV'D) B_J B M 15,137 SF 1 / 30 (GROSS) 505 101" / 192" 3I 6 PLUMBING, MINIMUM FACILITIES, PFBC, PLUMBING, TABLE 403.1. ALL PLUMBING FIXTURES WILL. BE PROVIDED AS PART OF THE FUTURE TENANT INTERIOR BUILD OUT Legend SYMBOL DESCRIPTION 1 (; �1 EMERGENCY LIGHT, RE: ELECTRICAL DWGS ® EXIT LIGHT, RE: ELECTRICAL DWGS ® DOOR NUMBER RE. SHT. A601 O STOREFRONT WINDOW SYSTEM RE. SHT. A601 — EGRESS PATH FE FIRE EXTINGUISHER, WALL MOUNTED (F.E.) RE: NFPA 65' 32" 160 EGRESS DISTANCE (FEET) EGRESS WIDTH (INCHES) EGRESS CAPACITY (PEOPLE) - 7� KEY PLAN N O o 0 0 C1� U �' F� w • o ¢0 0 U o� V U Q, U C 6 0 0- 0 V C:a_o (U N V cD J M '^i, UCO C:-O J '0 0 O lL LU CU EU_ a z O) CLO' w J ^^� LIB � t— (n U I L I L U), II 0 II E II I 00 Ali _ J J w _� x e e O g z °2S s () �-Y >+ O LLJ U fn Q (n , 1 � W UJ rs c a cn w cD J _O rn a� UJ W U) y o z rn o U o N F M u� O Z al U a o A121 System No. W-L-100.1 Ounie F Ratings — 1, -2, 3 and 4 III r (See I tents 2 ad 3 'F RatinoN, — 11 ll� 2, , � �- _. 3. a vid 4 11 r (See Itearn 3.) I� Ratinr At Ambient— less than I CFNI/xf.j ft 1, Rating At 4111111) F — than I CFNlh-q fir A I SECTION A —A I NVall Asserribit, � -[-he I3 or 4 ed be cons of rnatcrials and in the manner dc�s,mbied ir. the indi vidual t-I 100 or U400 Scrics or Partition In the UL_ 1-ire Resistanicr Directu,ry and shall include the fam"awimi "instruction fe-atio-cs- A. S-tuds — Wall firmning max of either Nil, cv,d studs (max 2 It fire rated assemblies � or steel cliannel N� otid studs to of nom hV 4 fil I bi, a O' i Number spaced 16 jit (406 nini) 0C vh ith bo, 4 in f5 I hiF nirn lumber end plates nd cross brices Steel lituds to be trill in. itnit Fir ms: In. f(Illi lintin) n134 Gyp-attriNtRoard'l—Nom I2 or in. or NN nirti) thick. 4 f. i cni)wide a,kith square or vi perie d cdgws. lilic gYpsum fasteraertivic alid shco onciffation ,hall allindividual t, Iart th, Fare Re-sistaricc Nfax dizin of -Opening is 26 in, i660 metalloc pipe- cnduit air tubing, Installed either within the firestup The 1111ilt-11017 space. bietw een pipe, conduit or tubinte aind petipherN: of shall tie inin In IIII-Ell- Contact) to friax in- I ninn't Pipe- l;oindt.Lit or lubing to be qUpported n both ides ofivall The t%.pes and of metallic pipes, c ond III ts tribiniz inav be used - At Steel Pipe� -Nom 24 in, 1610 al-an-0 diatin im- Schk�dulc I (4 for hcaN-ierli steel pipe- -6 I ht for hcayier) cs -an soll Pipe, B. Iran Pipe Nom '4 in. !6 111) artirril dialn !oi- ion. ic- i-N t7 - I -III man.) dlarn for ll 1cr) ductile iron pr� a-stire pip C, Nlrim 6 n. 0 5:1 min.) Nhatri Tor sanalle) steel condtail oi not I st in 1 102 dittin tor sinaller) ( Tapper 'Irubina -- Nflut fiti. I diaill lot L C-Upper Pipe — "ovii h in. r I 52 mino diailli [Axt: -lippet pil, F _r hrough Penetrating Produett"' - Flemble Nletal Pilling -1 Vic o, pe� flesible In tal a in. i �, I mail) diarn for skirtalk-r) steel flexible inetal ga,_ p ping- Plaq-1c Lill piping IN d ONI EGA FI �X IN(� i% nor Ile removed on boul offictor K r Nnm I in f2� inni) diarra 4 or steel flexible metal Plasic coeyino of] pip.ng ov tna� not be ienlo�ed cin hoth sodv�caf flooki or asso-fibli, DIN OF TITE FLEX I in 11 num diam tor --a --if pipit PL or not bill: rent4tIved On hAith -sides or waasseunblv- WARD NIF(. IN(' 8 and ..,2 III- i I b, 41, Fill, Void or at itv kilaterii — Caulk or I64 I- 4 hi vel,,.:, appi ied i;N ithian an 11 AN with both I'accs ofwall. khan 114 in- I h nim i diakin head (III' caulk pplied to nvpsurn kjai-d;penctraiialt interface t on both ides F Rating of die firestop.. S�:L�tefll Is depiendent thc la. urh� I Jae Firtin- j-&the A- ai in i;% hich it ial,4alle(L s shiiiii, n in thc table. -1-he Rating of the firesnilp systern a-., dejacradent Upon dit typen- slyc ofthe p3pe ol Conduit if e 11 L ulll, ffit- rutin- ofthe v�all ak�etnhll, n k% b1cli it is I at sta fled- Liz, tabulated Nlax Pipe F or (-ondttit Rating Rating Diarn I In 1. alan ran I -I r " r 4 4i I i 4; I I C UN 1, P N I P XVIA 1 � i i - 0 V, I the 'I. 4.n Sy'stent No. HWFS-0(K)1. (Derentih-er 01, 111191�,I� ,A sserribly Ratins — I & 2 Ili- Usee Item 3B) Tor I . ......... iIIIIIIt Floor Assembly T-he firc-rattrd flilled flacr shall lie c ous In To c d o f tlie and In the innner C'ei 1. _11� Fiat nii the Ind I,, Floor -A aDesl2in all the -v include the k4k)winv V Steel Floo r and Form UNT; i v� k4ax .7, In, dcep galx steel fluwd flunir B. Concrete 110in I 2 in. thick fi-filln tile top Fit alic (it, the 11 cior an all hof, the and Ell the 111111TICT- ithed in The and! � oduil 117fff) or P900 Rf---51'- In the 1,11 � F Ire. '-)I . -,hold shall contain una-� I � I In. deep, gal %. teel 11med Ili the houdv Fare ralmi_- ilf the In the case of inaterialF on thc steel Ific-imill sx-stclill �hall lie installed prior to the spra�-applicd pra)tcchon material. NN all sslembly — Tfic I or 2 IN r firc�rated wall boar-d !stecki stud asscranblix shall be tiraterlats and III the man net d cribeil in the inch I, idual U all and Partition an the A. Steel F wr And Ceffino unners "IT I and ceiliII12 malners of of Nrun, P-4a c han Niel ro sfuds Oteril 14" be kN ith I - lettw 0d'; S) ace d "lax I 2 N 11, (-X B. S tuds — Stec I situds to be al i ra I, i I-=. 1N, i Ni St Lid vac I n not to c_x, ced,' i it. Gvilisurn Board' — Wallb0ali qhicets Installed to a man total thickness of I I in- cin each side (if i,all 1, �r I ol rawlgs� tio lie unsti itcled as srwc: will n the indl a idual \k Al and r I-NallitiOn in The 11 I Fire Ren istance Directori, XVallboard trk he hurted Tight lo file bottom offine meel floor units iinkint Svvtem 'rhe a fill material in the ofific isreel Fortaning N]2teyials* Nitta 1. in- of rnin 4 pi,�-t ball paLknj liltu 11111112', HIOOF Ull Ili, abox c ccifing N-i-thill cr I's I perlINInlent 161 ]n. m alemal to fic rLIFIT11CI each side T,Nall requiled to The nxlinaled Thermsfilier Inc Tv pe S NF B Vill� Void or C'avitv Nfateriall— P-NiN material rni-Ned with %Naterat - we parts dTN Nnix to I '2 m- part water. bx ,Arelig.]IL in avcurdaklace with accompaw, _v installation instructions. A min 1� thickness of fill rildforial installed uln ea It sl& of the �Nall -in the flutes ofthe steel floor Itnits, flush with surf -ace Cifthe ,AaJIb4_iard- fchr the I lit A---serrittily Rating. A min I in. thickn" 4-iffill material is required on eacti side of the ii, all for the 2 fir Assevittiah linit"i states Gypsuni ('0 Tv[lc FC B 1. Fill� V oid or C avity INI latteriall — Not Shim Tal fill material rl l tern-aw to ftem 1B. Re&-mixcd component mixed ki ith ac clerditol- componcri It at a rate parts of i cad� - mixed component to I part ofaccellerainor flk - i;% c Ight n w Ith th e aQ comp anyin ppiled as, deimmbed in lilem a min thickness of I in for the t It, --emblx I Rating- and to a rnin of I in- for the 2 far Assembiv Rating. I nittrial States, (.vps.0 m In RFU itillearitip h No� t 14 IN, ('Nirk f 7, fill ii \V,TI I ot 4 1 1 i St�_-u I II,at kk- i 4 2.- ... .......... .. ... .. . . .. .... F1 o or and Ceiling Runners N(ji sbov, ti) - For III he In rt)qrj widtdi slaid I all he'd to Il'or Wid di 4 in W- A. Floor and Crifing Rurniters' - \lot �diown - IT, offtean I use 4, Ith IT ji -'A- pinprietaA -haped, mia -ii S in. livi de 1 IT C if n Til Fil ha I e Q I zcd 51-- 1, f1 I i ?l DIETRIUH lNDLISt*RtES INC L. hraS III Fle-orandf 'Piling Runners — iNot _n _IPk ch 4LIla t I I I a I] Id init, irt. vvidu vorin I -111 tFurn Nino IINTICISTRIFS Steel Studs froin inin tanvvid I lin ak� It d i c Ind�- I I - I 4 I flan fikt.- and 1 i nt Ft-1 ii rNa- spa ce it a an ax o p OC ist u 4-k- u i be c III -4 TV at Sinivi Stu& In heu Fftem P no 1) ied rn ll� widn widet Iteni hiqlrieli -nin 4--n- n- lP I 11. -4 ir� in d I 1 in lonv_- folded hack retur lan!--e fabricated m a-v -":z _T1 ii o IiCtall tfifckTIC_-S,) g kin Ie stiaCed a ma\ Of Eg on%vil Ell the F nF swn ir N1 INC L1IraS'11*+I,--'�.-__-. IA,, Fo, usev,vitfiltein 20 irl tfiic�t COT rosinji-Prot ecte d CIT t ,_ ill. Irlill width- ill-i NTT I in, flan -es and 1 �,4 in in iiN of I PI in OC' into flo,cir xi it CIA ijijl� Tuirilliors TP be Ig Iii in ilmili aH--;L--TnbN raiii2ht 1, W tiod StifuranalialPanelSheathiripm:= Onfa, Slrcvv,Fail�4 rjl�ld 1-1 7,I] -ck � In tj a it thitA r en t M_ _1- E ra n d Ilk-ta I d I 0 'IS b Ih uclural I ,,hea- TjE p=� v, onch co ij - ipivang v� ith OCK -1 . - I - it -,d ' ild %e- - P"It OT P-S'. or APA PRP08. vF.th extel-joy �xtlpl r TI 1_1 cal v mt srids� md fi",ijtid �;nac:o From ivil.,N 2rd mj- q -chCd __ � Jij q4t flat-head,wiall F-dififfinu a rain. hAd di ain _'Q2 III. al maxintnian a ITT OU, tri �dthe p tin Inete r a tit," t 0 C, tri t hl� fie 4 Bartu and Rlanhtv,' -- a,,, h I uoili daickn'ss a� lm,&T Itmin we Batts al 0hinkers 18KIN% or RZJZ,.i ri eN i r e o F t 0 d C q I It I Fia I IT e ,IA. Bans and Blarviets' — pttorian, . . ........ Plafed ITT -Lid am Fiber or wrtcd Iva r -4 T I a il e I'l c I I.- t; i N I ark� xT,, IN, S u v e B IT I I I I I ig, 11 iii I 0 C I eT I I C N All it, t 4r F I e lar3 o S ov R IN I I s -NA or 8ZJZ) ('are- ties ki r and o tied squaTif of i liortvinaltv and d One stiod ux- OF] inint- in -kif bac- ca% Ihnizontaii joints nozid rKlit I -it -h Id1w cd_-c nd utl Foint- In ]av cy,wi I, -Ti Lilt- LIVOF systcim- I -1 FTTI of' -M *1 tic thtckrte�ki,i Qil nut-rihea of la-verS fila tile I ITT- fir, lir nd -4 11 I I n it p- are ai� Protection on Each side of N`Iall Nit ill No. of M it]) Stud Stud I'ayers Thliars of Depth, Depth., & 11 lithAis 11tritinz Itiarn 2 Itiarin 2A of Panel q1tritalli 4� II I4 nll� III4 nIIn t1lick 4 IT In 111111 I It. t f I % NA DI A N GV PW M COM P AN 2 ai, Tvr,c I P - X iP( �Ia_ R 4� thick F-ypi: -",R, RX A-i, �al Rt 4 III pe, 11"A - Ill- I I k 1. 4li Tied Stairs Psurn I 2 Ifi thLiA IP-X2, R or RC fi tTjL:_ "i,fpc SUX, SH\ tRA � I P .-W IRN - 6� 1 1 1 -A R-1 I 114-- K 4 in, 1 't. I RA D I-, 1,S(; MIAW0 S A DE N iinck -1 Fit, It'( -AR of V.-R( Ik T,, IK III- Il'i A R, Sf- I�Fj\ DE -I- 7rt St 1: T, I --C. NV id' Rjnr,� 11 11' \1411 T-11A �Icnlll Min t oIIITan i4 %jr III, I n Itk-m - IIIT hol-�Fiyipa_L.�, tII7 il- Fj 'AA1,61, 1 14 Reaviria 'li,8 III Railikil! --- 11 I$ R. 14 R. NaII, tv� b,i 1�' -IT PROI)t (_-I'S INC GAGS IT MIN CON t 81 I Ni ITT Fill BETCO BLOCK & PRODUCTS INC, 1311A )MR AVES:YBROOK COW RET BLo(,K INC In-dp _iFf I Ilatts of sham NO I part clernelit b,., -and Injofe percietil h% Poirand Ceratent Stucro or Cv-psuan Ptam,wr— Add L fit [,I Cojlr�te Faraird p`jaAjjC' I 11.] IT tfnn%�, IT"_. Fi 'i e ICAN- k FA AN G NP.Stl (01NI RAN N_ pe S! r\ t GN, PSU 81 C,O ---- 1 rR_\_t1 sf4-\- I _-S(x Mf_XI (0 S A DE N' ---- T)_pc Sk!N--- _�B. (IN: upwil S all tCF1111t NO to Itelfil Wheln ised ll� the base linef a Nat iTtle cir facith cif ,Nal 1, Ficit- Fevt attachtneitit onk . a ii it No he ttsed,akith I tcrn i I - Nothl S:8 fit- th Nick lead backed miwk v,kith bc-i cted "qualle or t-,Ip,,T,,A Q(k-cs- a I �cd vLrfi,::a1J-v_ Verticl Tanis �imtcwd Nov-cr ;;:Iuas and stwEued min I Cal op As WL A -x. -s of it mre,J iro,utnds with 11- 14 in lumt, Ty S - 1 2 silec 1 IRAA__B.AR ENCINEERING ('ORP T�xW R R. 1, FiC i 6. Easteners — iNifil sh own.) ---- Fix use, maka lietT121 - I �ve IS or S- 1-1 It e Ne I I ei t s s a I s c d t c, a I a C I I pa I it d k1tcri I 9 I fin -rill W chatut W Is ( I tm Si nly I e laver st'stems: I in- I oil fcar 1 and -I L th ick pa. Fk-A s ol I - L4 in, for 14 im thick panel s. 3 in- 0117-1 w-hen tx inel -; ,,Tr ap IA i ed hon 1-01111131 I 1% or 8 i n . OC M o ng "ertnAl and fatitti-al and I 2 iji in ffic field whein prlels �ve applied �Fwoavvr wstentaiii: Iirst Im rr- a fift- for I and tn� thick or 1-11'41n� fi-a 4 in daki-k panc4s, spaucid 16 in --innil lavur= in- long tbr in-, in- thick panels i.w 1:14 in. lco.gfilt- 3.4 ini. thick- with sci offwt N in- Fucari fivi First Layer- I in, k -,w I t - -aug ft in. 4 - k li.c la,ka,- ill. 16I ti�2 ilf- 1. thick paltels, 24 it!- (X'. T11jrd laiwr- 2-11A for 5,8hatt, thick pareb 11-L 10112 linh-N6 in.. fi-tini nfi-ar ICHIC. x 1,� ��s in, dhick lantels, sixiced 24 im 0C. laya- I fIt all. tbicl� x1rivIS, h-I 'in. ]a rar parallel Tiaced -74 in. OC Fourth Im, -T- 2-5.-'S ang, fcw I itia� thic k panc Is or ip. IF to thick s �T_aced I _T it3i GIC SmNvs ffset mi n 6 int. fruin a Im. e r he lcm. studsillaurn 2)- Single laversi-stitim. I in� for and 5,81 in- duck Iyanels (v 4 in- Icaniz fix , 4 tram 1xiTurd NAhcii Thick tionck —4inced 8- li� 2 in.. Ck' wth additUxi a I screws I I n. and L- in.. f mm of the pi are cqw 8 ill 0C along viertilml. and bicittiNn and I 2 in: OC in the field liAhen pawk- ailrer k A I ertical4t first layti- I 111-lotakit-, for I- and in� thick are applied v eN lica Ih I'vyo 1. .. ystrals applaic pall or I� 1.4 in, lon4, filr an. thick pawls- spackt:id 16 in- (X', Seciond 1�5i8 ITL Icalw fiv I i'21 ill-_ S.C'8 in. di. i. k im itels 0 r 'I- 1 Icil 1, for in p-wel ,, Taced 16 itt 0C' with ofFiet S _4 it fil rst "I'viiii later systents applied F-1 .I in. fca, IT7 vuid 5S in. diic�. 1xv cv, 11- els- in, fi all. thick flancl simi-ed it;[.. Snt- tiolrl e& It altt� of the bowd with lin addi tionaii 1 4 In, fric-lan each of the Iwaard ec nod hav e in, hNng for I in.. 5.1'S thitA Pallefs car 2- LA I It. loing, ftai,14 in- thick tv acels, _T�ad 16 in CK, 8 inz fix-413 mw edg, of the -4 nvn oilig vath an additional wTLIN placed I- I in. f cv:a:h edge of diti- K-aTd with rci,vs I ef 8 m. from fu-st Liver. Three-lavervilvems: FlT-.,t I ;NFL Inowfor I.--) in.., in. thick- pamic spate 24 in. 0C.. Second laver= IN thick 24 itil: Thild 2-I .F4 i ii for 1,7�1 in.. 5 in- thiciu- luff I t,- toy it- thaick patiels- spactid 121 in, OIL'- offha rival 6 V-1- froah lailp II all haw-l-s- an a"Ticanal screw shall be pliaced I -141n_ from each cd.gc of the lxyard- Four -laver Se r- 1-5-1 lotw I jP, -CCYF i 4 -4 in, thicL. 24 tilT layel- I:r:ll in-, long for in, long thick 24 in- (V. Tiourth III, 10l fia' 12 an. thick paricls i.ir Ill. long f6r 8 in- thick 12 In- Screws of I man In, fivan halycr Rw all all in, eaclit e&e ofithe Furring Channels (OIN ional, not for fit: dc-mble Rusilitnt ch a inetS _am ml IS(i stect, spaccd vo-ticalk: a Tnax Not CU_ 11angC pothitivat T--AA ji-i C__-tefa irq i h Tv 12 q -it fo .nar :1 C1 _L E I iij NiL 44, (I k% T I in lom: ed Nt T use oth Item Ilk �iA Nape] Fra -nR Me I - in I -mhvvs (Not Shown i0polial or nc iii- bth 7 i n . di ee p 41,ii it IT, a x. 4 Odivsknbcd In kellit Nnt FNTF u-C mth kc-TTI In.. RSIC-1 th+2 coliiiiei RSI( dtps �,ecaated to �ra& TNo� x ui. nitall I Ili salt'l steel -w-rew the cenurr Pffli n clia Tin ells a re PAC INTERNA-110NAL INC RSIC-I. RSI('-),,,-, Framing Members (Optional. Not Sbowpyi — A:-; . le To N'C-M StC I Furring Channels- OU -UFa4 Ilud-11 iF�fd act a- liait�. and Blaiiket�� it, -t- d as de�t:pibedl ni Ilt� c oII4N I.E.1 0( ',U)d �eCT[F_ft: It, tvT) N -2 III coatst.- II F'r FIF'S O Nt"1101 I NC c4'. t� and Compointrad I o� ca—ir- &. -I of CoI It"T '_i� e--. T10111, n emn in ii�_t la, iding. Rti=ch or Stucco ln,� Ik, -tIT of T1 cact, - uid i,li re- -iL of M I c k Cinkil ki rax a nd atw vie [i,F f"'lT c Lintroll 11,N[Tfl])STArl'ES('..'%'I",I,I Nff'O- T,_Ilk� %S Irad Rail Iefll 'ji I 1, - I ci Lc _11' IIvi -TIT III 11 It oil ffir i-ittlwr ce Liz and 't,ac h F�� '01 f, ITT i pan hi-,j �i- 4 IIIIU It fl P itoTI] t oi 41 if I �ITTI Lh V II I 4 I IITftc t 1v 0 --I'll 'I 0 1. IF I! I 11i I I UL SyStern WWNNNNS-0'035 for Expansion Joints THIS DETAIL IS FOR ANY EXPANSION JOINTS IN FIRE RATED MASONRY WALLS ASSEMBLY RATING - 2 HR; JOINT WIDTH - 1 " MAX; NOT TO SCALE 1. WALL ASSEMBLY - MIN 7 1/2"THICK UL CLASSIFIED CONCRETE BLOCKS* OR MIN 7 1/2" THICK REINFORCED LIGHTWEIGHT OR NORMAL WEIGHT (100-150 PCF) STRUCTURAL CONCRETE SEE CONCRETE BLOCKS (CAZT) CATEGORY IN THE FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY FOR NAMES OF MANUFACTURERS 2. JOINT SYSTEM - MAX WIDTH OF JOINT IS 1'. THE JOINT SYSTEM SHALL CONSIST OF THE FOLLOWING: A. FORMING MATERIAL - NOM 1 1/4"DIAMETER POLYETHYLENE BACKER ROD COMPRESSED AND INSTALLED INTO JOINT. PACKING MATERIAL TO BE RECESSED FROM EACH SURFACE OF WALL AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMODATE THE REQUIRED THICKNESS OF FILL MATERIAL. B. FILL, VOID OR CAVITY MATERIAL� - MIN 1/2" THICKNESS OF FILL MATERIAL APPLIED WITHIN THE JOINT, FLUSH WITH BOTH SURFACES OF WALL. MINNESOTA MINING & MFG CO - FD 150+ *BEARING THE UL CLASSIFICATION MARK 9 i Desigilif No. (1415 -lil i7 aI4 HIT tj.� 0 T -7 47; TH a I — — - ----------- T lilmr, Suilv and Ceiling kunnairis, — "Y "Jnifl,�r n!'j; th7vv ,ibcn P ITT and 2 i`bricait-d ticlillijilil 2-4 %I,,(; fit .3-Fe ItSeu - and nkil v a"I kikkM [eel ki Eetio focal�d olte,. that- --reater n4 In- dt II,"o jr Fill eMITI IS 13-1!d� iin--01 C It ic-l_c:Fih!4 II ITT blie +t and, f' OF Wil MIT'. il A d 2A. itx4 Stud., f ace -1 II ep 4 in. deep hei- ,--III �N u� I- D Ie,21 i4 q �R kl ('11C I In jojjkT :jjjj `,11 J,�L� I 1 T]4,r 11 Lfl--l- F1 lqv� c1l P -11 ill 11 2ES For LK�ie of liixer ith fln;rictted From, IT /or t.al I ild I ed c -:r 'A-FT17T tulT ief- firc t a itboziad w rw FR_\e[ FRX:m(i T I I =i e lk iIfFT -d PC I4 aX CIN Intel, it UL �xstern r4o. W-J-'055 THROUGH NETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM -NOT TO SCALE DECEMBER 02,1997 F RATING - 2 HR T RATING - 0 HR I (/ SECTION A -A 1 . WALL ASSEMBLY MIN" THICK REINFORCED LIGHTWEIGHT OR NORMAL WEIGHT (1 00-1 50 PCF) CONCRETE, WALL MAY ALSO BE CONSTRUCTED OF ANY UL CLASSIFIED CONCRETE BLOCKS'. MAX DIAM OF OPENING IS 26". SEE CONCRETE BLOCKS (CAZT) CATEGORY IN THE FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY FOR 2. MANUFACTURER NAMES. THROUGH PENETRANT ONE METALLIC PIPE, CONDUIT OR TUBING TO BE INSTALLED EITHER CON- CENTRICALLY OR ECCENTRICALLY WITHIN THE FIRESTOP SYSTEM. THE ANNULAR SPACE BETWEEN PIPE, CONDUIT OR TUBING AND PERIPHERY OF OPENING SHALL BE MIN 0"(POINT CONTACT) TO MAX 11-3/4" PIPE, CONDUIT OR TUBING TO BE RIGIDLY SUPPORTED ON BOTH SIDES OF WALL ASSEMBLY. THE FOLLOWING TYPES AND SIZES OF METALLIC PIPES, CONDUIT OR TUBING MAY BE USED: A. STEEL PIPE NOM 24" DIAM (OR SMALLER) SCHEDULE 10 (OR HEAVIER) STEEL PIPE. B. IRON PIPE NOM 24" DIAM (OR SMALLER) CAST OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE. C. CONDUIT NOM 4" DIAM (OR SMALLER) STEEL ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING, NOM 6. DIAM (OR SMALLER) STEEL CONDUIT OR NOM 1 IN. DIAM (OR SMALLER) FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT. D. COPPER TUBING NOM 6" DIAM (OR SMALLER) TYPE L (OR HEAVIER) COPPER TUBING. 3. E. COPPER PIPE NOM 6' DIAM (OR SMALLER) REGULAR (OR HEAVIER) COPPER PIPE. FILL, VOID OR CAVITY MATERIAL" - SEALANT MIN 5/8 " THICKNESS OF FILL MATERIAL APPLIED WITHIN ANNULUS, FLUSH WITH BOTH SURFACES OF WALL. AT THE POINT CONTACT LOCATION BETWEEN THROUGH PENETRANT AND CONCRETE, A MIN 3/8"DIAM BEAD OF FILL MATERIAL SHALL BE APPLIED AT THE CONCR. / THRU PENETRANT INTERFACE ON BOTH WALL SURFACES. SPECIFIED TECHNOLOGIES INC - SPECSEAL 100, 101, 102 OR 105 SEALANT *BEARING THE UL CLASSIFICATION MARKING "Teell Fr- '14 iri S-j2mvl re PAC In Iie rniti onall laic -1 �N Pe Rsff 11 '-I a IoIfiC Par- I�Aud riet fA le�f of etitcal I Lu'nei� in Pe -[Lel '4�K-f ikls FlOt Iliad paiwl iyia� hunied to to 1_0 ot the Hi=rj.k ontal eed not be bacli,e, �lee in I h- joiliv- in t rtffF fian�-ls ar,� IT -in, 34� jfj rjjj� jl,jTjL7 IT-, in' iIL", PSUM kialit dtfunum 0 �%Falib_aaid tPPS the Iop,ffid of a Ca"adiau (;yp,;TuNo Co United State% Co p�e SI-IN IF SC "eikico 'S A, DE e SL.X Gypsum Boarlil'i S I fir bei cile& �q U111v vil t- )CE12d ri. in. of trano v) nI'T Iix el I I call I,T] ti. 0( 4eti a i ii I etl h o i 7, tital I I I ck II I i i nui eii,�d oi he b acied b aill 11 - 'PC 111-X -AR_,� sHN US Giijiguna, Co Tl, pe�s AR, C FIRVU IP-AR_ IPjX 1 � IP-X 113F-AR- Sf IX_ NVRC NVIRN I St' Nlexiro SA DV C V AR. C IP-.AR IP-X1 IP-X2- SCX SItX \% RC' �`,-RX Item B - 2 H r - Ch FT74i,-n Tim d iiN i t h h�- ii c I t'. 0� Y, q ialc� n ql� i Ti gif rri ih[ck, U ini r i 'fjij 111111 N"'Ide aitt -luil� v a il Nith ' iii. IN hase k ached to _aNer 24 in� (.)4-- an in-lalled t!Ttic-ldli, 111 if, All of, v�hefl justidw ho 211- OuItif or: C, ti� letudk� I IF' IffI112 PC t,cfc%,� ii lie.] I 1 I ed e :at. ik alfad led in, fini baw la% i!i rox, . ur', vfi-Ln iriilAled In f aw lz Or Hori,,,-_)iji.,q'U tleme T I ni E�T ITTI [I Of III CIA ke TIC . IT ba.c d 1l,v tz,, et _71ltuds And PC t�s A A _ IN Ix K( v fasurn Cial 1, lll� _F� p-, 1p�xl, SHX- WRC_ W.F IJS G. FPC-AR, or \N, R('- s _AR_ IR-AR P-X a IPC -A R� SU X. st IN 1,VRC, aRX -titfir-tiro S DF 2 I rt FA7s IPnX2_ ]PC -AR or NVRC: 4; itl� T� Pet- AR� ('. 11?�AR. IP�Xl 11`�X2, S( SHN_ WRX �ystein C - 2 "r - pf-anels- be7� q, HIT, CU S v FC ,r tape -ea diock- 48 t1L-r Iand f 2 an. OC inthe held 0C �Acqig the F,eifcll edge-s and n-i the field �,heji nt-ed not he back�-,-- ftittTaill- sc-,fv's in Reguire- Tpiii, 4 all tIni! IT hellirz, I - � IM RefV-Teki Filip in thiA MaTICT Canadian Cypsuot Co Ttves IP�Xl or Uhtacode. I S Cylasont Tikpes IP-X1 tl.t USG Metkiro Systenk D - 2 fir- vilh iquaw or TTY Is I Mrn li1pTi7ontill J6111S otRequin-es late of I og 5S In- thick Ilacker Wait, 7 :md- 1= L;2 in. thij.. hatt", Pei 11al j ' - Canadian Cypsum Co Ali C. IP- AR., JP-N 1., IP�X'21, IPC-AR- SCX- SHX, _R X I I- S GiN panin (-it) - -- T� AW RX-15- I P-. % R, I P- X IP-X' IPf_ -APL SCX- SFIX. \VRC� U t, sc; klexico S A DI: AR_ U. IP-AK- IP-\'. A R �;V%Telan 2 Hr- Pit kikith lhc-�eled_ qi uvo nii tapervid ni:kni ITT, �T- in ick it, i:kv 121, - -1 , , IP -1 i, W--- Ted to in hiin.-I Ti r,-2 S �tet�l spaced 11 in, (-X- oCanadian Gypsum Co 1:1 M_n' Ili I N viet (P-\'- Typ A 9,- C III - A R - I P - X I I I, PC -A R, S C X �;H X, \%:R(, WRX- ( S Cy iorin C" R: C': F'RX-(;- IT, -AR- IP-X I ll"_X2� IPC_ AR, !i�.-x a,N RX L NIe-6CNTas.A DF It:- IT po pf'r"AR, S(X SfIX_ AAIRC� v s� ten a F - 2 1 1 r - G nN IT i t- fxu id i I he � el ed If aaj e t ul d e& c�_ no it j 1,� in, 4-ki In, 4N of nan appl,cill in 11% o bin,i!T Fg ba,�c Fal, c�,T - rC,illerii i�hur I, 1 1 offi IT [ ------ I 1.11. 1,H)L I Pe S -,-keel crekk, Svacecl .14 it,- OuteF of facie I F im I it] klifir -1 % PA� LAd -Paceid I in 0( and Ila% i!r ___n itilior and num- -r-.z lagw Canaditut C vitisium Co --- I An T,, ne C. IP-X-'. 'all -RC in T� ile-i AR, IF , FRX-G, IP-AR_ IP-X 1 . IP- X2 AK_ S(-X- sHX, All, K - `aili'RX. [ S Gypsum f 'o - I C� I P-,,- 2 I P(. - AR \N-R( psii AR. C FRX-6 TP-AR. IP-X IP-X.-. 11PC-AR. SCX SIIX. VNRC. WRX 1lSG uxica S A DE C IP( -AR or ka, R( s in Fvpc-� Ak- C lP-.AR_ IP-X It JX_ IiiN, R( 'i!X R \ (ypsorl rd- — I As, anj alle7l� %� ill I tr- j so, If a;, 1 IT _,lik CT, IF; ot di te,ct In lead lift ed,..,e lCiticalh Vc-rilical ci�ft llorl!d aiuf 111111 'h1d �;il]Tl� U I to' it_F� rie A ir OC i a-d 1 2 in. OC [it th4� IiOd Ray-Har FnLinevvinz Coup -- 'I R114-44(i and t-'nntpotind ule Ina -int Svstrni�, A, R. C, E,i F - 14.-,Tint� on ou[Ci III, A- boLmbi 'lleffil mid 4A ith ale S% stetn" A. R. E. F IIa�, to f iro SiNksteilas C , D \In-t in I hl4nC'AIFfl '7 It IT- bclv, LXf[ [ILL� and Ijid for T%, n1 p, -1 po S 11-1 I all -it d v. I [it -1 - M ji -1�� I ii-i IT, Plt� -I J!- Ild c I I k`eT '2!L it I lartin if ii, Fr if. the u,. IT ni %,, ah laid I is y p s v No, Co Dt R K lci-4 k I y H1lLjTd tiag Adhe I51i�-1 iRL (B0A R I ir he I ii� Re-- I I I,, .,I ILead Darien Suips t t NA I I 11 II-] I -n-n, iflickififst: of IF-, S,Iir� pac�_ki dic -1-j ,-1-111101od [tie CNI��",-T I It in 11 a fit in lop- I PC IT XI [�ke .�l I - C R' IT ,�t IIil ail -Tred be "M titIIlel n o' IP1 Iona, :it k:-Ldtil,,,,i� 4 I ri- dicin h,, inak�, II01 CT IT111�t ITT k 101-il 1;Ih- I` I�fi lij IItfl,� f, I t 8 0 C1 :3 0 Co C: co M T- _j C.0 Cr) ICo cy) r 0 M j 0 CD -0 LL 0 cu M ui E�d Z (N E > (0 CU Uj 0— co 1-- U) 0 E E 0 clzs M N� i T _j M LE 0 < Z 0 -0 U) 0 U) 0_ (0 LU 0 0 M Fn Y N ,It 0C C'4 C:) 0 P� C, tn C',1 U) ZDLU LU U-1 LU Cn Cn Z > c:> LU C0 M < Uj Ilk > iJ_ LU F U) Z 0 U) Cf) U) LU 0- CD 9 LU Cn i� Uj I 0 Uj CD '3 r__ Q 0 22 LU U') Z (M !ae C) CD 0 LU IT--- __ I I li TI f t Al 22 RE Scale �I ._ 111®N�11111® [ ' US HIiY 301 FKEY PLAN N RETAIL C N � ® - O O � tV1 4U c+ O ^-jl O �o •r��A o �o O U o� U U V U O O Q- O (Ln V co(l)ao c cj mc O W CoJ L.L E 2 2 ( Z .L 0-) > w ILO J U I L I i Cf)� /yy I O O C I I J � co �'�" "" p w � Z �ygJgJ�Y ®� /� Q U to 0- (nui !' o WYNco a f d i s a� �I w� G 19 F Y g � e mi ui LL LU I J I� UJ H r w w _ U) cn z > o w M J Oa CO Q Q Z Lu w 11 h-- C!? Al 31 OBH -- PVC DOWNSPOUT CONCEALED IN COLUMN BELOW (C.D.S.) C.D.S. — B-G — RE: SECTIONS FOR SLOPES OF ALL PITCHED ROOFS A303-2 PREFIN. ALUM PARAPET CAP 1 2 Roof Plan Scale 118"=1'-0" REAR LEFT FN' RIGHT FRONT B-K — B,1 — 1. ALL GUTTERS ALONG THE FRONT PITCHED AREA (AREAS A, C, & E) TO BE 5" X 5" 2. ALL DOWNSPOUTS THAT SERVE AREAS A, C, & E TO BE 3" DIA. 3. ALL GUTTERS THAT SERVE AREAS B, D $ F TO BE 6" X 6" 4. ALL DOWNSPOUTS THAT DRAIN ONTO AREA G TO BE 6" X 6" 5. ALL PRIMARY SCUPPERS AND OVERFLOW SCUPPERS TO BE 8" X 16" MIN. 6. ALL DOWNSPOUTS THAT DRAIN AREA G TO BE 8" X 8" MIN. 7. ALL DOWNSPOUTS THAT DRAIN AREAS A, C, E OR G TO BE TIED DIRECTLY INTO THE SITE STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM UNDERGROUND. REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS FOR CONTINUATION OF STORM LINES. 8. ALL ELEMENTS OF THE ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM HAVE BEEN SIZED TO COMPLY WITH CHAPTER 1106 OF THE PLUMBING SECTION OF THE FBC. kll • • . �, 1 1 1 I .. i SUS HWY301� _0� KEY PLAN :N' M rI � rll� 0 Oo 0 � o do0 ct0 U N 0 CL 0 (Ln V (U O ao c J M •� U cn C /11 coJ .O W (p � LL a O Z L..E > w Co t� ) co U cn E E 0 0 c N ca Lu co O co �U z-�= >+ O W cn 0-U) & m�N a I' LL J W �. J t= F W , e e I- ryW W z CD�.? w 2 Co; J ra W y Lu - U) K 0 W Z U Lu Al 41 1 West Elevation - Building B Scale 1/8"=V-0" 2 East Elevation - Building B Scale 1/8"=1'-0" BA �CUBD �T 4 17 21 5 1 6 ❑❑ [][]I E] I 1 T 0 FIN. FLOOR 0'-0" AFF REFER TO CIVIL FOR EXACT ELEVATIONS I South Elevation - Buildinq B CB'❑ 1 _ - EXPOSED CMU ------------------- ---- a TO MASONRY 20'-0" AFF MATERIAL SCHEDULE MARK MATERIAL REMARKS 0STUCCO FINISH SYSTEM MEDIUM KNOCK DOWN, PAINTED, COLOR TO BE SELECTED BY OWNER O2 PRECAST WATER TABLE CULTURED STONE - PATTERN/COLOR PER OWNER O3 STONE VENEER CULTURED STONE - PATTERN/COLOR PER OWNER 4❑ E.I.F.S. APPLIED TRIM RE: A502 O5 E.I.F.S. COPING TRIM RE: DETAIL SHEETS ON A502 OPREFINISHED ALUMN. W P. HICKMAN CO., INC. STD COLOR AS SELECTED BY OWNER METAL COPING CAP ODOWNSPOUT & SCUPPER SYSTEM PREFINISHED ALUMN FINISH -COLOR PER OWNER, RE: A502-12/13 O DECORATIVE LIGHT RE: ELECTRICAL PLANS OREAR DOOR LIGHT RE: ELECTRICAL PLANS 10 MASONRY CONTROL RE: A502-11 JOINT 11 CHANNEL SCREED RE: A502-10 12 4' X 12' FRT PLYWOOD REPLACE DENS GLASS SHEATHING WITH PLYWOOD BEHIND ALL SIGN AREAS. MIN SIZE 4'-0" X 12'-0" OCLEAR 13 ANODIZED ALUMI. RE: A601 STOREFRONT SYSTEM 14 ASPHALT SHINGLE MANUFR, STYLE AND COLOR AS APPROVED BY OWNER 15 TENANT SIGNAGE BY TENANT 16 RESIDENTIAL STYLE RE: SECTIONS DORMER 17 BRACKET 8" HIGH X 6" WIDE X 1/2" THICK EIFS TRIM PIECE 18 FABRIC AWNING G.C. TO PROVIDE SIGNED & SEALED SHOP DRAWINGS 19 ELECTRICAL SERVICE RE: ELECTRICAL PLANS 20 PREFINISH ALUMNI. RE: A502-4 GUTTER 21 WINDOW RE: A601 22 OVERFLOW SCUPPER RE: A502-15 23 36" DIA. MEDALLION INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS 24 STORE ADDRESS BY OWNER 25 24" DIA. MEDALLION INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS 1.°,v �Y r%11/ PY r% �i N' r�E`TIPLAII Ar 1 RETAIL C Cn �'p 0 cd o l c� b\0 w -o • rj do 0 U o� a U U U U C O CL O rL V O CIOc 00 co co �LOMC U ^, W COi O W N U_cow U- � a Q Z a� 'L > W J ��m'a^ � vJ U Cn E E L Imp cn N MU) ILL U)0 2 -C U z A O w -0CnaCn 0 mYNof a_ U) O LU (20 Lij w J H W H F- ryw w m 07 U F•. > J Cn z 0 co Cn 2 m U) Of w 0- co 0 wT Cn$ W J W O C' W Uj CDU � _ Q fn fn U A201 4 North Elevation - Building B Scale TO PARAPET FRAMING 38'-6" AFF 12" X 4-1/2" EIFS TRIM STUCCO OVER DENS --- GLASS SHEATHING JOIST BEARING °O 34'-2" AFF EIFS TRIM. RE: A502-7 T 0 FRAMED OPENING 31'-10" AFF B 0 FRAMED OPENING 26'-0"AFF N w o�z o�= z u� U)ow :z CnW� w ui>0 WCn 0 Iwo > JOIST BEARING 17'-8 3/4" AFF FUTURE SIGN BY TENANT CULTURED STONE VENEER OVER FRT PLYWOOD SHEATHING TO ARCH_ I l'-0" AFF WINDOW BEYOND RE: A601 ALUM. STOREFRONT SYSTEM RE: A601 no ,B' E� ,B PREFIN ALUM PARAPET i CAP. RE: A501-2 i I I I I I I II I II I II I II � II I II I II I I I I II I II I II I II � II I I Ili I I III III I j I I I II I I I I 1I I I I I I I I I I I•�' T RE: A501-2 FOR TYP PARAPET WALL DETAIL RE: A141 FOR ROOF SYSTEM INFORMATION STRUCTURAL STEEL, RE: STRUCTURAL SPANDREL WINDOW, RE: A601 6" X 1" EIFS TRIM AROUND WINDOW EIFS TRIM. RE: A502-5 EIFS TRIM. RE: A502-7 LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING. — RE: STRUCTURAL 4" X 3" EIFS TRIM CONTINUE ROOF INSULATION INSIDE OF TOWER %4' PER FT MIN SLOPE �- STRUCTURAL STEEL, ALL FRAMED EXTERIOR WALLS RE: STRUCTURAL TO BE FILLED WITH MN. R19 BATTEN INSULATION. (NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY) �- LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING. RE: STRUCTURAL ALL EXTERIOR FRAMED WALLS TO BE MIN 1 HR FIRE RATED. EXTEND SHEATHING ALL THE GYP BOARD WAY TO UNDERSIDE OF ROOF SHEATHING DECK. RE: UL DETAIL U415 RE: A501-2 FOR TYP PARAPET WALL DETAIL RE: A141 FOR ROOF SYSTEM INFORMATION I I III 1 I III I I OF SLAB AND SIDEWALK I I I I I I I I I SIDEWALK I I CONCRETE SLAB ON COMPACTED GRADE I I SLOPE 1% MIN - I I W/ VAPOR BARRIER, RE:STRUCTURAL I I 2% MAX I I I I TO FLR SLAB 0'-0" AFF I I I I I I I I I f I I I I 1 Canopy Section Scale 1/2"=T-0" COLUMN FOOTINGS BEYOND. RE:STRUCTURAL I I I I -----.I----_T-J_L----I I I I I TO PARAPET FRAMING Y 34'-10" AFF 12" X 4-1/2" EIFS TRIM STUCCO OVER DENS GLASS SHEATHING TO WINDOW OIL ROUGH OPENING 31'-10" AFF .h JOIST BEARING 30'-10" AFF B 0 WINDOW OL ROUGH OPENING 26'-0" AFF STUCCO OVER DE GLASS SHEATHIN PINEAPPLE GROV MEDALLION. RE: ELEVATIONS JOIST BEARING 17'-8" AFF DRIP SCREED. FRY REGLET, DS-75-75 FUTURE SIGN BY TENANT REPLACE DENS GLASS WITH FRT PLYWOOD FOR 4' X 12' AREA BEHIND EACH FUTURE SIGN. RE: ELEVATIONS. 3/4" STUCCO OVER 5/8" DENSGLASS SHEATHING B 0 SOFFIT FRAMING 9'4' AFF CANVAS AWNING OVER ALUM. FRAME. G.C. TO PROVIDE SIGNED & SEALED SHOP DWGS FROM A FL. REGISTERED ENGINEER TO THE ARCHITECT FOR REVIEW & AS NEEDED FOR PERMITTING DRIP SCREED. FRY REGLET, DS-75-75 - ALUM. STOREFRONT SYSTEM. RE: A601 SIDEWALK SLOPE 1% MIN - 2% MAX TO FLR SLAB 0'-0" AFF 2 Canopy Section Scale 1/2"=1'4' PREFIN ALUM PARAPET CAP. RE: A501-2 RE: A501-2 FOR TYP PARAPET WALL DETAIL RE: A141 FOR ROOF SYSTEM INFORMATION %" PER FT MIN SLOPE STRUCTURAL STEEL,— RE:STRUCTURAL SPANDREL WINDOW. RE: A601 6" X 1" EIFS TRIM AROUND WINDOW EIFS TRIM. RE: A502-5 EIFS TRIM. RE: A502-7 LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING. RE: STRUCTURAL 7,4" CONTINUE ROOF INSULATION INSIDE OF TOWER %" PER FT MIN SLOPE I I II — I I I I i I I I I ill I 0 STRUCTURAL STEEL, RE: STRUCTURAL II _ — - LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING. RE:STRUCTURAL 1 I I I I 1 STRUCTURAL STEEL, RE: STRUCTURAL 14 GYP BOARD SHEATHING I I I I I I I ALL FRAMED EXTERIOR WALLS I TO BE FILLED WITH MIN. R19 BATTEN INSULATION. (NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY) I I I ALL EXTERIOR FRAMED WALLS TO BE MIN 1 HR FIRE RATED. EXTEND SHEATHING ALL THE WAY TO UNDERSIDE OF ROOF I DECK. RE: UL DETAIL U415 I I PARAPET WALL BEYOND. RE: ROOF PLAN II I II I PREFIN ALUM GUTTER. RE: A501-3 I RE: A501-2 FOR TYP PARAPET WALL DETAIL II I PREFIN ALUM DOWNSPOUT TO SPLASHBLOCK BELOW. RE: A501-3 OUTLINE OF I PARAPET WALL BEYOND. RE: ROOF PLAN I RE: A141 FOR ROOF SYSTEM INFORMATION 1� 2" EXP, JOINT BETWEEN EDGE OF SLAB AND SIDEWALK CONCRETE SLAB ON COMPACTED GRADE W/ VAPOR BARRIER, RE:STRUCTURAL COLUMN FOOTING BEYOND. RE:STRUCTURAL - - - - - - - - - - - - - I I I I I I B-C, D, PARAPq1 WALL BEYOND. RE: R09 PLAN i SHINGLES. SEE NOTE AT RIGHT. RE: A50R 2 FOR ROOF RIDGE [ TAIL TO DORMER OL FRAMING I I 12 25' 8"AFF 6 \ \ SELF-SEF LING SHINGL OVER 30# ROOF EAVE. RE: A502-1, SIM / / / / 1 1 FELT 0E R 5/8" FRT PLYW06 SPANDREL WINDOW. RE: A601 RE: A50, 16 FOR ROOF TERMIN TION DETAIL EIFS TRIM. RE: A502-9 / / 1 SHINGLES. SEE NOTEAT RIGHT. / / RE: A50112 FOR TYP PARAPq1 WALL DETAIL PREFIN ALUM GUTTER TIED INTO 1 DOWNSPOUT HIDDEN IN COLUMN BEYOND. ALL DOWNSPOUTS TO BE / RE: A14FOR ROOF TIED DIRECTLY INTO SITE STORM SYSTEM INFORMATION DRAINAGE SYSTEM UNDERGROUND. RE: ROOF PLAN & A5024 ems' 714" B 0 TRUSS ' /" P� FT --- --- --_ --- MIN OPE OL FRAMING - �_ - - - - - - 18'-4"AFFjok JOIST BEARING 17'-8" AFF i I I I I � RE: A502-1 FOR ROOF - EAVE DETAIL ( CONTINUE ROOF INSULATION -- I UNDER TRUSS TO EXTERIOR WALL CHANNEL SCREED. FRY I REGLET, PCS-75-75 \ STRUCTURAL STEEL, FUTURE SIGN BY TENANT +T' RE: STRUCTURAL REPLACE DENS GLASS WITH FRT PLYWOOD FOR 4' X 12' _ AREA BEHIND EACH FUTURE LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING. SIGN. RE: ELEVATIONS. ! RE: STRUCTURAL II 1 3/4" STUCCO OVER 5/8" DENSGLASS SHEATHING STRUCTURAL STEEL, I RE: STRUCTURAL L B 0 SOFFIT FRAMING _ 9'-0"AFF ------GYP BOARD SHEATHING - t- ! f I 1 � P � I f CANVAS AWNING OVER ALUM. FRAME. G.C. TO PROVIDE SIGNED & SEALED SHOP DWGS FROM A FL. REGISTERED I ENGINEER TO THE ARCHITECT FOR I REVIEW & AS NEEDED FOR PERMITTING DRIP SCREED. FRY REGLET, DS-75-75 I I I ALUM. STOREFRONT SYSTEM. RE: A601 I I I SIDEWALK SLOPE 1% MIN - I 2% MAX TO FLR SLAB 0'-0" AFF 3 Canopy Section Scale 112"=1'4' ALL FRAMED EXTERIOR WALLS TO BE FILLED WITH MIN. R19 BATTEN INSULATION. (NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY) ALL EXTERIOR FRAMED WALLS TO BE MIN 1 HR FIRE RATED. EXTEND SHEATHING ALL THE WAY TO UNDERSIDE OF ROOF DECK, RE: UL DETAIL U415 Y2" EXP. JOINT BETWEEN EDGE OF SLAB AND SIDEWALK CONCRETE SLAB ON COMPACTED GRADE W/ VAPOR BARRIER, RE:STRUCTURAL COLUMN FOOTING BEYOND. RE:STRUCTURAL p E z 0 d Cd 00 w� cu U �U �w U U U o� 4�, ago o,a� U O Q 0 c c ao U�o .� U M �L�J 0,; "- Lu �m co co �ate ' .� > z w ^^ Cu 6.-ME-(n ' 0 C E k I l Cu IL cylse Z A 0 0 N O_ a C w J H- W w U) w w m ,`. Qct ", Z > J w U) z 0 m m 2 m m Cr w a. CD 0 w Q v w C� J w :z rn O ~ cY7 C" W 55 Z 7 N w o c�� U C-9 � Q 2 a 0 A301 OL T 0 TRUSS 29' AFF RE: A502-2 FOR ROOF B-C kBD, / \ RIDGE DETAIL 12 / ,� \ 12 18 / / \ \ 18 SELF-SEALING \ \ SHINGLES OVER 30# FELT OVER 5/8" FRT SHINGLES. SEE NOTE AT RIGHT. \ i / / j PLYWOOD '• y i / I I \ i PREFIN ALUM GUTTER TIED INTO RE: A502-16 FOR ROOF I / / TERMINATION DETAIL DOWNSPOUT HIDDEN IN COLUMN / / BEYOND. ALL DOWNSPOUTS TO BE / TIED DIRECTLY INTO SITE STORM 12 DRAINAGE SYSTEM UNDERGROUND. 5 i— / RE: ROOF PLAN & A502-4 j � I I RE: A501-2 FOR TYP B 0 TRUSS ' _ - - _ _ _- _ _ __ __ _ _ PARAPET WALL DETAIL FRAMING _ _ _ 21'-0" AFF -1-1 1 RE: A141 FOR ROOF RE: A502-1 FOR ROOF SYSTEM INFORMATION EAVE DETAIL - T-4„ J I � l 14" PEI -- j l j R L DRIP SCREED. FRY MIN SLOPE REGLET, DS-75-75OL I I JOIST BEARING - 1 T-8"AFF II � i I - I CONTINUE ROOF INSULATION FUTURE SIGN BY TENANT - - UNDER TRUSS TO EXTERIOR WALL I - I REPLACE DENS GLASS WITH -- C FRT PLYWOOD FOR 4' X 12' L STRUCTURAL STEEL, AREA BEHIND EACH FUTURE RE: STRUCTURAL SIGN. RE: ELEVATIONS. 3/4" STUCCO OVER 5/8" DENSGL.ASS SHEATHING j B 0 SOFFIT j FRAMING - 9'-0" AFF # I I CANVAS AWNING OVER ALUM. FRAME. _ G.C. TO PROVIDE SIGNED & SEALED SHOP DWGS FROM A FL. REGISTERED ENGINEER TO THE ARCHITECT FOR REVIEW & AS NEEDED FOR PERMITTING I DRIP SCREED. FRY REGLET, DS-75-75 -� I I � ALUM. STOREFRONT SYSTEM. RE: A601 SIDEWALK SLOPE 1% MIN - 2% MAX TO FLR SLAB 0'-0" AFF Canopy Section Scale 112"=T-0" LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING. RE:STRUCTURAL - STRUCTURAL STEEL, RE: STRUCTURAL -- -- GYP BOARD SHEATHING I f( L----------� ALL FRAMED EXTERIOR WALLS TO BE FILLED WITH MIN. R19 BATTEN INSULATION. (NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY) ALL EXTERIOR FRAMED WALLS TO BE MIN 1 HR FIRE RATED. EXTEND SHEATHING ALL THE WAY TO UNDERSIDE OF ROOF DECK. RE: UL DETAIL U415 Y2" EXP. JOINT BETWEEN EDGE OF SLAB AND SIDEWALK CONCRETE SLAB ON COMPACTED GRADE W/ VAPOR BARRIER, RE:STRUCTURAL COLUMN FOOTING BEYOND. RE:STRUCTURAL B-C, B D i TO TRUSS I RE: A502-2 FOR ROOF RIDGE DETAIL 26'-6" AFF � i n 12 / 12 ELF -SEALING / / \ \ GLES OVER 30# 18 HIGH PITCHED ROOF ELT OVER 5/8" FRT BEYOND. RE: ROOF PLAN / / LYWOOD SHINGLES. SEE NOTE AT RIGHT. I / / / / RE: A502-16 FOR ROOF TERMINATION DETAIL RE: A501-2 FOR TYP PARAPET WALL DETAIL PREFIN ALUM GUTTER T19D INTO DOWNSPOUT HIDDEN IN COLUMN/ BEYOND. ALL DOWNSPOUTS TO BE 12 / RE: Al41 FOR ROOF TIED DIRECTLY INTO SITE STORM SYSTEM INFORMATION DRAINAGE SYSTEM UNDERGROUND. 5 RE: ROOF PLAN & A502-4 ' T-4" _ _ _ _ _ _ 1/4" PE FT B 0 TRUSS - -_ - - FRAMING--- -- ---- -- --_ - --� I MINS PE 18'-4" AFF -- - - - j JOIST BEARING- 1 T-8" AFF RE: A502-1 FOR ROOF - - EAVE DETAIL i ICONTINUE ROOF INSULATION I UNDER TRUSS TO EXTERIOR WALL CHANNEL SCREED, FRY REGLET, PCS-75-75 i STRUCTURAL STEEL, FUTURE SIGN BY TENANT RE: STRUCTURAL REPLACE DENS GLASS WITH - FRT PLYWOOD FOR 4' X 12' AREA BEHIND EACH FUTURE - LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING. SIGN. RE: ELEVATIONS. RE:STRUCTURAL 3/4" STUCCO OVER 5/8" - DENSGLASS SHEATHING I STRUCTURALSTEEL., / RE: STRUCTURAL B 0 SOFFIT l j FRAMING ------ j -�-- 9' 0"AFF ---- ---,� -- GYP BOARD SHEATHING I I ALL FRAMED EXTERIOR WALLS I TO BE FILLED WITH MIN. R19 CANVAS AWNING OVER ALUM. FRAME. I BATTEN INSULATION. (NOT G.C. TO PROVIDE SIGNED & SEALED i I I SHOWN FOR CLARITY) SHOP DWGS FROM A FL. REGISTERED ENGINEER TO THE ARCHITECT FOR REVIEW & AS NEEDED FOR PERMITTING I ALL EXTERIOR FRAMED WALLS I I TO BE MIN 1 HR FIRE RATED. EXTEND SHEATHING ALL THE DRIP SCREED. FRY REGLET, DS-75-75 I I WAY TO UNDERSIDE OF ROOF DECK. RE: UL DETAIL U415 I I ALUM. STOREFRONT SYSTEM. RE: A601 , I SIDEWALK SLOPE 1% MIN - I 2% MAX TO FLR SLAB 0'-0" AFF 2 Canopy Section Scale 1/2"=1'-0" L---------J Y2" EXP. JOINT BETWEEN EDGE OF SLAB AND SIDEWALK CONCRETE SLAB ON COMPACTED GRADE Wl VAPOR BARRIER, RE:STRUCTURAL COLUMN FOOTING BEYOND. RE:STRUCTURAL TO MASONRY 20'-0" AFF OIL JOIST BEARING 16'-4" AFF PREFIN. ALUM SCUPPER BOX BEYOND. RE: A502-12 & 13 PREFIN. ALUM DOWNSPOUT BEYOND. RE: ROOF PLAN FOR LOCATIONS AND SIZES. EIFS TRIM. RE: A502-8 STUCCO FINISH ------ __ ALL DOWNSPOUTS TO BE TIED DIRECTLY INTO SITE STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM UNDERGROUND. RE: ROOF PLAN. CONT. EXPANSION JOINT BETWEEN SIDEWALK & WALL SIDEWALK SLOPE 1% MIN - 2% MAX TO FLR SLAB ~ 0'-0" AFF i 3 Wall Section Scale 112"=1'-0" PREFIN ALUM. PARAPET CAP. RE: A501-1 i RE: A501-1 FOR TYP PARAPET L DETAIL RE: A141 FOR ROOF SYSTEM INFORMATION -- Y4" PER FT MIN SLOPE STRUCTURAL STEEL,1 1 RE: STRUCTURAL MASONRY WALL. RE: STRUCTURAL RE: A121 FOR INTERIOR FINISH INFORMATION CONT. EXPANSION JOINT BETWEEN FLOOR SLAB & WALL. RE: STRUCTURAL CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE W/ VAPOR BARRIER RE: STRUCTURAL CONT FOOTING RE: STRUCTURAL Ln 0 TO MASONRY 20'-0" AFF JOIST BEARING 14'-8" AFF OIL TO FLR SLAB 0'-0" AFF PREFIN. ALUM SCUPPER BOX BEYOND. RE: A502-12 & 13 PREFIN. ALUM DOWNSPOUT BEYOND. RE: ROOF PLAN FOR LOCATIONS AND SIZES. EIFS TRIM. - ---� RE: A502-8 STUCCO FINISH --------__ ALL DOWNSPOUTS TO BE TIED DIRECTLY INTO SITE STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM UNDERGROUND. RE: ROOF PLAN.--�� CONT. EXPANSION JOINT BETWEEN SIDEWALK & WALL SIDEWALK SLOPE 1% MIN - 2% MAX i 4 Wall Section Scale 112"=1'-0" PREFIN ALUM. PARAPET CAP. RE: A501-1 RE: A501-1 FOR TYP PARAPET WALL DETAIL r- RE: A141 FOR IROOF SYSTEM INFORMATION I 1 %" PER FT MIN SLOPE I STRUCTURAL STEEL, ! RE: STRUCTURAL ---' MASONRY WALL. RE: STRUCTURAL RE: Al21 FOR �J INTERIOR FINISH INFORMATION \- i CONT. EXPANSION JOINT BETWEEN FLOOR SLAB & WALL. RE: STRUCTURAL CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE WI VAPOR BARRIER RE: STRUCTURAL CONT FOOTING RE: STRUCTURAL U O C. 0 �L V co I ao � L O Co U ` a) O -� 0 N u' Cu LL z .� Q j w �CHU) U 0 E E 0 I co I Co LL CnZ)ui p 06 z �Y >+ O w �U)CLU) 0 inYON) d a U 0 w J F- WU/�� n F- F- V ) w w m z } o w r) e, m ,. m d z wu z O w U) m m ui w a- m o Q LLl J W d ti Z Cm O F- U C;; o in z o Lu N W o U 0 Q a o 0 Q Y U c9 Lu U A302 TO TRUSS 26'-6" AFF B 0 TRUSS FRAMING 18'-4" AFF OIST BEARING TIES W1 SLOPE B 0 SOFFIT _ FRAMING 9'-0" AFF IF TO FLR SLAB dk 0'-0" AFF Canopy Section Scale 112"=T-0" ■ fI RE: A501-2 FOR TYP PARAPET WALL DETAIL RE: Al FOR ROOF SYSTEM \ INFOR ATION I I I I h�I I I I I I I I, I 1� I I I I I I I I PREFIN ALUM PARAPET CAP. RE: A501-2 i — RE: A501-2 FOR TYP PARAPET WALL DETAIL RE: Al41 FOR ROOF SYSTEM INFORMATION ,UCTURAL STEEL, RE: STRUCTURAL SPANDREL WINDOW. RE: A601 6" X 1"EIFS TRIM AROUND WINDOW EIFS TRIM. RE: A502-5 EIFS TRIM. RE: A502-7 LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING. - RE: STRUCTURAL 4" X 3" EIFS TRIM -- CONTINUE ROOF INSULATION INSIDE OF TOWER 'I I I � IIII ICI I I I III III I I I I I ALL FRAMED EXTERIOR WALLS STRUCTURAL STEEL, TO BE FILLED WITH MIN. R19 RE: STRUCTURAL BATTEN INSULATION. (NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY) -- �- LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING. �. IIII ALL EXTERIOR FRAMED WALLS RE: STRUCTURAL � TO BE MIN 1 HR FIRE RATED. EXTEND SHEATHING ALL THE WAY TO UNDERSIDE OF ROOF DECK. RE: UL DETAIL U415 GYP BOARD SHEATHING I I ! I I I!! I I I I I I -- i I f l l I II I I I COLUMNS BEYOND. - RE: STRUCTURAL I I I I Y2" EXP. JOINT BETWEEN EDGE OF SLAB AND SIDEWALK I I I I I i TO PARAPET FRAMING 38'-6" AFF 12" X 4-112" EIFS TRIM STUCCO OVER DENS GLASS SHEATHING °D JOIST BEARING 34'-2" AFF T 0 FRAMED OPENING jk 31'-10" AFF B 0 FRAMED OPENING 26'-0" AFF o✓ W 8CZ o0Q U)LLJ oC/3 a�z F-wQ � oU) o' = W 0 z U LIJ i�.: a TO STEEL VARIES WITH ROOF SLOPE — CULTURED STONE VENEER OVER FRT PLYWOOD SHEATHING — WINDOW BEYOND RE: A601 ALUM. STOREFRONT SYSTEM �— RE: A601 CONCRETE SLAB ON COMPACTED GRADE — I SIDEWALK I I ( I I I W/ VAPOR BAftr21ER, RE:STRUCTUR,4L SLOPE 1% MIN - I I I 2% MAX T O FLR SLAB 0'-0" AFF I I I I I I - I I I I r----J-L�---1----- ---- L- T--T- --� COLUMN FOOTINGS BEYOND. ( I I I I I I RE: STRUCTURAL I I I I �-__-- ---J------®---J L------ -L L - - - - - - - J Canopy Section Scale 112"=1'-0" N o o Cd M O rt__J 7d o bj) Qrj , E •��W o o U0 Qo U o� �C UCD U U C O CL O V CU�00 C UN� � J U ( W-0LJL O' LL1ca Co LL zCD Q' N w CL Co CA U Cn k 0 I Cu � c Cn Mz)cno � 06 -C z 'F Mud >+ p wvi C. (n 0 mYNa d z i O Cn Cn 2 m Cn Lu w d Co 0 w cn J W b z O) O U -Wi CD CDseCD N W M_ CD o z � U 0 W C-)CD A303 TO PARAPET FRAMING 34'-10"AFF 12" X 4-1/2" EIFS TRIM STUCCO OVER DENS GLASS SHEATHING T 0 WINDOW ROUGH OPENING 31'-10" AFF JOIST BEARING 30'-10" AFF B 0 WINDOW ROUGH OPENING 26'-0" AFF STUCCO OVER DENS GLASS SHEATHING PINEAPPLE GRC MEDALLION. RE ELEVATIONS TO STEEL 18'-8" AFF OL JOIST BEARING 17'-8" AFF DRIP SCREED. FRY REGLET, DS-75-75 I FUTURE SIGN BY TENANT T - 1 REPLACE DENS GLASS WITH FRT PLYWOOD FOR 4' X 12' AREA BEHIND EACH FUTURE SIGN. RE: ELEVATIONS. I 314" STUCCO OVER 518" DENSGLASS SHEATHING B 0 SOFFIT Ak FRAMING 9'-0" AFF PREFIN ALUM PARAPET CAP. RE: A501-2 — — — — — — — — — RE: A501-2 FOR TYP ,B PARAPET WALL DETAIL ,B C B 1 / , I RE: A141 FOR ROOF SYSTEM INFORMATION i Ya" PER FT MIN SLOPE I STRUCTURALSTEEL, RE: STRUCTURAL SPANDREL WINDOW. RE: A601 6" X 1" EIFS TRIM AROUND WINDOW EIFS TRIM. RE: A502-5 EIFS TRIM. RE: A502-7 LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING. RE: STRUCTURAL I i i STRUCTURAL STEEL, RE: STRUCTURAL I I / / -- LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING. RE: STRUCTURAL_ i CANVAS AWNING OVER ALUM. FRAME. f G.C. TO PROVIDE SIGNED & SEALED SHOP DWGS FROM A FL. REGISTERED ENGINEER TO THE ARCHITECT FOR REVIEW & AS NEEDED FOR PERMITTING DRIP SCREED. FRY REGLET, DS-75-75 TO FLR SLAB 0'-0" AFF 1 Canopy Section Scale 112"=l'-0" STUCCO SOFFIT BEYOND STUCCO OVER DENSGLASS CEILING I ` CONT 4" PERIMETER VENT 'I STUCCO OVER DENSGLASS SOFFIT _ COLUMN BEYOND PILASTER BEYOND —� r — L---------J SIDEWALK SLOPE 1% MIN - 2% MAX 1! PARAPET WALL BEYOND. RE: ROOF PLAN PREFIN ALUM GUTTER. RE: A501-3 RE: A501-2 FOR TYP PARAPET WALL DETAIL PREFIN ALUM DOWNSPOUT TO SPLASHBLOCK BELOW, RE: A501-3 OUTLINE OF PARAPET WALL BEYOND, RE: ROOF PLAN RE: A141 FOR ROOF SYSTEM INFORMATION STRUCTURAL STEEL, RE: STRUCTURAL LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING. RE: STRUCTURAL -- STRUCTURAL STEEL, RE: STRUCTURAL R —_-- - — GYP BOARD SHEATHING L----------J ALL FRAMED EXTERIOR WALLS TO BE FILLED WITH MIN. R19 BATTEN INSULATION. (NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY) ALL EXTERIOR FRAMED WALLS TO BE MIN 1 HR FIRE RATED. EXTEND SHEATHING ALL THE WAY TO UNDERSIDE OF ROOF DECK. RE: UL DETAIL U415 ALUM.STOREFRONT SYSTEM. RE: A601 Y" EXP. JOINT BETWEEN EDGE OF SLAB AND SIDEWALK CONCRETE SLAB ON COMPACTED GRADE W/ VAPOR BARRIER, RE:STRUCTURAL COLUMN FOOTING BEYOND. RE: STRUCTURAL U O CL 0 rL V O e c0 cU J m (D •Lv�� W � i-o ELL N 2 N L1- z L 64 > w (D m a) cY) F— cn U Im U)ILL CO Z) T O 0 �-Y i W �+ z U A O fn ~ /^C-) 0 Q Cl) mLU YNd = W U F. a .... C/) is z > p L rn 4cn LU �. � .. 10 rn o I ti a z O N H O a of Q o d p 0 o UCD W S � U A304 DETAILS ARE SIM. FOR ALL PARAPET CONDITIONS. WHERE EXTERIOR FINISH OR EIFS IS NOT PRESENT REPOSITION NAILERS AS RE ---- PARAPET CAP OVER CLEAT W/ MIN. 4" PACKING PLATE @ JOINTS CORNICE MOLDING RE: ELEVATIONS -� BUILDING FINISH RE: ELEVATIONS — -- 1 MTL. Panel Roof Detail at CMU Wall SCALE: N.T.S. CONT. CLIP ATT, TO NAILERS @ 6" OC W/ SCREWS .045 EPDM MEMBRANE P.T. 2X6 NAILERS: ATT. TO CONC. T.B. @ 48" O.C. WIY" DIA. BOLTS MIN. EMBEDMENT: 4" SCREWS W/ NEOPRENE WASHERS @ 6" O.C. - HORIZ. SLOTTED HOLES IN FLASHING LEG %" "HAT SECTION" GALV. FURRING @ 24' O.C. ATT. TO CONC. BILK. @ 8" O.C. MASONRY WALL. RE: SECTIONS FASTENER SPACING MAY BE INCREASED WHERE ALLOWED BY WIND CLASSIFICATION 1" ALUM. SIDING ATT. TO FURRING @ 8" O.C. HORIZ. & 24" O.C. VERT. W/ SCREWS (COVER W/ SEALANT) REGLET ATT. TO WALL W/ SCRWS @ NEOPRENE WASHERS @ 8" O.C. 2 PIECE SNAP -IN COUNTER FLASHING SYSTEM CONCURRENT W/ THE PLY SHEET FLASHING SYSTEM INSTALLATION IN COLD APPLIED MODIFIED ENT EXTEND MIN. 4" ABOVE 'ERLITE CANT STRIP RE: ROOF PLAN FOR ROOF INFORMATION i 24" x 36" CEILING ACCESS HATCH - 6" MTL STUD FRAMING. SPACING INCREASED FROM 16" OC MAX TO 24" OC AT ACCESS HATCH LOCATIONS ONLY -- STUCCO CEILING SYSTEM RE: REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 5Canopy Access Hatch Detail SCALE: NTS Z-8" 2'-4%" 0 STUCCO OVER DENS GLASS SHEATHING 6" FRAMING. RE: STRUCT. STONE VENEER INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS 9 Pilaster at Building Corner SCALE: 34" = V-0" COLUMN DIM W DIM'B' B-A & B-14 2'-4" 014" B-A & B-15 2'-0" 0'-8" 10 Column Wrap Detail SCALE: 3/" = 1'-0" to co CV N 1� o g1 I t �1 $ o DETAILS ARE SIM. FOR ALL PARAPET CONDITIONS. WHERE EXTERIOR FINISH OR EIFS IS NOT PRESENT REPOSITION NAILERS AS REQUIRED. CONT. CLIP ATT. TO NAILERS @ 6" OC W/ SCREWS .045 EPDM MEMBRANE PARAPET CAP OVER RE: NOA FOR MAX WIDTH CLEAT W/ MIN. 4" SLOPE%" PER FT. MIN. P.T. 2X6 NAILERS: ATT. TO CONC. T.B. 48" O.C. @ PACKING PLATE @ loor WI%" DIA. BOLTS MIN. EMBEDMENT: 4" JOINTS SCREWS W/ NEOPRENE WASHERS @ 6" O.C. - HORIZ. SLOTTED HOLES IN FLASHING LEG CORNICE MOLDING RE: ELEVATIONS —__ s" "HAT SECTION" GALV. FURRING @ 24' O.C. ATT. I I I I TO CONC. BILK. @ 8" O.C. STUCCO OVER METAL STUD FRAMING. RE: SECTIONS DENSGLASS SHEATHING 5/8" FRT PLYWOOD ON INTERIOR SIDE OF ALL FRAMED PARAPET WALLS FASTENER SPACING MAY BE INCREASED WHERE ALLOWED BY 1" ALUM. SIDING ATT. TO FURRING @ 8" O.C. f HORIZ. & 24" O.C. VERT. W/ SCREWS (COVER W/ WIND CLASSIFICATION I I I I SEALANT) REGLET ATT. TO WALL W/ SCRWS @ NEOPRENE WASHERS @ 8" O.C. I I = I zl Z�,_ I I I �1 2 PIECE SNAP -IN COUNTER FLASHING SYSTEM / S�* CONCURRENT W/ THE PLY SHEET FLASHING SYSTEM INSTALLATION SET BASE FLASHING IN COLD APPLIED MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOF CEMENT EXTEND MIN. 4" ABOVE I I I CANT (18" MAX HT) __-- CONT. 4" FIBER OR PERLITE CANT STRIP I I I I I I I 2 MTL. Panel Roof Detail at Framed Wall SCALE: N.T.S. DOWNSPOUT. RE: ROOF PLAN U FOR STORM DRAINAGE INFO P 6" FRAMING. RE: STRUCT. I 34" FRT PLYWOOD IN PLACE —� OF DENS GLASS BEHIND STONE WAINSCOT & SILL �P i I STONE VENEER INSTALLED - GI�L-"CI. PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS / 8 CMU. RE: STRUCT. / 11_8" 2,_8„ STUCCO FINISH 6CornerPilaster at CMU Wall SCALE: 4" = V-0" 6" FRAMING. RE: STRUCT. STEEL COLUMN. RE: STRUCT. —� 34" FRT PLYWOOD IN PLACE OF DENS GLASS BEHIND STONE WAINSCOT & SILL STONE VENEER INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS A B 2'-8" RE: ROOF PLAN FOR ROOF INFORMATION DOWNSPOUT. RE: ROC FOR STORM DRAINAGE 6" FRAMING. RE: STRU 34" FRT PLYWOOD IN R OF DENS GLASS BEHIN STONE WAINSCOT & SII STONE VENEER INSTAL PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS 8" CMU. RE: STRUCT STUCCO FINISH - — 7 Pilaster at CMU Wall SCALE: 4" = V-0" 3 Gutter & Downspout Detail SCALE: N.T.S. CANOPY ROOF SYSTEM TO MATCH PUBLIX ROOF CONT. CLIP ATT. TO NAILERS @ 6" OC W/ SCREWS FLASHING OVER CLEAT. EXTEND UP & UNDER BASE FLASHING MIN. 8" LAP P.T. 2X NAILERS CONT. GUTTER. EXTEND UP & UNDER FLASHING MIN. 4" LAP EXTEND BASE FLASHING BEHIND GUTTER 4" DIA. ANCHOR @ ROLLOVER STRAP nnwmgPOUT TO CONCRETE SPLASHBLOCK BELOW PANEL DETAIL ON THIS SHEET FOR INFORMATION FOR FRAMED PARAPET iF PLAN FOR ROOF INFORMATION Z-8" 34" FRT PLYWOOD IN PLACE OF DENS GLASS BEHIND STONE WAINSCOT &SILL STONE VENEER INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS 8Pilaster at Framed Wall SCALE: %" = V-0" STUCCO OVER DENS GLASS SHEATHING 6" FRAMING. RE: STRUCT. DOWNSPOUT. RE: ROOF PLAN FOR STORM DRAINAGE INFO 4 Flashing Detail SCALE: N.T.S. WALL FINISH RE: PLAN SHEET MTL. REGLET EMBEDDED BEHIND WALL CLADDING BUILDING PAPER FASTENERS 24" O.C. 2X NAILER 3" (76mm) LAP (MIN.) W/ BEAD OF SEALANT 24 GAUGE SHEET MTL. COUNTERFLASHING OPTIONAL 2" WIDE CLIP 30" O.C. MEMBRANE BASE FLASHING co N 0 U c�c I y 00 00 qj a� w � Zj w w - >o E M 4,s; U o� cjr, U U C W 0 CL I 0 rL V cco UCo(0 U ce) ^� V/ CU J .2 w co Q z N L.E > 04 N J U I: 0 E E 0 c� J CU Li CD tit :3 06 L () z �Y >, O U —0 N L U LU o Y ►V a a w CU J �> F 0 w w s m U) z j� r, w o as , L> Uj z O Cl) m M m H w a ao 0 w Cn 0 J W O z rn o w 0 o w M o � m W v � Q 2 d 0 U SELF-SEALING ASHPALT SHINGLES OVER 30# FELT OVER 5/8" FIRE -RETARDANT PLYWOOD SCREW (4/PANEL) TAPE SEALANT CONT. DRIP FLASHING SEE GUTTER DETAIL THIS SHEET FOR MORE INFO SCREW ATTACHMENT @ 18" O.C. P.T. 2X WOOD NAILER PRE ENGINEERED TRUSS RE: STRUCTURAL STUCCO OVER DENSGLASS SHEATHING 3" VENTED DRIP SCREED FRY DS-75-V-300 1 Eave Detail Scale 3"=1'-0" BUILDING WALL. SHEATHING OVER FRAMING SHOWN. SOME LOCATIONS WILL HAVE CMU. RE: SECTIONS STUCCO FINISH SLOPE TOP V PER FT MIN EIFS TRIM PROFILE 0 i 7" 5" 4 DIMENSION IS FROM OUTSIDE FACE OF FINISH TO OUTSIDE FACE OF EIFS. IN AREAS WHERE STONE VENEER IS USED, INCREASE WIDTH OF EIFS AS NEEDED TO PROVIDE SAME DIMENSION FROM OUTSIDE FACE. 5EIFS Profile Scale 3"=1'-0" STUCCO RE: ELEVATIONS FRY REGLET CHANNEL SCREED - PCS-75-75 EXTERIOR WALL RE: PLANS SCREW ATTACHED AS PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATION 10 Channel Screed Detail Scale 1"=1'-0" SELF HEALING ASPHALT SHINGLES OVER 30 # FELT OVER 5/8" FRT PLYWOOD EXTEND FLASHING UP UNDER ROOFING FELT. MIN 8" LAP PT 2X WOOD BLOCKING PRE -FIN ALUM FLASHING OVER CONT CLEAT. REFER TO TYP PARAPET WALL DETAIL ON A501 METAL TRUSSES. RE: STRUCTURAL PLANS SELF-SEALING ASHPALT SHINGLES OVER 30# FELT OVER 58" FRT PLYWOOD UNDERLAYMENT RIDGE / HIP CAP 7 � ROOF TRUSS SYSTEM SCREW (3/PANEL) RE: STRUCTURAL NOTE: ALL FLASHINGS TO BE CORROSION RESISTANT MTL. W/ 4" MIN. OVERLAP 2 Ridge / Hip Detail Scale 3"=V-0" T-0" x 2'-6" ROOF SCUTTLE. BILCO TYPE "S" W/ LADDER UP SAFTEY POSTS. O O ° O RUNGS - 1" DIA. STEEL AT 12" OC. C JO (FULLY WELDED TO SIDE BARS) SIDES - (2) 2.5" x .375" STEEL BARS 22" APART � ;ol L 3X5X114, 3' LONG. WELDED TO ROOF OPENING SUPPORT STEEL AND OUTSIDE OF SIDE BAR. CENTER OF RUNG TO BE BETWEEN 3" MIN AND 5" MAX FROM EDGE OF HATCH WALL. ADJUST SIZE O OF ANGLE IF NEEDED. ROOF OPENING SUPPORT STEEL. RE: STRUCT. PROVIDE L 3X8X1/4, 3" LONG WELDED TO OUTSIDE OF SIDE BARS (3 EACH SIDE SPACED EVENLY 7 FROM FLOOR TO ROOF). ATTACH EACH ANGLE TO CMU WALL W/ (1) Y4" X 5" TITEN HD SCREW ANCHOR. O MASONRY WALL. RE: STRUCT. L 3X3X1/4, 3" LONG. WELDED TO OUTSIDE OF SIDE BAR. ATTACH EACH ANGLE TO CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB WITH (1) Y44" X 5" TITEN HD SCREW ANCHOR. 11 Control Screed Detail Scale 1"=1'4' STUCCO RE: ELEVATIONS SEALANT AS PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATION 2 PIECE FRY REGLET CONTROL SCREED - PCS-75-75 2-PC ALIGN WI MASONRY CONTROL JOINT OR JOINT IN WALL SHEATHING SCREW ATTACHED AS PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATION BUILDING WALL. SHEATHING OVER FRAMING SHOWN. SOME LOCATIONS WILL HAVE CMU. RE: SECTIONS STUCCO FINISH SLOPE TOP 1" PER FT MIN EIFS TRIM PROFILE STUCCO OVER DENSGLASS SHEATHING. CHANGE DENSGLASS TO FRT PLYWOOD BEHIND THE FLASHING CONT CASING BEAD BETWEEN J-MOLD AND FLASHING CONT. COUNTER FLASHING TYPE "B" ATTACH 12" O.C. CONT TYPE "A" FLASHING CONT 2X P.T. NAILER CONT HEN (FILL WI BUTYL) CONT 2X4 NAILER SELF-SEALING ASHPALT SHINGLES OVER 30# FELT UNDERLAYMENT 5/" FRT PLYWOOD SHEATHING WALL ROOF TRUSS RE: STRUCTURAL NOTE: ALL FLASHINGS TO BE CORROSION RESISTANT MTL. W/ 4" MIN. OVERLAP 3 Wall Abutment Detail Scale 3"=1'4' BUILDING WALL. SHEATHING OVER FRAMING SHOWN. SOME LOCATIONS WILL HAVE CMU. RE: SECTIONS STUCCO FINISH SLOPE TOP 1" PER FT MIN — EIFS TRIM PROFILE I N 2" 1 I 1 y 1 I DIMENSION IS FROM OUTSIDE FACE OF FINISH TO OUTSIDE FACE OF EIFS. IN AREAS WHERE STONE VENEER IS USED, INCREASE WIDTH OF EIFS AS NEEDED TO PROVIDE SAME DIMENSION FROM OUTSIDE FACE. 7EIFS Profile Scale 3"=1'-0" 0 M STUCCO FINISH " MTL. FLASHING PREFINISHED ALUMINUM — SCUPPER BOX SECURED TO BLDG W/ STRAP ANCHORS CLIPPER COLLAR BEYOND PREFINISHED ALUMINUM RAIN LEADER. RE: ROOF - PLAN FOR SIZING. 2" PREFINISHED ALUMINUM STRAP ANCHORS, PROVIDE MIN. ONE @ TOP & BOTTOM AND AT ALL NTERMEDIATE JOINTS. 12 Primary Roof Scupper & Downspout Scale V=1'-0" DIMENSION IS FROM OUTSIDE FA( OUTSIDE FACE OF EIFS, IN AREA,' VENEER IS USED, INCREASE WIDT NEEDED TO PROVIDE SAME DIMEP OUTSIDE FACE. EIFS Profile Scale 3"=V-0" WALL ABUTMENT TYPE "A" FLASHING N.T.S. s 7711 Y, WALL ABUTMENT TYPE "B" FLASHING N.T.S. RE: TYP PARAPET WALL DETAIL i / - SCUPPER CLEAR OPENING TO BE 8" X 16" PT 2X BLOCKING AS NEEDED / RE: ROOF PLAN i <I I I RE: STRUCTURAL DWGS FOR ROOF FRAMING INFORMATION L f MASONRY WALL. RE: I"> STRUCTURAL 13 Primary Roof Scupper & Downspout Scale 1"=1'-0" GUTTER STRAP @ 36" (STAGGER 18" FROM SUPPORT. ATTACH WITH SCREWS OR POP RIVETS PROTRUDING RIVET RECTANGULAR GUTTER. RE: ROOF PLAN FOR SIZING FM ROLL OVER HANGER @ 36" O.C. STAGGER 18" FROM STRAP D" SELF SEALING ASPHALT SHINGLES ON #30 FELT OVER 5/8" F.R.T. PLYWOOD CONT. CLIP ATT. W/ SCREWS @ 8" O.C. SCREW IN WOOD BLOCKING @ 18" O.C. HANGER Cl) AS NEEDED N CONT. DRIP FLASHING ti 4 Rectangular Gutter Detail Scale 3"=1'-0" BUILDING WALL. SHEATHING OVER FRAMING SHOWN. SOME LOCATIONS WILL HAVE CMU. RE: SECTIONS STUCCO FINISH SLOPE TOP 1" PER FT MIN — EIFS TRIM PROFILE 2" 4" 6" DIMENSION IS FROM OUTSIDE FACE OF FINISH TO OUTSIDE FACE OF EIFS, IN AREAS WHERE STONE VENEER IS USED, INCREASE WIDTH OF EIFS AS NEEDED TO PROVIDE SAME DIMENSION FROM OUTSIDE FACE. EIFS Profile Scale 3"=V-0" NOTE: PRE-ENGINEERED CURB BY RTU SUPPLIER NAILER SUPPLIER W/ CURB, ATTACH TO CURB AS PER MANUFACTURER'S RTU RECOMMENDATIONS / SPECS. [48" MAX. HEIGHT ABV. FRAME] RAIL -- SECURE CURB TO STEEL FRAME 9 USING #12 TEK SCREWS, 2 a@ EA. CORNER & 12" O.C. BTW. > STL. DECK, REF: GENERAL NOTES - - LT - MICRO -HOLD (8 MIN.) (2 EA. SIDE) - MICROMETL, 16 GA. MICRO -HOLD HOLD DOWN. ATTACH TO UNIT RAIL REF: MANUF. FOR INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 14 RTU Tie Down Detail SCALE:NTS REF: SEALANT PRE-SHAI METAL C( FLASHIN( RECEIVE[ SCUPPER CLEAR OP TO BE 8" X HEMMED EDGE MASONR` RE:STRU 15 Overflow Scupper Scale 1 "=1'-0" OVE =TAIL =D C) o U �a 0C W N ;E; M� ^^ll w vvvv� 0-oE • p.� o d o 0 C�lU o� U N P. k �a U U U W 0 0- 0 r0n V ICU N c 00 •� coM C: /�, U W J O m E(� U_ O 2 fa LL W M �Cl) I—(q' U Cn 0 E 0 i (3) J >• CUU� j c O W_ � 06 L U a c!-Y a Uj F z o V d 0 mYN0-Uj a cr) W i z � �I Q cI. Uj W z I- i9 I: r O Cn Cn 2 m Cn W a - co 0 W Cn v ;� 0 J W o z rn g N W Co z Q>i C-3 LW U c� d O O U 16 Pitched Roof Parapet Flashing Scale 1 1/2"=1'-0" DOOR LETTER Door Schedule RETAIL NUMBER DOOR FRAME GLASS HARDWARE REMARKS TYPE SIZE MATERIAL TYPE MATERIAL DETAILS SIZE TYPE SET FINAL CORE PROCESS FOR A— D-1 T-0" X T-0" ALUM F 1 ALUM H1, J1, S1 FULL FRAME TEMP 1 KAWNEER 350 X 1 3/4" X 114" THICK LOCKSETS &KEYING: MEDIUM STYLE D_3 3'-0" X 7'-0" HM F 3 HM H3, J3, S3 - 3 HM DOOR PAINT FINISH X 1 3/4" SUBCONTRACTORS WILL INSTALL ALL DOORS, FRAMES, LATEX GLOSS ENAMEL © D-3 3'-0" X 7'-0" X 1 3/4" HM F-3 HM H3, J3, S3 4 FIRE RISER ROOM HARDWARE,& LOCKSETS 64" 16'-0" 00 EQ. 3'-0" EQ. EQ. EQ. 3'-0" EQ. EQ. ov / VV O 0 N O zn Cl) O O Store Front Systems SCALE: 1/4" = V-0" RE: DETAILS FOR THICKNESSES NOTES: 1) INDICATES TEMPERED GLASS AS SHOWN ON ELEVATIONS ABOVE. 2) CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE FLORIDA PRODUCT APPROVAL SUBMITTALS FOR THE FOLLOWING BUILDING COMPONENTS THAT COMPLY WITH RULE 98-72: 1. EXTERIOR HOLLOW METAL DOORS 2. STORE FRONT SYSTEMS 3. ROOFING AND COPING CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE THREE COPIES FOR REVIEW AND SUBMITTAL TO THE LOCAL JURISDiCT!0N. 3) STOREFRONT SYSTEM ALUMINUM FRAMING COLOR: CLEAR ANODIZED ALUMINUM 4) STOREFRONT GLAZING TO BE CLEAR UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. HOOD TO 8" PAST E DOOR ON SAWCUT JOINT, PC HOOD, CC PERIMETI 22 GA. G/ RAINHOC TO MATC CONT. C/ PERIMETI STRIPPIN 4%" H-1 Rain Hood Detail J-1 SCALE: 3" =1'-0" Ci F_ Door & Frame Types SCALE: 1/4' = V-0' RE: SCHEDULE & DETAILS FOR DIMENSIONS 12-10" EQ. EQ. EQ. EQ. ov (V O * * * * 9 O ALUM.STOREFRONT SYSTEM ALUM. JAMB BEYOND ALUM. DOOR RE: DOOR SCHEDULE ALUM. JAMB W/ STOP TYP. ALUM. THRESHOLD BELOW ALUM. UUUK RE: DOOR SCHEDULE I f ALUM. JAMB BEYOND O W APPLIED SWEEP ALUM.THRESHOLD BY STOREFRONT INSTALLER FINISH FLOOR N RE: FLOOR PLAN SLOPE r f -- EXTERIOR WALK 3/8" PREFORMED ISOLATION JOINT S-1 5 Head/ Jamb/ Sill Details SCALE: 3" =1'4' H-2 / J-2 / S-2 - NOT USED 8'-6" 400, EQ. EQ. EQ. 10 O CV O 00 9 O REINFORCE[ PRECAST LIN RE: STRLICTL CAULK PERIN CONT. TYP FULL DOOR WEATHER ST GROUT SOLID TYP MASONRYJAMB ANCHOR AS REQ. REINFORCED CMU RE:STRUCTURAL 5a/ H-3 1. ADJUST ALL CLOSERS TO A 5 LB. MAX. OPENING FORCE. HARDWARE SET #1: KAWNEER SINGLE ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE SET #2: NOT USED 2. CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT TYPE WRITTEN SHOP DRAWINGS AND (1) SET SINGLE ACTING OFFSET PIVOT HINGES BY KAWNEER PRODUCT LITERATURE FOR ALL DOORS AND HARDWARE SPECIFIED. (1) DOOR CLOSER - NORTON 1605 SURFACE CLOSER PREPARED BY A LICENSED AND CERTIFIED CONSULTANT. (1) 4" EXTRUDED - MILL FINISH ALUMINUM THRESHOLD (FOR 3. ALL EXTERIOR HOLLOW CORE METAL DOORS ARE TO BE OFFSET PIVOT AND OVERHEAD CLOSER) (1) ADAMS RITE MS+1890 DEADLOCK/ LATCH COMBINATION INSULATED. DOOR AND FRAME TO BE SHOP PRIMED AND PAINTED. (1) ADAMS RITE 4590 LATCH PADDLE DEVICE 4. ALL LOCK AND PASSAGE SETS TO BE SCHLAGE GRADE OR BETTER. (1) ADAMS RITE STANDARD LATCH STRIKE AS REQUIRED (1) CYLINDER -SCHLAGE (7PIN) MORTISE -MATCH DOOR FINISH SUBMIT OTHERS FOR APPROVAL. LOCKS NEED TO BE REKEYABLE. (1) CP II DOOR PUSH & CO-9 PULL #14 CLEAR ANODIZE FINISH (1) SEALAIR WEATHERING SYSTEM AND EPDM BLADE 5. SUBMIT DETAILED HARDWARE SCHEDULE FOR SUFACE ATTACHED SWEEP STRIP. ARCHITECT'S APPROVAL. (1) CONTRACTOR INSTALLED NOTE: "DOOR TO REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING STORE OPERATION" 6. ALL DOORS AND HARDWARE TO COMPLY WITH NFPA 101-7.2.1.5. 7. ALL DOORS AND HARDWARE TO COMPLY WITH THE FLORIDA ACCESSIBILITY CODE AND THE A.D.A. FEDERAL REGULATION HARDWARE SET #4: (REAR EXIT DOOR) HARDWARE SET #4: (FIRE RISER ROOM DOOR) CODES, UTILIZING A LEVER LATCH OR LOCKSET. (1 1/2) PAIR HAGER 4 1/2 " x41/2 "BUTT (1 1/2) PAIR HAGER 4 1l2 " x41/2 "BUTT 8. ALL STORE FRONT SYSTEM DOOR KEYING SHALL BE INDIVIDUAL FULL MORTISE HINGES NO. BB1191 FULL MORTISE HINGES NO. B81191 AND MASTER KEYED. PROVIDE 2 SETS OF KEYS FOR EACH FINISH 26D (STAINLESS) FINISH 26D (STAINLESS) TENANT SPACE AND THREE MASTER KEYS TO THE OWNER. (1) LOCKSET SCHLAGE AL53PD "ENTRANCE LOCK" (1) LOCKSET SCHLAGE AL70PD "CLASSROOM LOCK" REAR EXIT DOORS SHALL BE INDIVIDUALLY KEYED AND PROVIDE (1) CLOSER - LCN NO.4040 FINISH US26D (1) CLOSER - LCN NO.4040 FINISH US26D 2 SETS TO THE OWNER. MOUNTED IN ROOM MOUNTED IN ROOM (1) SET FULL WEATHERSTRIP (1) SET FULL WEATHERSTRIP (1) ALUMINUM THRESHOLD (1) ALUMINUM THRESHOLD Hardware Notes &Schedule (1) RAIN HOOD (1) RAIN HOOD 2 0 L0 4'-8" 2'-5" 100, EQ EQ EQ EQ Q E EILIET] LIED E C W JuA q 6" WIDE EIFS TRIM N AROUND ENTIRE WINDOW O O FIXED SPANDREL GLAZING ABOVE STOREFRONT. RE: ELEVATIONS FOR LOCATIONS. SUBMIT SPANDREL SAMPLE FOR APPROVAL IRE FINISH =NANT JT SOLID TYP. URE FINISH TENANT L DOOR LATHER STRIP kULK PERIMETER )NT. TYP H.M. DOOR FRAME (BEYOND) ALUM. THRESHOLD SET IN MASTIC (TYP.) FINISH FLOOR RE: FLOOR PLAN SEAL FLASHING BY STOREFRONT SYSTEM MFG. FINISH FLOOR RE: FLOOR PLAN 318 " PREFORMED ISOLATION JOINT WH-1/WJ-1 WMA 4%" WS-1 \ \ Uj o ❑ ❑ EQ EQ d EEI LU d ❑❑ N El \\LU ❑❑Uj 6"WIDE EIFS TRIM p N AROUND ENTIRE WINDOW N O O FIXED SPANDREL GLAZING ABOVE FIXED SPANDREL GLAZING IN STOREFRONT. RE: ELEVATIONS FOR DORMER. RE: ELEVATIONS FOR LOCATIONS. SUBMIT SPANDREL LOCATIONS. SUBMIT SPANDREL SAMPLE FOR APPROVAL SAMPLE FOR APPROVAL 34' STUCCO SYSTEM DENSGLAS SHIM AS REQUIRED CONT. CAULK PERIMETER TYP. ALUMN. WINDOW SYSTEM ALUM. STORE- FRONT SYSTEM HORZ. MULL. SLOPE EXTERIOR WALK O O O O tVt�, U 1 M p d W >p E o < 0 w U o� _j tn v CN U W 0 0- 0 V (V c a0 �Lcacc)c /11 U i O W c cc w IL Q N z - i_ > w �cM�(n J U cn C 0 E E /0 CIZ I (1' cm J CU LL- �y W D p w 06E(.) z CDY O U -0 inL U Cn 0- � LU 0 mYNa a Uj U) 0 6 LL w 0 J 0 L Q w w z O Cn CD m U) w a m 0 w CD u¢J 0 J W ZM U � M o N w Lo p Z o U. o w Y U � 0 Q � LU S d O U INDEX SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES SECTION 02361 - TERMITE CONTROL SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTION 05210 - STEEL JOISTS SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK SECTION 05400 - COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION SECTION 07241 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB SECTION 07311 -ASPHALT SHINGLES SECTION 07412 - METAL WALL PANELS SECTION 07511 - BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08311 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS SECTION 08800 - GLAZING SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES SECTION 09900 - PAINT AND WALL FINISHES SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY PART I - GENERAL L I WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: Bldg B at Zephyr Commons-, l . Project Location: Kossick Rd & LIS Highway 301, Zephyr Hills, FL (Pasco County). 2. Owner: Primerica Group One, Inc. B. The Work consists of approximately 15,066 SF of "grey box" retail spaces with limited sidewalks. C. Project will be constructed under a general construction contract. 1.2 WORK SEQUENCE A. The Work shall be conducted in one phase. l . Work shall be substantially complete and ready for occupancy within calendar days of the Notice to Proceed. 1.3 USE OF PREMISES A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. B. Cooperate- fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. 1.4 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system. B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain ternns, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. END OF SECTION 01100 SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.2 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner -Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 14 days, or as indicated after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and cred- its to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. C. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not lim- ited to, changes in activity duration, Start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. B. Contractor -Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete descrip- tion of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 5. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709. D. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within 21 days of receipt of the Change Order or Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed. Owner will reject claims submitted later than 21 days after such authorization. 1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Docu- ments. 2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower -priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. 1.3 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. 1.4 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. I . Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be fol- lowed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjust- ments to the Contract. END OF SECTION 01250 SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. 1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including Submittals Schedule and Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than 7 days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. C. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. C. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value. I ) 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one -hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project M�:n±aal table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcon- tract amounts, where appropriate. 4. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance. Show line -item value of unit -cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Docu- ments to determine quantities. 1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. L Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Pay- ment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment. C. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revi- sions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period cov- ered by application. D. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. I . Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about Application. E. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested, before deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with Contractor's waiver of mechanic's lien for construction period covered by the application. a. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. F. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Appli- cation for Payment include the following: I . List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 5. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 6. Copies of building permits. 7. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 8. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 9. Performance and payment bonds. 10. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. G. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of des- ignated portions of the Work. H. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obliga- tions were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. END OF SECTION 01290 SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: i. General Project coordination procedures. 2. Coordination Drawings. 3. Project meetings. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required main- tenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 1.3 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 3 days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect the progress and completion of the Work. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction or as specifically requested elsewhere in the Construction Documents. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration. Discuss and resolve all items related to the activity to be performed. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements. 4. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be repre- sented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present. 3. Reporting: Distribute minutes of th - meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, (,-'progress since the previous meeting and report. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. END OF SECTION 01310 SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during perfor- mance of the Work, including the following: 1. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submittals Schedule. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals Schedule: Submit 3 copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: I . Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Name of subcontractor. 4. Description of the Work covered. 5. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit 2 printed copies of initial schedule, one a reproducible print and one a blue- or black - line print, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of Substantial Completion. B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 2-0 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include number of days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include aa separate activity for each contract. 3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect on the schedule of the following: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. C. Uninterruptible services. d. Use of premises restrictions. e. Provisions for future construction. f. Seasonal variations. g. Environmental control. 5. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work. D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Pro- ceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. 2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART) A. Gantt -Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt -chart -type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 days of date established the Notice to Proceed. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous verti- cal line. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At intervals appropriate to the construction, update schedule to reflect actual con- struction progress and activities. Issue schedule before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need -to -know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 01320 SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART I- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals. 1.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. B. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall com- mence on Architect's receipt of submittal. 1. Initial Review: Allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow ;additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Allow 14 days for processing each resubmittal. 4. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing. C. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Unique identifier, including revision number. i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Other necessary identification. D. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. E. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. F. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review received from sources other than Contractor or for items that do not require submittals in the Contract Documents. 1. Include Contractor's certification stating that the information submitted has been reviewed and complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Transmittal Form: Use AIA DOCUrnent G810. G. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in connection with construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. I . Number of Copies: Submit 3 copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return 2 copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. 2. Complete Submittals: Submit complete submittals in accordance with submittal schedule. The architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal until remaining information required in that section or division is provided. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1 If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use submit as Sh op Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project -specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. D. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following: 1. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 2. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. 3. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated. Attach label on unexposed side. 4. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 5. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality -control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. E. Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended loca- tion. F. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work including p y y g p p P g those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use CS Form L5A or similar format suitable to the Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken. C. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 01330 Cn 4--) ( U 4_4 Ici0 U N o 0 v .r-.4 O N ti M U 7r.r P_� V U o u, U a) = 0 Q 0 0 C� U wm __ 2:i Qo Of a) C)0 Of o 0LL. 0� z � '� z C11; J U Cn = 0 E E O U Q C) NCO '�# � � Z 0 CZ = 0 !_ Q C/) J LL. � co .6 � 0 0 -' LL J Z 0) Y T F- U >_ w0 Lu OLu e IV Of IL CD SE Mg CD d Cl) U 0 M 14 K y . IT 30 N 4- 3- U3 = 0 Cl0 yC.� _ -_- U 0- m W 0) ��J F F- h coW = U) f k1 w,.:- 1 z >M ,..'� �' m� '" k Q ?' w _'• �'n. -. > J wLL 'aj.,4 -' I. � _., .11 11 z __ j� 1. 11 z 0 SQ 0o U) F- Cc LL, 0- 0 W q Q o W N C'�J CO [-- co LY U 0 a M N Q W Cn U)0 o _ chCC O m c.7 0 W y = U 03 BLDG B PACKAGE -- F I i -- - r- - - - - SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing es g and d inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality -control procedures that facilitate compli- ance with the Contract Document requirements. 2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having juris- diction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Quality -Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed construction complies with requirements. B. Quality -Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full-size, physical example assemblies to illustrate finishes and materials. Mockups are used to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. D. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as test- ing agency. 1.3 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. I. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Delegated -Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. B. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Naiiles of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document re uire- P p q ments. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. C. PermitsLicenses,and Certificates: . F r w ner's records, submit copies es of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, co -respondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performane: of the Work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firn experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance., as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Factory -Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service perfor- mance. D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of Successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. L Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and similar regulations governing the Work, nor interfere with local trade -union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as docu- mented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in types of tests and inspections to be performed. 1.6 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality -control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of the types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Con- tract Documents will be charged to Contractor. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality -control services specified and required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality -con- trol services. a. Contractor shall not employ the same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be per- formed. 3. Where quality -control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality -control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibil- ity. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing. D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality - control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents. E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 3. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality -control service through Contrac- tor. 4. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 5. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. END OF SECTION 01400 SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and secu- rity and protection facilities. B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Sewers and drainage. 2. Water service and distribution. 3. Sanitary facilities, including toilets, wash facilities, and drinking -water facilities. 4. Electric power service. 5. Lighting. 6. Telephone service. C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Project identification and temporary signs. 2 Field offices. 3. Temporary stairs. D. Securityand protection facilities include but are n limited h following: p , t of ted to, the 1. Environmental protection. 2. Stormwater control. 3. Tree and plant protection. 4. Barricades, warning signs, and lights. 5. Fire protection. 1.2 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Architect and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Owner's construction forces. 2. Occupants of Project. 3. Architect. 4. Testing agencies. 5. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage, by all parties engaged in construction, at Project site. C. Water Service: Pay water service use charges, whether metered or otherwise, for water used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site. D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges, whether metered or otherwise, for electricity used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with ANSI A 10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241. 1. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to inter- fere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions. 2. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended. B. Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as indicated or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures in quantities and locations determined by regulation of any authority having jurisdiction. 1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure. C. Self -Contained Toilet Units: Single -occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass -fiber -reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material in quantities and locations determined by regulation of any authority having jurisdiction D. Drinking -Water Fixtures: Drinking -water fountains or Containerized, tap -dispenser, bottled -water drinking -water units, including paper cup supply in quantities and locations determined by regulation of any authority having jurisdiction E. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlet., to prevent insertion of I I0- to 120-V plugs into higher -voltage outlets; equipped with ground -fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light. F. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for surveillance, wiring circuits, not exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relo- cate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where utility com- pany provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company recommendations. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is available, provide trucked -in services. B. Sewers and Drainage: If sewers are available, provide temporary connections to remove effluent that can be discharged lawfully. If sewers are not available or cannot be used, provide drainage ditches, dry wells, stabilization ponds, and similar facilities. If -i neither sewers nor drainage facilities can be lawfully used for disc:harTr of effluent, prw,ride containers to remove and dispose of effluent off -site in a lawful manner. C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction until permanent water service is in use. Sterilize temporary water piping before use. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking -water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. 1. Maintain a minimum temperature of 50 deg F in pennanently enclosed portions of building for normal construction activi- ties, and 65 deg F for finishing activities and areas where finished Work has been installed. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of com- pleted installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. . G. Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capac- ity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters, transformers, overload -protected disconnec;'ng means, automatic ground -fault interrupters, and main distribution switchgear. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period for common -use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction activities. I . Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer with modem in each field office. 2. Provide an answering machine on superintendent's telephone. 3. Provide a facsimile machine for site use 4. Provide a portable cellular telephone for superintendent's use in making and receiving telephone calls when away from field office. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access, making them accessible for handicap access where required by the authority having jurisdiction. 2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remain- ing after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare Project identification and other signs in sizes indicated. Install signs where indicated to inform public and persons seeking entrance to Project. 1. Prepare temporary signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and visitors. 2. Construct signs of exterior -type Grade B-B high -density concrete form overlay plywood in sizes and thicknesses indicated. Support on posts or framing of preservative -treated wood or steel. 3. Paint sign panel and applied graphics with exterior -grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior primer. C. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate. Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. Avoid using tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of no]semaking tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near Project site. B. Stormwater Control: Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. C. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from construction damage. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. D. Tree and Plant Protection: Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Tree Protection and Trimming." E. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erecting structurally adequate bar- ricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. F. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. G. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire -protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire -pro- tection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1. Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessible from space being served, with sign mounted above. Store combustible materials in containers in fire -safe locations. 2. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire -protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire -exposure areas. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take pos- session of Project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01500 SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the follow- ing: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project Record Documents. 3. Operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Warranties. 5. Instruction of Owner's personnel. 6. Final cleaning. 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. I. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar docu- ments. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting &,vner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar ele- ments. 1 1. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either pro- ceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Comple- tion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or cor- rected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.3 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final ins ection for determining elate of FinalCompletion, l � v' n o . q � p a comp complete the folk rnL,. 1. Submit a final Application for Pa Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures.' y �. , 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or other- wise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest -control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, ands stems. P p J PY B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or cor- rected. 1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Preparation: Submit 3 copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use CS Form 14.1 A. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equip- ment, and building systems. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black -line white prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked -up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed instal- lations. 2. Mark record sets with erasable, red -colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location. 3. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, and similar identification where applicable. 4. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. C. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: 1. Operation Data: Include emergency instructions and procedures, system and equipment descriptions, operating procedures, and sequence of operations. 2. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's information, list of spare parts, maintenance procedures, maintenance and ser- vice schedules for preventive and routine maintenance, and copies of warranties and bonds. B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index data in heavy-duty, three- ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents. 1.7 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instruc- tions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even -textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dirt -free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. g. Sweep concrete floors broom -clean in unoccupied spaces. h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision -obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materi- als. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. J. Remove labels that are not permanent. k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 2) 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. 1. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. M. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned -out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply withh ecsuirements for new fixtures. q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. B. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 01770 SECTION 02361 - TERMITE CONTROL PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes soil treatment for termite control. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated, including EPA -Registered Label. B. Product certificates. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A pest control operator who is licensed according to regulations of authorities havimg uris dreti n to apply _ ly termite control treatment in Jurisdiction where Project is located. 1P� J J B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides, and label with a Federal registration number, to comply with EPA regulations and authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Soil Termiticide Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by applicator and Contractor, certifying that applied soil termiticide treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered p y g e d within 5 years from date of Substantial Completion, re -treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TERMITE CONTROL A. Soil Treatment: EPA -registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in a soluble or emul- sible, concentrated formulation that dilutes with water or foaming agent. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to plants. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorpo- rated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AgrEvo Environmental Health, Inc.; a company of Hoechst and Schering, Berlin. b. Bayer Corp.; Garden & Professional Care.. c. DowElanco. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SOIL TREATMENT APPLICATION A. Apply soil treatment at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, accord- ing to the product's EPA -Registered Label. 1. Mix termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. 2. Apply to produce a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone around and under building con- struction. Distribute the treatment evenly. 3. Slabs -on -Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground -supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 4. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along entire inside perimeter of foundation walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab, and around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. 5. Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations. Treat adjacent areas including around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases. Apply overall treatment only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or ground. 6. Masonry: Treat voids. 7. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated. B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground -supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA -Registered Label instructions. D. Post warning signs in areas of application. E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas distu,reed b subse uerA excavation grading, landscaping, or other construction activities PP Y y q , g g, p n, following application. Cn - --) Q Cu �'c N O o 0 Q v 4t y U`'C� ,� ,-+ O w Ct ;...4 D I N 03 w U 0 Q 0 i 0 CZ `° 0 U w ' z co a -^=^, < o K W U 0 0 0- z � Q w .a Cl)F- J U N E Mg . 00Q N U aI 0 f 3 0m LL N 0m Z N g� CD >< x ci `' Of N N ZT w °O 0 N Q� 0 N V �_ a- (f) C= 0 CZ U a= U a) a) co _J 0) p: 70 LU c wo w = v) z I > o w� min 11 11, _X\_o z w , �; , y „�, . .y: a cn fin. 4i 1 `• tb z 0 L m U) �__ Ir w a_ 0 w q � o J w N CM CO rr .:,�.%.....�,,�-,..".........................................�......�. ...... I .. ............. I .............. ..... 11 ... ::::;::�:::::�::::::: _ ... � ....... - ...1....,..'......- � .... ......... __ o ^ mU � 0 o 11, w c; r L,JY Ito N o C'S ca Cn = a �Q 0 U BLDG B PACKAGE END OF SECTION 02361 SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes cast -in -place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each manufactured material and product indicated. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix indicated. C. Shop Drawings: Include details of steel reinforcement placement including material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports. D. Material test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. B. Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," including the following, unless modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. General requirements, including submittals, quality assurance, acceptance of structure, and protection of in -place concrete. 2. Formwork and form accessories. 3. Steel reinforcement and supports. 4. Concrete mixtures. 5. Handling, placing, and constructing concrete. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Formwork: Furnish formwork and form accessories according to ACI 301. B. Steel Reinforcement: 1. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. 2. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into flat sheets. C. Concrete Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 2. Normal -Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, not exceeding 1/4-inch nominal size. 3. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330. 4. Water: Complying with ASTM C 94. D. Admixtures: 1. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 2. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Types A, D, F or G. If "F", see 2.2A. E. Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils thick. F. Preformed Joint -Filler: ASTM D 1751, asphalt -saturated cellulosic fiber. G. Curing Materials: 1. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. 2. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film. 3. Water: Potable. 4. Clear, Solvent -Borne, Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. 2.2 CONCRETE MIXES A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures. B. Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, for normal -weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days). 2. Slump: 4 inches. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Formwork: Design, construct, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301. B. Vapor Retarder: Install, protect, and repair vapor -retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643; place sheets in position with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour. I . Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. C. Steel Reinforcement: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforce- ment. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. D. Joints: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. I . Construction Joints: Locate and install so as not to impair strength or appearance of concrete, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 2, Isolation Joints: Install preforned joint filler at junctions with slabs -on -grade and vertical surfaces, such as column ped- estals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, to full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: Fonn weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows: a. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond -rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. E. Tolerances: Comply with ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 3.2 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Comply with recommendations in ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. B. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. 3.3 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. B. Smooth -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Completely remove fins and other projec- tions. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, or painting. 2. Apply grout -cleaned finish, defined in ACI 301, to smooth -formed finished concrete. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uni- formly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1 R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open - textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. C. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded cementitious floor finish, unless otherwise indicated. D. Float Finish: Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor and slab surfaces to be cov- ered with fluid -applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand -bed terrazzo. E. Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film -finish coating system. F. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to surfaces indicated and to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber -bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. 3.5 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection, and follow recommendations in ACI 305R for hot -weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions occur before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. D. Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days as follows: , r r roller according manufacturer'sri n 1. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by powerspray o to written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Tests will be performed according to ACI 301. 1. Testing Frequency: One composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. END OF SECTION 03300 SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. Integral color split -face concrete masonry units with integral water repellant. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product indicated. B. Samples: Showing the full range of colors and textures available for exposed masonry units and colored mortars. C. Material Test Reports: For each type of masonry unit, mortar, and grout required. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold -Weather Requirements: Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freez- ing conditions. Comply with cold -weather construction requirements in ACI 530.1. B. Hot -Weather Requirements: When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F, or 90 deg F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph, do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COLORS AND TEXTURES A. Exposed Masonry Units: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: 1900-psi minimum, average net -area compressive strength. 2. Weight Classification: Normal weight. 3. Type: II, nonmoisture-controlled units. 4. Exposed Faces of Decorative Units: Normal -weight aggregate, split -face finish 5. Special Shapes: Provide for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers,'.)onding, and other special conditions. 6. Water Repellant Admixture: In addition to other con stituants previously exstablished as suiatble for use in concrete masonry conforming to ASTM standards, all units shall be manufactured with an integtral water repellant admixture. The integral water repellant admixture shall be certified, by the admixture manufacturer, with the wall showing no visible water when tested in accordance with ASTM E514-90. 7. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide concrete masonry units from the following: a. Dernaco. 2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1, except Type III may be used for cold -weather construction. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. 1. Products: a. Blue Circle Cement; Magnolia Superborrd Mortar Cement. b. Lafarge Corporation; Lafarge Mortar Cement. D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. E. Pigmented Mortar: Colored cement or cement -lime formulation as required to produce the color indicated. 1. Colored Masonry Cement: a. Products: 1) Blue Circle Cement, Magnolia Masonry Cement. 2) Essroc Materials, Inc.; Brixrnent-in-Color. 3) Holnam, Inc.; Rainbow Mortamix Custorn Color Masonry Cement. F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. H. Water: Potable. 2.4 REINFORCING A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M; ASTM A 616/A 616M, including Supplement 1; or ASTM A 617/ A 617M, Grade 60. B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A 951; mill galvanized, carbon -steel wire for interior walls and hot -dip galvanized, carbon - steel wire for exterior walls. 1. Single-Wythe Masonry: Use either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods and cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches o.c. C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Steel Frame: Two-piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to wall. L Anchor Section: Crimped 1/4-inch diameter, galvanized steel wire anchor section for welding to steel. 2. Tie Section: Triangular -shaped wire tie, sized to extend within I inch of masonry face, made from 0.1875-inch- diameter, galvanized steel wire. D. Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide two-piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to wall. 1. Anchor Section: Dovetail anchor section formed from 0.0528-inch- thick, galvanized steel sheet. 2. Tie Section: Triangular -shaped wire tie, sized to extend within I inch of masonry face, made from 0.1875-inch- diameter, galvanized steel wire. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; formu- lated from neoprene. B. Preformed Control -Joint Gaskets: Designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall. Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805. C. Bond -Breaker Strips: Asphalt -saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). 2.6 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Job -Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and 1/2-cup dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. of water. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cut masonry units with motor -driven saws. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. C. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and the following: 1. For conspicuous vertical and horizontal lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum. 3.2 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement -type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less -than -half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in bond pattern indicated; do not use units with less than nominal 4- inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. s' r s beams, lintels, s and similar items, C. Fill core in hollow concrete masonry units with rout 24 inches under bearing late bea to s posts, ads ar to s Y g gp , ,p , unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow masonry units as follows: 1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed, including areas under cells. B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the joint thickness, unless otherwise indi- cated. 3.4 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement as indicated. Install with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. B. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. 3.5 ANCHORING MASONRY A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than I inch in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3.6 LINTELS A. Provide masonry lintels where shown. Provide precast lintels made from concrete matching concrete masonry units in color, tex- ture, and compressive strength and with reinforcing bars indicated or required to support loads indicated. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality -control testing indicated below. 1. Testing Frequency: Tests and Evaluations listed in these subparagraphs will be performed during construction for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof. 2. Mortar: Properties will be tested per ASTM C 780. 3. Grout: Sampled and tested for compressive strength per ASTM C 1019. 3.8 PARGING A. Parge predampened masonry walls, where indicated, with Type S or Type N mortar applied in 2 uniform coats to a total thickness of 3/4 inch with a steel -trowel finish. Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom. Damp -cure parging for at least 24 hours. 3.9 CLEANING A. Clean unit masonry by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints, as work progresses. END OF SECTION 04810 SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL - REFER TO STRUCTURAL PLANS SECTION 05210 - STEEL JOISTS - REFER TO STRUCTURAL PLANS SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK - REFER TO STRUCTURAL PLANS SECTION 05400 - COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING - REFER TO STRUCTURAL PLANS SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel ladders. 2. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 3. Pipe bollards. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details of installation, and attachments to other Work. B. Templates: For anchor bolts. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. B. Ferrous Metals: 1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Stainless -Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304. 3. Rolled -Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/ A 283M, Grade C or D. 4. Rolled -Stainless -Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793. 5. Steel Tubing: Cold -formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500. 6. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. 7. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold -formed metal channels 1-518 by 1-5/8 inches with flange edges returned toward web and with 9/16-inch- wide slotted holes in webs at 2 inches o.c. Channels made from galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 33, with G90 coating; 0.079-inch nominal thickness. 8. Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T6. 2.2 PAINT A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer complying with perfor- mance requirements in FS TT-P-664 and compatible with finish paint systems indicated. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Connections, General: Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 1. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs. 2. Weld corners and seams continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and cor- rosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish exposed welds smooth and blended. 3. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes. 4. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. B. Steel Ladders: Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Siderails: Continuous, 1/2-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges, spaced 18 inches apart. 2. Bar Rungs: 3/4-inch- diameter steel bars, spaced 12 inches o.c. a. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails; plug -weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 4. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets. Size brackets to support design loads specified in ANSI A14.3. 5. Fabricate ladder safety cages to comply with ANSI A14.3. Assemble by welding or riveting. 6. Galvanize exterior ladders and safety cages. C. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Fabricate steel framing and supports that are not a part of structural -steel framework as necessary to complete the Work from structural steel of welded construction. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1. Where indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded anchors at 24 inches o.c. 2. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes. Where wood nailers are attached to gird- ers with bolts or lag screws, drill holes at 24 inches o.c. 3. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction with steel baseplates and top plates welded to pipe with fillet welds the same size as pipe wall thickness. D. Pipe Bollards: Fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners for securing metal fabrications to in -place construction. Perform cutting, drill- ing, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, with edges and surfaces level, plumb, and true. 1. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construc- tion. 2. Fit exposed connections accurately together. Weld connections, unless otherwise indicated. Do not weld, cut, or abrade galvanized surfaces. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on cleaned surfaces using wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been posi- tioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts and pack with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. END OF SECTION 05500 SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood blocking. 2. Wood nailers. 3. Wood sheathing. 4. Plywood backing panels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide dry lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Structural Panels: 1. Plywood: DOC PS 1 . 2. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2. 2.2 WOOD -PRESERVATIVE -TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood), except that lumber that is not in con- tact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). B. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade. 4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. 2.3 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, provide materials that comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Identify fire -retardant -treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdic- tion. 1. Use treatment for which chemical manufacturer publishes physical properties of treated wood after exposure to elevated tem- peratures, when tested by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664, for lumber and ASTM D 5516, for plywood. 2. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 3. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. 4. Use Interior Type A High Temperature (HT), unless otherwise. indicated. 2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER A. General: Of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated. B. Non -Load -Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade and any of the following species: 1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2. Eastern softwoods; NELMA. C. Exposed Framing: Hand select material for uniformity of appearance and freedom from characteristics that would impair finish appearance. 1. Species and Grade: As indicated above for load -bearing construction of same type. 2. Species and Grade: Hem -fir or Hem -fir (north), Select Structural grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Species and Grade: Southern pine., Select Structural No. I grade; SPIB. 4. Species and Grade: Spruce -pine -fir or Spruce -pine -fir (south), Select Structural No. 1 grade; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2.5 SHEATHING A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing. B. Paper -Surfaced Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 79/C 79M, with water-resistant material incorporated into core and with water- repellent paper bonded to core's face, back, and long edges. 1. Manufacturers: a. American Gypsum Co. b. G-P Gypsum Corporation. C. National Gypsum Company. d. United States Gypsum Co. 2. Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch and Type X, 5/8 inch thick as indicated on drawings. C. Glass -Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens -Glass Gold" by G-P Gypsum Corp. 2. Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch and Type X, 5/8 inch thick as indicated on drawings. D. Extruded -Polystyrene -Foam Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 578, Type IV, in manufacturer's standard lengths and widths with tongue - and -groove or shiplap long edges as standard with manufacturer. 1. Manufacturers: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). C. Owens Corning. d. Tenneco Building Products. E. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior sheathing. F. Oriented -Strand -Board Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing. 2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire -retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2 inch thick. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. 2. Power -Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. 3. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. B. Metal Framing Anchors: Made from hot -dip, zinc -coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designa- tion. C. Building Paper: Asphalt -saturated organic felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), unperforated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate [furring,] nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative -treated lumber and plywood. C Se-Curely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. CABO NER-272 for power -driven fasteners. 2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. V1 U ao U � N p 0 v Cd 0 E E i N z � r o U CL5 = Fr Q co J MM :::) L1_ tr W oa cn O p- U_ J Z Y = U >_ wC0/J Lu Lu 0 Ne NJ IL 0 N E C',g 0a m U 0 O Q, N 61 0 Z N n o>< x 0 reCN ,Z w 0 N ¢'; N � a U) 0 C� U ft0 (1�^) v ) w TS1 H LU cow w U) Y i r '= sf' Cl) Z `= wCn m m } 41- _ z< w Cr z 0 CO CO m U) Cc u, 0- r- 0 w 4 L J w (V M v- � Cfl � co 01- U 0 O IL rn o N p w D Ln o Ln o [O 0 0 U w U m BLDG B PACKAGE __- IT u T-- ___T17 T - E. Product test reports. 32 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's standard material warranty (3-year minimum) from date of Owner Final Acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS D. Apply building paper horizontally with 2-inch overlap and 6-inch end lap; fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails. Cover upstanding flashing with 4-inch overlap. E. Apply sheathing tape to joints between sheathing panels and at items penetrating sheathing. Apply at upstanding flashing to over- lap both flashing and sheathing. END OF SECTION 06100 SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concealed building insulation. 2. Loose -fill building insulation. 3. Vapor retarders. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire -test -response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 for surface -burning characteristics, by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATING MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. B. Molded -Polystyrene Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type 1, 0.90 lb/cu. ft., with maximum flame -spread and smoke -developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively. For use in nonrated masonry walls. C. Mineral -fiber blanket insulation consisting of fibers manufactured from glass: 1. Faced Mineral -Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III, Class A; Category 1, faced with foil- scrim -kraft, foil - scrim, or foil -scrim -polyethylene vapor -retarder membrane on one face. D. Perlite Loose -Fill Insulation: ASTM C 549, Type II or Type IV, with a thermal resistance for 4.1- to 7.4-lb/cu. ft. insulation of 3.3 to 2.8 deg F x h x sq. ft/Btu at 75 deg F for 1-inch thickness. For use in rated masonry walls 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the Producer Members of Perlite Institute Inc. 2.2 VAPOR RETARDERS . A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm. B. Vapor -Retarder Tape: Pressure -sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor -retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetra- tions in vapor retarder. 2.3 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install insulation to comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be. insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. B. Pour granular insulation into cavities indicated to receive insulation, taking care to fill voids completely. Maintain inspection ports to show presence of insulation at extremities of each pour area. Close ports after confirming complete coverage. Limit fall of insulation to one story in height, but not exceeding 20 feet. C. Installation of General Building Insulation: Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with marnufactur- er's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. 1. Seal joints between closed -cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant. 2. Install mineral -fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: a. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. b. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. For metal -framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of metal studs. 4. Retain insulation in place by metal clips and straps or integral pockets, within window frames, spaced at intervals recom- mended in writing by insulation manufacturer to hold insulation securely in place without touching spandrel glass. Maintain cavity width of dimension indicated between insulation and glass. 5. Install insulation where it contacts perimeter fire -containment system to prevent insulation from bowing under pressure from perimeter fire -containments stem. P Y 6. Place loose -fill insulation into spaces and onto surfaces as shown, either by pouring or by machine blowing to comply with ASTM C 1015. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to uniform density, but do not compact excessively. 7. Stuff glass -fiber insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. D. Installation of Vapor Retarders: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose -fiber insulation. l . Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over training by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c. 2. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or vapor -retarder tape according to vapor -retarder manufacturer's instructions. Seal butt joints and fastener penetrations with vapor -retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. 3. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as recommended by vapor -retarder manu- facturer. 4. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor -retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. 5. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor -retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. END OF SECTION 07210 SECTION 07241 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes Class PB exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS) applied over CMU or Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Class PB EIFS: Comply with performance characteristics in EIMA's "EIMA Guideline Specification for Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems, Class PB." 1. Impact Resistance: Standard and Ultra -High. 2. Positive and Negative Wind -Load Performance: Capability to withstand wind loads indicated when tested per ASTM E 330. Provide test reports indicating compliance with wind load standard of authority having jurisdiction over all substrates indi- cated. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, penetrations, terminations, fasteners, and attachments to other work. C. Samples: For each EIFS and for each color and texture required. D. Field quality -control test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer to install manufacturer's system using trained workers. B. Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS through one source from a single EIFS manufacturer and from sources approved by EIFS manu- facturer as compatible with system components. C. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide EIFS and system components identical to those of EIFS and system components tested per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Fire -Resistance Characteristics: ASTM E 119. 2. Full -Scale Fire Test: Tested mockup per ASTM E 108. 3. Radiant Heat Exposure: No ignition of EIFS when tested according to NFPA 268. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Insula- tion board, adhesives, base coats, and finish coats with flame -spread index of 25 or less and smoke -developed index of 450 or less, per ASTM E 84. D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Dryvit Systems, Inc. 2. Senergy Inc.; SKW-MBT Construction Chemicals. 3. Sto Corp. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Compatibility: Provide substrates, adhesive, fasteners, board insulation, reinforcing meshes, base- and finish -coat systems, seal- ants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and approved for use by EIFS manufacturer for Project. B. Substrate: Glass -Mat gypsum sheathing board ASTM C931/C 931 at thickness indicated on drawings from the following manu- facturer. 1. G-P Gypsum Corporation, Dens -Glass Gold Sheathing. C. Water -/Weather- Resistive- B arri er Coating: Formulation and accessories designed for indicated use. D. Primer/Sealer: Substrate conditioner designed to seal substrates from moisture penetration and to improve the bond between sub- strate of type indicated and adhesive used for application of insulation. E. Spacers: Furring strips; EIFS manufacturer's standard or product recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer. F. Adhesive for Application of Insulation: Factory -mixed adhesive recommended by system manufacturer. G. Molded, Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with EIFS manufacturer's requirements, ASTM C 578 for Type I, and EIMA's "EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board." H. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali -resistant, open -weave glass -fiber mesh treated for compatibility with other EIFS materials and complying with EIMA 105.01 and ASTM D 578. 1. Standard -Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd. 2. Heavy -Duty Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 20 oz./sq. yd. 3. Strip Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 3.75 oz./sq. yd. 4. Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd. 5. Corner Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 7.2 oz./sq. yd. 1. Base -Coat Materials: Standard mixture: Manufacturer's standard. J. Waterproof Adhesive/Base-Coat Materials: Waterproof mixture. K. Primer: Factory -mixed elastomeric-polymer primer for preparing base -coat surface for application of finish coat. L. Finish -Coat Materials: Standard acrylic -based coating. 1. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As indicated on Drawings. M. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant fasteners consisting of thermal cap, standard washer and shaft attachments, and fas- tener suitable for substrate. N. Trim Accessories: Manufactured from UV -stabilized PVC and complying with ASTM D 1784 and ASTM C 1063. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of EIFS as applicable to each type of substrate indicated. B. Insulation: Adhesively or mechanically attach to substrate. 1. Expansion Joints: Apply adhesive to insulation by notched -trowel method to coat entire surface of gypsum sheathing with adhesive once insulation is adhered to sheathing, unless systern manufacturer's written instructions specify using primer - sealer with ribbon -and -dab method. Apply adhesive to a height of not less than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for factory mixed and not Tess than 318 inch (9.6 mm) for field mixed, measured from surface of insulation board before placement. 2. Install top surface of fastener head flush with plane of insulation. Install fasteners into or through substrates with minimum penetration according to ASTM PS 49 or system manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. Space fasteners according to system manufacturer's written recommendations. 3. Apply insulation boards over dry substrates in courses with long edges oriented horizontally and working upward. 4. Stagger vertical joints in successive courses to produce running bond pattern. Locate joints so no piece of insulation is less than 12 inches (300 rnrrr) wide or 6 inches (150 nun) high. Offset joints not less than 6 inches (150 rum) from corners of window and door openings. a. Offset joints of insulation not less than 6 inches (I 50 mm) from horizontal and 4 inches ( ] 00 mm) frorn vertical ,joints in sheathing. b. Offset joints of insulation not less than 4 inches (100 corn) from horizontal Joints in sheathing. J J C. Offset joints of insulation not less than 4 inches (I 00 nun) from aesthetic reveals. 5. Interlock ends at internal and external corners. 6. Abut boards tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush, continuously even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between insulation boards. If gaps greater than I/]6 inch (1.6 mm) occur, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert insulation without using adhesive or other material. 7. Cut insulation to fit openings, corners, and projections precisely and to produce edges and shapes complying with details indicated. 8. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting more than 1 /32 inch (0.8 mm) from sur- face of insulation and to remove yellowed areas due to sun exposure; do not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 9. Cut aesthetic reveals in outside face of insulation with high-speed router and bit configured to produce grooves, rabbets, and other features that comply with profiles and locations indicated. Do not reduce insulation thickness at features to less than 3/4 inch (19 mm). 10. Install foam shapes attached to supporting substrate, where indicated. 11. Interrupt insulation at expansion joints. 12. Form joints for sealant application by leaving gaps between adjoining insulation edges and between insulation edges and dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps wide enough to produce joint widths indicated after encapsulating joint substrates with base coat and reinforcing mesh. - for joints within system and with perimeter casing beads 13. Form joints for sealant application with back-to-back casing beads or Jo nts w t ys p g at dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps between casing beads and between perimeter casing beads and adjoining sur- faces of width indicated. 14. Treat exposed edges of insulation board as follows: a. Wrap edges after installing insulation board and before applying field -applied reinforcing mesh. b. Wrap mesh of width required to extend not less than 2-1/2 inches (63 mm) onto substrate behind insulation board, cover insulation board edge, and extend not less than 2-1/2 inches (63 mm) onto insulation board face. C. Wrap edges of insulation board, except those forming substrates of sealant joints, by encapsulating with base coat, reinforcing mesh, and finish coat. d. Wrap edges of insulation board forming substrates of sealant joints within system or between system and other work by encapsulating with base coat and reinforcing mesh. 15. Treat edges of insulation board at trim accessories by extending base coat, reinforcing mesh, and finish coat over face leg of accessories. C. Coordinate flashing installation with installation of insulation to produce a wall system that does not allow water to penetrate behind protective coating. at locations indicated; where required by EIFS manufacturer; where expansion joints -are indicated in substrates behind EIFS; where EIFS adjoin dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction; at floor lines in multilevel wood - framed construction; and where wall height changes. D. Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of insulation in minimum thickness recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 1/1 6-inch dry -coat thickness. E. Reinforcing Mesh: Completely embed mesh in wet base coat, applying additional base -coat material if necessary, so reinforcing - mesh color and pattern are not visible. F. Double -Layer Reinforcing Mesh Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat and second layer of standard impact rem - forcing mesh. G. Double Base -Coat Application: Where indicated, apply in same manner and thickness as first application except without reinforc- ing mesh. H. Finish Coat: Apply maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform appearance, in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture varia- tions. 1. Joint -Sealant Installation: 1. Prepare joints and apply sealants, of type and at locations indicated, to comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and in "EIMA Guide for Use of Sealants with Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems, Class PB." END OF SECTION 07241 SECTION 07311 -ASPHALT SHINGLES PART1-GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section specifies organic felt and fiberglass asphalt shingles. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Color of shingles: Section 09050, INTERIOR/EXTERIOR FINISHES, MATERIALS, AND FINISH SCHEDULE. B. Counterflashing and flashing of roof projections: Section 07600, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL. C. Skylights, roof scuttles, ridge and roof vents, Section 07700, ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES. 1.3 SUMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01340, SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS. B. Samples: Shingles, each type, color and texture. C. Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1. Shingles, each type 2. Installation instructions 1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened bundles or containers with the manufacturer's brand and name clearly marked thereon. B. Shingle bundle wrapping shall bear the label of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. C. Store shingles in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Store roll goods on end in an upright position. D. Keep materials dry, covered completely and protected from the weather. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. Publications listed below form a part o this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): D226-97..................................... Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing D1970-01................................... Self -Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection D2178-97................................... Asphalt Glass Felt used in Roofing and Waterproofing D3018-03................................... Class A Asphalt Shingles Surfaced with Mineral Granules D3462-03................................... Asphalt, Shingles Made from Glass Felt and Surfaced with Mineral Granules F 1667-02.................................... Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples C. Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL): UL790-97................................... Fire Resistance of Roof Covering Materials PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Architectural shingle to be Grand Manor Shangle 425#, 110 MPH certified as manufactured by cerainteed. 2.1 SHINGLES A. Class A: (Fire resistive), per UL790. ASTM D3018, Type I and ASTM 3462, square butt for a maximum exposure of 125 mm (5 inches), headlap minimum 50 mm (2 inches), wind resistant, self sealing. Minimum weight: 10.3 Kg/sqm (210 lbs/100sft). 2.2 ROOFING NAILS A. ASTM F1667; Type 1, Style 20, galvanized steel, deformed shanks, with heads 9.5 mm to 11 rnm (3/8-inch to 7/16-inch) diameter. B. Use nails 32 mm (1-1/4 inches) long for shingles and 19 mm (3/4-inch long) for felt. 2.3 ROOFING FELT A. "Ice and water shield" as manufactured by W. R. Grace. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Roof surfaces shall be sound, reasonaL,iy smooth and free from defects which would interfere with roofing installation. B. Roof accessories, vent pipes and other projections through the roof must be in place and roof flashing installed or ready for installation before laying shingles. 3.2 LAYING A. Lay felt under shingles over entire roof. B. Install asphalt felt underlayment, lapping a minimum of 100 mm (four inches) at ends, 50 mm (2 inches) at head and 300 mm (12 inches) over ridge. Extend felt 13 mm (1/2-inch) beyond edges of roof. Nail felt 125 mm (five inches) on centers along laps. C. At eaves, install strip of 41 Kg (90 pound) mineral surface roll roofing not less than 460 mm (18 inches) wide and starter course of roof shingles with tabs reversed. Both shall overhang lower edge of roof 13 rnm (1/2-inch). D. Lay shingles with maximum exposure of 125 mm (5 inches). Nail shingles in accordance with manufacturer's published directions. 3.3 METAL DRIP EDGES A. At rakes, install metal drip edges made of stainless steel specified under Section, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL. Apply the metal drip edge directly over the underlayment along the rakes. B. Secure metal drip edges with compatible nails spaced not more than 250 mm (-10 inches) on center along the inner edges. 3.4 FLASHINGS Provide metal flashings specified under Section, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL at the intersections of roofs, adjoining walls, or projections through the deck such as chimneys and vent stacks. Give careful attention to the installation of all flashings. 3.5 RIDGE A. Bend each shingle lengthwise down center to provide equal exposure on each side of ridge. Beginning at one end of ridge, apply shingles with maximum 125 rnm (5 inches) exposure. B. Secure each shingle with one nail on each side, 210 min (8-1/2 inches) back from exposed end and one inch up from edge. 3.6 VALLEY FLASHING A. Install metal valley flashing shown and as specified under FLASHING AND SHEET METAL. B. Secure valley flashing in accordance with shingle manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Expose flashing in open portion of valley a minimum of 125 mm (5 inches) and lap the shingles over the flashing a minimum of 125 mm (5 inches). END OF SECTION 07311 SECTION 07412 - METAL WALL PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Factory -formed and fie] d-assembled,exposed-fastener, lap -seam metal wall panels. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses, based on testing according to ASTM E 330: B. Seismic Performance: Provide metal wall panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads. C. Wind Loads: Comply with wind load requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of metal wall panel and accessory indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of metal wall panels, including plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories. 2. Include technical data regarding fastening pattern required to meet wind load requirements into substrate indicated on draw- ings. C. Samples: For each exposed finish. L4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal wall panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures, including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory -applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Fluoropolymer Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. 2.1 PANEL MATERIALS A. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot -dip process and prepainted by the coil -coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 or AZ55 coating designation, Grade 40; structural quality. 2. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 3. Exposed Finishes: a. High -Performance Organic Finish (Prefinished) : Where panels are indicated to be pre -finished, finish material with two -coat, thermocured system with fluoropolymer coats containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with physical properties and coating performance requirements of AAMA 2604, except as modified below: 1) Humidity Resistance: 1000 hours. 2) Water Resistance: 1000 hours. 4. Concealed Finish: White or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish. B. Panel Sealants: 1. Sealant Tape: Pressure -sensitive, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release -paper backing; 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. 2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by metal wall panel manufacturer. 3. Butyl -Rubber -Based, Solvent -Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311. 2.2 SUBSTRATE BOARDS A. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M; regular, 1/2 inch Type X, 5/8 inch thick. B. Substrate -Board Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion -resistance provi- sions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening substrate board to substrate. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING A. Steel Sheet Components, General: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with ASTM A 653/A 6.53M, G40 (Z120), hot -dip galvanized zinc coating. B. Base or Sill Angles: 0.079-inch bare steel thickness, cold -formed, galvanized steel sheet. C. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch 2. Depth: 7/8 inch. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Self -tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end -welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal wall panels by means of plastic caps or factory -applied coating. 1. Fasteners for Wall Panels: Self -drilling or self -tapping 410 stainless or zinc -alloy steel hex washer head, with EPDM or PVC washer under heads of fasteners bearing on weather side of metal wall panels. 2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self -drilling screws with hex washer head. 3. Blind Fasteners: High -strength aluminum or stainless -steel rivets. B. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert -type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components. and other deleterious impurities. 2.5 LAP -SEAM METAL WALL PANELS A. Exposed -Fastener, Lap -Seam Metal Wall Panels: Factory -formed, designed to be field assembled by lapping side edges of adja- cent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. 1. Manufacturers: a. Berridge Manufacturing Company. b. MBC1; Div. of NCI Building Systems. C. Petersen Aluminum Corporation. d. Reynolds Metals Company. 2. Profile: Tapered rib or as indicated on Drawings. 3. Material: Metallic -coated steel sheet, 0.0159 inch. a. Exterior Finish Pre -finished to color indicated on drawings. b. Color: Match Architect's samples where applicable. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal wall panels. 2. Closure Strips: Closed -cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed -cell laminated polyethyl- ene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure ,,trips; cut or remolded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure P P P strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.0179-inch- thick, metallic -coated steel sheet. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, corners, P PP P J endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish P P P g system as adjacent metal wall panels. 2.7 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate and finish metal wall panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's stan- dard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SM ACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal,and other characteristics of item indicated. C. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Substrate Board: Install substrate board over wall sheathing on entire wall surface. Attach with substrate -board fasteners. 1. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to direction of metal wall panel seams with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. 2. Comply with UL requirements for fire -rated construction. B. Install flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 3.2 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. . Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Field cutting of metal wall panels by torch is not permitted. 2. Rigidly fasten base end of metal wall panels and allow eave end free movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels. 3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 4. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four -panel lap splice condition. 5. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and concrete, and elsewhere as indicated or, if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing. 6. Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by paint- ing contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized -asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. C. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal wall panel assemblies. 1. Seal metal wall panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.3 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. i other m Coordinate installation with flashings and of e components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flash- ings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. 2. Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 3. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building. 4. Tie downspouts to underground drainage system indicated. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal wall panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated UD _ _- N U `O N O 0 0 U "V . ,--4 0 p 4t �c Cl ;..� D Cd V P--� w U Cv O CDL i (Z `° o LU co U Z _ co Q _i ¢o a 00 Qo o Q` �;�a a W C_ co Q J U U) = 0 E E 0 i Q Cv N M Q z �, � o o CZ = rr o aLL- W 00 .6C6 O 0J LL 0) 2 = Z Y 0 G} w 0 UJ O N Of M 9E "' S CO N U M ¢I 0 - u :V V y Id- v .14 - U) = 0 i CZ U .0 Cll OL U) 00 � 0) �_ 7C3 w co w = rn -,, �._._, _ - o M W C y z w� U) �-�`, j llnl .1 z 2 Cn J 2E 0o U) Ir W a 0 w I?i� o J LO CO 1l- a0 Of U W 3 O rn M COJ p W o C) o m z (r C3 m 0 w Y U ul U m BLDG B PACKAGE in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as rec- ommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. B. After metal wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant. END OF SECTION 07412 SECTION 07511 - BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes built-up asphalt roofing systems. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. C. Samples: For each product included in roofing system. D. Insulation Compliance Certificate. Submit certificate showing that insulation and R value complies with RIC/TIMA bulletin 281- 1. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system approved by roofing system manufacturer. C. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire -test -response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. I. Exterior Fire -Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. Failure includes roof leaks. Provide minimum total number of plies indicated regardless of whether roof system can meet warranty with a number less than specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Built-up Asphalt Roofing: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Firestone Building Products Company. C. GAF Materials Corporation. d. TAMKO Roofing Products, Inc. 2.2 ROOFING MEMBRANE PLIES A. Ply Sheet: ASTM D 2178, Type IV asphalt -impregnated, glass -fiber felt. 2.3 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Backer Sheet: ASTM D 2178, Type IV, asphalt -impregnated, glass -fiber felt. B. Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 6222, Type I or It, polyester -reinforced, APP-modified asphalt sheet; mineral -granule surfaced; and as follows: 1. Granule Color: White 2.4 ASPHALT MATERIALS A. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41. B. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type 1I, III or IV as recommended by built-up roofing system manufacturer for application. 2.5 AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with built-up roof- ing. B. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofing system manufacturer for application. C. Cold -Applied Adhesive: Roofing system manufacturer's standard asphalt -based, one- or two-part, asbestos -free, cold -applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and use with built-up roofing base flashings. D. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion -resistance provisions in FM 4470; designed for fastening roofing membrane components to substrate; tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength; and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. E. Aggregate Surfacing: ASTM D 1863, No. 6 or No. 67, clean, dry, opaque, water -worn gravel or crushed stone, free of sharp edges. 2.6 ROOF INSULATION - DOUBLE LAYER A. General: Insulation types specified are for a double layer system and are separated according to deck types and group according to layer. The two layers of selected insulation shall have a combined total heat aged "R"value equal to 17.9 minimum. 1. First Layer - Poly]socyanu-ate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glass -fiber mat facer on both major sur- faces, 2.0 lbs/cu. Ft. minimum, 2.2 to 2.3 inch thickness.. 2. Second Layer - Contractors Option #1. Perlite Board Insulation: ASTM C 728; composed of expanded perlite, cellulosic fibers, binders, and waterproofing agents with top surface seal -coated, 3/4 thickness. 3. Second Layer - Contractors Option #2. Glass -Fiber -Board Insulation: ASTM C 726, combining glass fibers with thermo- setting resin binders, faced on one side with asphalt -coated fiberglass scrim and kraft paper, 3/4" thickness. B. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory -tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48), unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabri- cate to slopes indicated. 2.7 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion -resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. B. Cold Fluid -Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold fluid -applied adhesive formulated to adhere roof insulation to sub- strate. C. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 728, Perlite insulation board. D. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board. 2.8 WALKWAYS A. Walkway Pads: Mineral -granule -surfaced, reinforced asphaltic composition, slip -resisting pads, manufactured as a traffic pad for foot traffic and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer, 3/8 inch (9 mm) thick, minimum. 1. Pad Size: Manufacturer's Standard Size 2. Location: Pad to be located around all mechanical of rooftop equipment, connecting all mechanical or rooftop equipment, and paths to the vertical roof access point, or as additionally indicated on plans. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUBSTRATE INSPECTION. Examine substrate surfaces to receive built-up roofing system and associated work and condi- tions roofing will be installed. Do not proceed with roofing until unsatisfactory has been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. The commencement of work on a section of roof will indicate acceptance by the installer and he will be responsible for any corrective work that may be occasioned by his having started over an unsatisfactory surface. Verify that the substrate complies with the following: 1. Top Flanges: No concavity or convexity in excess of 1/16" across any adjacent flanges 2. Side Laps: Properly nested and mechanically fastened at maximum spacing of Y-0" o.c. 3. End Laps: Minimum 2" laps located over and fastened to supports 4. Deck secured to each supporting member in every other rib. (maximum spacing 12" o.c.) with puddle welds or approved mechanical fasteners. 3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. Fastening to comply with wind load requirements of authority having jurisdiction. h fin system manufacturers written instructions for installing B. Comply with roofing syst g roof insulation. 1. First Layer. Attach with FM approved screw -type fasteners with plates (minimum one fastener per every two square feet of insulation or per insulation manufacturers recommendation, whichever is more stringent. Lay Units in each layer with long joints continuous and short joints staggered 2. Second Layer. Install over first layer. Embed in full mopping of hot (EVT) Type II, III, or IV asphalt. Overlap all joints to a minimum of 12" each direction. C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. D. Install boards to moderate contact without forcing joints. Cut boards to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around roof penetra- tions. Fill joints over 3/8" wide with Perlite insulation. E. Cut and replace broken corner and damaged boards with newly cut insulation pieces. 3.3 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install built-up roofing membrane system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and applicable recom- mendations of ARMA/NRCNs "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Built-up Roofing." B. Where roof slope. exceeds 1 inch per 12 inches (1: 12), install sheets of built-up roofing membrane parallel with slope. C. Substrate -Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction. D. Install four ply sheets starting at low point of roofing system. Align ply sheets without stretching. Shingle side laps of ply sheets uniformly to achieve required number of plies throughout thickness of roofing membrane. Shingle in direction to shed water. Extend ply sheets over and terminate beyond cants. 1. Embed each ply sheet in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt. E. Aggregate Surfacing: Promptly after installing and testing roofing membrane, base flashing, and stripping, flood -coat roof surface with 60 lb/100 sq. ft. of hot roofing asphalt. While flood coat is hot and fluid, cast the following average weight of aggregate in a uniform course: 1. Aggregate Weight: 400 lb/100 sq. ft. F. Deficiencies. Repair all membrane deficiencies including voids, bridging, fishmouths, cuts and tears in all affected plies. G. Valleys and Waterways: Apply an extra roofing ply underneath of sufficient width to extend a minimum of eight inches up each side of valley or waterway. H. Cants: Terminate roofing plies 2" above all cant strips. 3.4 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches above roofing membrane and 4 inches onto field of roofing mem- brane. C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing. D Install stripping, according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions where metal flanges and edgings are set on built- . sta g g Y � g up roofing. E. Primer. Prime masonry and concrete walls to receive base flashings with asphalt primer at a rate of gallon per 100 square feet. F. Fibrated Aluminum Coating. Cover completed base flashing and wall surface covering system with aluminum coating. Apply at a rate of 1 gallon per 100 square feet. Extend aluminum coating from inside to edge of wall down over base flashing. 3.5 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Walkway Pads: Install walkway pads using units of size indicated or, if not indicated, of manufacturer's standard size according to walkway pad manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Sweep away loose aggregate surfacing and set walkway pads in additional flood coat of hot roofing asphalt. B. Cap Sheet Strips: Install cap sheet strips, approximately 36 inches wide and in lengths not exceeding 10 feet, leaving a space of 6 inches between strips. Adhere in hot roofing asphalt. END OF SECTION 07511 SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Manufactured reglets. 2. Formed roof drainage system. 3. Formed low -slope roof flashing and trim. 4. Formed steep -slope roof flashing and trim. 5. Formed wall flashing and trim. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts, profiles, shapes, seams, dimensions, and details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim. C. Samples: For each type of sheet metal flashing and trim upon request of the Architect. L3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorpo- rated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 SHEET METALS A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3004, 3105, or 5005, Temper suitable for forming and structural performance required, but not less than H14, finished as follows: 1. High -Performance Organic Finish: Two -coat, thermocured system containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluo- ride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2604. a. Color: Match Architect's samples B. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, No. 2D finish. C Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; structural quality, mill phospha- tized for field painting. D. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper -bearing lead sheet. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscel- laneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation. B. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt -saturated organic felt, nonperforated. C. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self -tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 1. Nails for Copper Sheet: Copper or hardware bronze, 0.109 inch (2.8 mm) minimum and not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) long, barbed with large head. 2. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or factory -applied coating. 3. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self -drilling screws, gasketed, with hex washer head. 4. Blind Fasteners: High -strength aluminum or stainless -steel rivets. D. Sealing Tape: Pressure -sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release -paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape. E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single -component, solvent -release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy 'oodied for hooked -type expansion joints with limited movement. G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam -cementing compound. H. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. 2.4 REGLETS A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factory- mitered and -welded corners and junctions. 1. Manufacturers: a. Cheney Flashing Company, Inc. b. Fry Reglet Corporation. C. Heckmann Building Products Inc. 2. Material: Aluminum, 0.024 inch thick. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indi- cated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. I. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. 2. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat -lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. C. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations. D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet -type expansion provisions in the Work cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with elastom eric sealant concealed within joints. E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed -to -view sheet metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated. F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal, and in thickness not less than that of metal being secured. 2.6 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-long sections. Furnish flat -stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion - joint covers, gutter bead reinforcing bars, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. 1. Fabricate from the following material: a. Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick. B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. 1. Fabricate downspouts from the following material: a. Aluminum: 0.024 thick. C. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers of dimensions required with closure flange trim to exterior, 4-inch- wide wall flanges to inte- rior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. Fasten gravel guard angles to base of scupper. 1. Fabricate parapet scuppers from the following material: a. Aluminum: 0,0320 inch thick. D. Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge and of dimensions and shape indicated complete with outlet tubes and built-in overflows. 1. Fabricate conductor heads from the following material: a. Aluminum: 0.0320 inch thick. 2.7 LOW -SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Caps: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch long, but not exceeding 10-foot- long, sections. Furnish with 6-inch- wide joint cover plates. 1. Fabricate from the following material: a. Aluminum: 0.050 inch *`i-k. B. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 10-foot- (3-m-) long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Finnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and[ drill elongated holes for fasteners on] interior leg. Miter corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight. 1. Fabricate copings from the following material: a. Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick. C. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick. D. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Aluminum: 0.0320 inch > thick. E. Roof -Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material as indicated on drawings: 1. Lead: 4.0 lb/sq. ft., hard tempered. F. Roof -Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: I . Lead: 4.0 lb/sq. ft. , hard tempered. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. I . Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by paint- ing contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals. C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and elastomeric sealant. E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 1. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet -type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than I inch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. G. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less tt-an 3/4 inch for wood screws. 1. Galvanized or Prepainted, Metallic -Coated Steel: Use stainless -steel fasteners. 2. Aluminum: Use aluminum or stainless -steel fasteners. 3. Copper: Use copper or stainless -steel fasteners. 4. Stainless Steel: Use stainless -steel fasteners. H. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required for watertight construction. I. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches except where pretinned surface would show in finished Work. 1. Do not solder aluminum sheet. 3.2 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommenda- tions and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system. B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped joints sealed with elastomeric sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchored gutter brackets spaced not more than 36 inches apart. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts. 1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding 50 feet apart. Install expansion joint caps. 2. Install continuous gutter screens on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, removable for cleaning gutters. C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely I inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between. D. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane. E. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall with elevation of conductor head rim 1 inch (25 mm) below scupper discharge. 3.3 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight. B. Roof Edge Flashing and Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Preven- tion Data Sheet 1-49 and the authority having jurisdiction. r 1 r installation fcounterflashingwith installation f� �e flashing. counterflashing m e eta o C. Counterflashing: Coordinateo o bas g g g receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Secure in a waterproof manner. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) and bed with elastomeric sealant. D. Roof -Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof -penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items pen- etrating roof. Install flashing as follows: 1. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping with flashing. 2. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof except for lead flashing on vent piping. END OF SECTION 07620 SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Roof curbs. 2. Roof hatches. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. C. Samples: For each exposed finish upon request of architect. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coor- dinate with type of roofing indicated. 2. NRCA's "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" details for installing units. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M with Class AZ-50 coating, structural quality, Grade 40 (Grade 275), or as required for strength. B. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semirigid glass -fiber board of thickness indicated. C. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use, complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick. D. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. 1. Provide nonremovable fastener heads. E. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, or PVC; or flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork. F. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent -type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coating. G. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. H. Elastomeric Sealant: Recommended by unit manufacturer that is compatible with joint surfaces; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. I. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for trowel application or other adhesive compat- ible with roofing systr-m. 2.2 ROOF CURBS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Custom Curb, Inc. 2. Metallic Products Corporation. 3. Vent Products Co., Inc. C. General: Units capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction to be supported. Coordinate dimensions with equipment to be supported. 1. Provide preservative -treated wood hailers at tops of units and formed flange at perimeter bottom for mounting to roof. 2. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile. 3. Fabricate units to minimum height of 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1 /4 inch per foot, fabricate support units with height tapered to match slope to level tops of units. D. Roof Cubs: 1. Fabrication: Unless otherwise indicated or required for strength, fabricate units from minimum 0.0747-inch-thick, struc- tural -quality, hot -dip galvanized or aluminum -zinc alloy -coated steel sheet; factory primed and prepared for painting with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints. 2. Fabrication: Unless otherwise indicated or required for strength, fabricate units from minimum 0.063-inch-thick, sheet aluminum with welded corner joints. 3. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semirigid insulation where indicated. 4. Cants: Formed cants and base profile coordinated with roof insulation thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Coordinate installation of roof accessories with installation of roof deck, roof insulation, flashing, roofing membranes, penetrations, equipment, and other construction to ensure that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. Anchor roof accessories securely to supporting structural substrates so they are capable of withstanding lateral and thermal stresses, and inward and outward loading pressures. B. histall roof accessory items according to construction details in NRCA's "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual," unless otherwise indicated, C. Separation: Separate metal from incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or providing other permanent separation. D. Flange Seals: Unless otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in a thick bed of roofing cement to form seal. E. Cap Flashing: Where required as component of accessory, install cap flashing to provide waterproof overlap with roofing or roof flashing (as counterflashing). Seal overlap with thick bead of mastic sealant. F. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings. END OF SECTION 07720 SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sealants for the following: 1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces. 2. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 3. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 4. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 5. Firestop system through fire resistance - rated walls. 6. Exterior joints in sheet metal flashing and trim. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Firestop System Submittals: For each through -penetration firestop system, show each kind of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction and kind of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidence compliance with requirements for each condition. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Use sealant manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. B. Preconstruction Field -Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion to joint substrates using test method indicated in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article. C. Fire -resistive joint sealant systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 119 under conditions where positive furnaces pres- Cn U N `O N • r"q � o o Q 0 U i-+ . ,-.4 0 t , Cd ;..4 a) U � ^� A-1 V pl_ U = Cv 0 Q. 0 i CZ `° O V w co co Cl)i-¢ o I 0 0 o o Q ri z �Q w 0- AQ J 0 t) 0 E E 0 C) L_ 0- (1) N �Q z �--+ } o o = oL _ Q (n J L Ir L.co �C6 O 0 J L.L Cr J_ Z �Y = } w Cf) = �'Ri1 0 LU N O� 1 EL co �t Mg 0 co CZ co U O : 3b N D K ti 14 IT 30 14 3- C/) C 0 CZ U _�_ U G) Q CUB m LU 0) P w Mw s U) z o �'`, -Jr 11 t_ �s mo, ;, � zQ w I 1� 1,� �> _J 1. ,,� w� a d t1. z 0 m CO Cc w CL 0 rl- w q o Q J_ - - - - - - - w " co '7 � CO 1-- CC) U LU 0 w rn M oN QQ w Cn Ln o C? C) m o C J C7 UJ w Y 0 2i LLJ = m 0 BLDG B PACKAGE A005 - F - __ � I I - 7--T ---T- -7-- ------ - surer of at least 0.01 inch of water is maintained at a distance of 0.78 inch below the fill materials surrounding the penetrating items in the test assembly. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: 1. Fire -Resistive Rating of Joint Sealants: As indicated by reference to design designations listed by UL in their "Fire Resis- tance Directory" or by another testing inspecting agency. D. Mockups: Before installing joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not meet requirements specified in this Section or fail in adhesion within specified warranty period two years from date of Final Acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field expe- rience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 2.03 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Silicone Sealant: (Gutters & Coping Sealant) 1. Products: a. Dow Corning; 795. b. GE Silicone, SilPruf. C. Tremco Spectrem 2 B. Single -Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: 1. For vertical masonry control joints, provide the following: a. Products: 1) Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc.; NP 1. 2) Tremco; Vulkem 116. 3) Sika Corporation; Sikaflex - la. b. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). C. Class: 25. 2. Exposure: Use T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic). 3. Substrates: Uses M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. C. Urethane Sealant: I . Concrete paving joints, horizontal traffic surfaces. a. Products: 1) Bostik, "Chem -Calk 950". 2) Sonneborn, "SL-1". 3) Tremco, Vulkem 45 b. Type and Grade S (singe component) and NS (Nonsag). C. Class 25 d. Exposure: T (traffic). e. Substrate: O 2.3 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide through -penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating through -penetration firestop system under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through -penetration firestop system manufacturers based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components for each through -penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and comply with "Performance Requirements" article. Use only components specified through penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items: I . Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, include the following: a. Slat -/rock -wood -fiber insulation. b. Sealants in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of full materials in liquid state. C. Fire -rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves. 6. Products: a. 3M Fire Prevention Products. b. Hilti Firestop Systems C. International Protective Coatings Corporation (IPC, a Division of W.R. Grace). d. Tremco Inc. 2.4 JOINT -SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, prim- ers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 1. Type: C (closed -cell material with a surface skin). C. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer forpreventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint -filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indi- cated, as determined from preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming, Joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, P � �, J J p _ Y and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and Surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Contractor performing work must be one the Sealant Manufacturer's Approved Applicators. B. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants. 1. Remove foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose par- ticles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. 3. Remove laitance and form -release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues could interfere with adhesion of joint sealants. 5. All surfaces to be caulked shall be clean and dry. C. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests or prior experience. Confine primers to areas of joint -sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migra- tion onto adjoining surfaces. D. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. E. Sealant Installation: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, appli- cations, and conditions indicated. F. Install sealant backings to support sealants during application and at position required to produce optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. G. Install bond -breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back of joints. H. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 1. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 2. Produce uniform, cross -sectional shapes and depths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 3. All deep cracks shall be filled to within 1/2 inch of the surface with an appropriate back-up material and caulked with a caulking gun. Caulking beads shall be smooth and straight. 4. Caulk around all door and storefront openings and where noted on the drawings. L Masonry control joints shall be caulked with a high -quality paintable urethane caulk. Control depth of caulk at 3/8 inch to 1 /2 inch with a continuous closed -cell rod. J. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Joint Configuration: Concave g Joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. K. Clean excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as installation progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. L. Through -Penetration Firestop Installation: 1. General: Installation through -penetration systems to comply with "Performance Requirements" of the firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for the applications indicated. END OF SECTION 07920 SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes steel doors and frames. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include door designation, type, level and model, material description, label compliance, fire -resistance ratings, and finishes. B. Door Schedule. Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Amweld Building Products, Inc. 2. Ceco Door Products; a United Dominion Company. 3. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. B. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 620/A 620M, Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher -leveled standard of flatness. C. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with an A40 zinc -iron -alloy (galvannealed) coating; stretcher -leveled standard of flatness. D. Electrolytic Zinc -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591 M, Commercial Steel (CS), Class B coating; mill phosphatized; suitable for unexposed applications; stretcher -leveled standard of flatness where used for face sheets. 2.3 DOORS A. Interior Doors: Complying with ANSI 250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical -endurance level indicated. 1. Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C, Model 1 (Full Flush). B. Exterior Doors: Complying with ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical -endurance level indicated. 1. Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C, Model 1 (Full Flush). 2.4 FRAMES A. General: ANSI A250.8; conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. B. Frame Steel Sheet Thickness: 1. 0.042-inch-for level 1 steel doors 2. 0.053-inch- (1.3-mrn-) for openings wider than 48 inches. C. Door Silencers: Three silencers on single -door frames and two silencers on double -door frames. D. Plaster Guards: 0.016-inch-thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to close off interior of openings. E. Supports and Anchors: Not less than 0.042-inch- thick zinc -coated steel sheet. I. Masonry Wall Anchors: 0.177-inch diameter, steel wire complying with ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 51OM) may be used in place of steel sheet. F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Zinc -coat items that are to be built into exterior walls according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable. 2.5 F.ABRICATION A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. B. Exterior Doors: Fabricate doors, panels, and frames from metallic -coated steel sheet. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, metallic -coated steel channels with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges. C. Interior Door Faces: Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from cold -rolled steel sheet. D. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction that produces a door complying with SDI standards. E. Clearances for Non -Fire -Rated Doors: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch between pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom. F. Clearances for Fire -Rated Doors: As required by NFPA 80. G. Door -Edge Profile: Beveled edge. H. Tolerances: Comply with SDI I t7. 1. Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with app➢icable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. J. Frame Construction: 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners and seamless face joints. Provide temporary spreader bars. 2. Fabricate knock -down frames with mitered or coped corners, for field assembly. 3. Fabricate knock -down, drywall slip-on frames for in -place gypsum board partitions. 4. Provide terminated stops where indicated. K. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface -applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface -applied hardware may be done at Project site. L. Locate hardware as indicated or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8. M. Glazing Stops: Manufacturer's standard, formed from 0.032-inch-thick steel sheet. 1. Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. 2. Provide screw -applied, removable, glazing stops on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. N. Astragals: As required by NFPA 80 to provide fire ratings indicated. 2.6 FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory -applied coat of rust -inhibiting primer complying with ANSI A250.10 for accep- tance criteria. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. Wall Anchors: Provide at least three anchors per jamb. For openings 90 inches or more in height, install an additional anchor at hinge and strike jambs. 2. Gypsum Board Partitions: For in -place partitions, install knock -down, drywall slip-on frames. 3. Fire -Rated Frames: Install according to NFPA 80. B. Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and ANSI/DHI A 115.1 G. 1. Fire -Rated Doors: Install within clearances specified in NFPA 80. 2. Smoke Control Doors: Install to comply with NFPA 105. C. After installation, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames and touch up prime coat with compatible air -drying primer. END OF SECTION 08110 SECTION 08311 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: l . Access doors and frames. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of access door indicated. B. Samples: For each exposed finish upon request of Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. I. Hot -Dip Galvanized Steel: Coat to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for steel and iron products andASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware. B. Steel Sheet: 1. Metallic Coated: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with A60) zinc -iron -alloy (galvannealed) coating or G60 mill-phosphatized zinc coating; stretcher -leveled standard of flatness. C. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299-inch zinc -coated steel sheet formed to receive joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum panels indicated. D. Plaster Bead: Casing bead formed from 0.0299-inch zinc -coated steel sheet with flange formed out of expanded metal lath and in size to suit thickness of plaster. E. Paint: 1. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide sound foundation for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. 2. Shop Primer for Metallic -Coated Steel: Organic zinc -rich primer complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with top- coat. 2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cesco Products. 2. Elmdor/Stoneman; Div. of Acorn Engineering Co. 3. MIFAB Manufacturing, Inc. 4. Milcor Limited Partnership. B. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: 1. Material: Prime -painted steel sheet. 2. Surface Type: Masonry, Finish on gypsum substrate, or as indicated on Drawings. 3. Locations: Ceilings or as indicated on Drawings 4. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal, set flush with exposed face flange of frame. 5. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal with 1-inch-wide, surface -mounted trim. 6. Hinges: Spring -loaded concealed pin type. 7. Latch: Screwdriver. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door and floor door installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices. B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. C. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. END OF SECTION 08311 SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior entrance systems. - Exterior storefront systems. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding loads and thermal and structural movements indicated without failure when supporting full dead loads and without framing members transferring stresses to glazing. B. Structural -Silicone -Sealant Joints: Less than 20-psi tensile and shear stress in joints. C. Structural Loads: I. Wind Load: As indicated on Drawings or required by authority having jusrisdiction. 2-. Seismic Load: As indicated on Drawings or required by authority having jusrisdiction. D. Structural Performance: Provide systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding loads indicated. 1. Deflection Normal to Glazing Plane: Limited to i/175 of clear span or 3/4 inch, whichever is smaller. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: When carrying full dead toad, not to exceed amount that reduces glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components to less than 1/8 inch. E. Structural Testing: ASTM E 330 at 150 percent of inward and outward wind -load design pressures for duration required by design wind velocity without system evidencing material failures, structural distress, deflection failures, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of clear span. F. Air Infiltration: Limited to 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of system surface area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static -air -pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.. G. Water Penetration: No water leakage when tested according to ASTM E 331 at minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward acting wind -load design pressure but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.. H. Temperature Change (Range): Accommodate 120 deg F ambient and 180 deg F material surfaces. 1. Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF): Not less than 45 per AAMA 1503.1. J. Average Thermal Conductance (U-Value): Not more than 0.63 Btu/sq. ft, x h x deg F per AAMA 1503.1. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each system indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details of installation and attachments to other Work. 1. Prepare data based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project. 2. For entrance systems, include hardware schedule and locations. C. Samples: For each exposed finish and for each color required upon request of Architect. D. Product test reports indicating compliance with applicable wind load provisions required by the authority having jurisdiction. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace systems that fail in materials and workmanship within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Failure includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. 2. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Failure of operating components to function normally. 5. Water leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of -Design Product: The design for systems is based on Kawneer Tri-Fab 450. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. EFCO Corporation. 2. Arch Aluminum and Glass Co. 3. YKK AP America Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: ASTM B 209 sheet; ASTM B 221 extrusions. vlupanY -1Porated Into the _ _y for product Work include but B. Finish: Clear Anodic Fin,>.__ C. Glazing: Specified in Division 8 Section "Glaze,., D. Glazing Gaskets: Pressure -glazing system of black resilient glazing gam__ ers. E. Structural -Sealant -Glazing System: 1. Spacers, Setting Blocks, Gaskets, and Bond Breakers: Permanent, nonmigrating types in hardness recommei.__ by manufacturer, and compatible with sealant. 2. Structural Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 1184, recommended in writing by sealant and system manufacturers for application indicated, and compatible with system components with which it comes in contact. a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range. b. Tensile Strength: 100 psi minimum. C. Modulus of Elasticity: Allows maximum movement of 25 percent of joint width, unless less movement is required by system design. 3. Secondary Sealant (Weatherseal): ASTM C 920, compatible with structural silicone sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact, and accommodates 50 percent increase or decrease in joint width at the time of application when tested according to ASTM C 719. a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range. F. Gaskets, Sealants, and Joint Fillers: 1. For joints within framing system, as recommended in writing by manufacturer for joint type indicated. 2. For joints at perimeter of systems as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." G. Bituminous Paint: SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no asbestos, cold -applied asphalt mastic paint formulated for 30-mil thick- ness per coat. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Doors: 1-3/4-inch-thick glazed doors with minimum 0.125-inch-thick, extruded tubular rail and stile members, mechanically fas- tened corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie -rods, and with snap -on extruded -aluminum glazing stops and preformed gaskets. 1. Exterior Doors: Provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. At other locations, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. a. Stile Design: Medium, 3-1/2-inch maximum width. 2. Hardware: As specified in Division 8 door hardware Section. B. Fasteners, Flashings, and Accessories: Compatible with adjacent materials, corrosion -resistant, nonstaining, and nonbleeding. Use concealed fasteners except for application of door hardware. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate framing in profiles indicated for flush glazing (without projecting stops). Provide subfrrmes and reinforcing of types indicated or, if not indicated, as required for a complete system. B. Fabricate components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior. C. Doors and Door Framing: Reinforce to support imposed loads and for hardware indicated. Cut, drill, and tap for factory -installed hardware before finishing components. D. Factory assemble framing and components to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Isolate metal surfaces in contact with incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint or primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer. B. Install components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the systean to the exterior. C. Install glazing r_> >::omply with requirements of Division 8 Section "Glazing." 1. Mechanically fasten glazing in place until structural sealant is cured. 2. Install secondary sealant (we.atherseal) to produce weatherproof joints. 3. Remove excess sealant before sealant has cured. D. Install sealants at system perimeter to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." E. Install framing components true in alignment with established lines and grades to the following tolerances: 1. Variation from Plane: Limit to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4 inch over total length. 2. Alignment: For surfaces abutting in line, limit offset to 1/16 inch For surfaces meeting at comers, limit offset to 1/32 inch. 3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch. F. Install doors without warp or rack. Adjust doors and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and smooth operation. END OF SECTION 08410 SECTION 08800 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications: I. Doors. . 2. Glazed entrances. 3. Storefront framing. B. See Division 8 "Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts". 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Work under this specification includes the furnishing of all labor, material and services necessary and reasonably incidental to the providing and installing of all glazing in sash and doors shown on the drawings. B. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where appli- cable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. C. Glass Design: Glass thickness indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm lass thickness b analyzing Project g g Y g Y Y g J loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for various size openings in nominal thickness indicated, but not less than thickness and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Glass Thickness: Select minimum glass thickness to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to the following require- ments: a. Specified Design Wind Loads: As indicated. b. Specified Design Snow Loads: As indicated. . Probability of Breakage. for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for liter set vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. I ) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less. d. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 1/4 inch tempered. e. Thickness of Tinted and Heat -Absorbing Glass: "Insulated", 1/4 inch tempered inside and outside with'/z inch air- space. D. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from a maximurn change (range) of 120 deg F (67 deg C), in ambient and surface temperatures, respectively, acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's pub- lished test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below: I . For monolithic -glass liter, properties are based on units with lites 1/4 inch thick. 2. Center -of -Glass U-Values: National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC)100 methodology using LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer program, expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K). 3. Center -of -Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200 methodology using LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer pro- gram. 4. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Samples: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square, for tinted glass product indicated upon request of architect. C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. D. Sealant compatibility and adhesion test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Use sealant manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other articles including schedules where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified. a. ASA Industries, Inc_ b. Libby -Owens Ford -Glass Company C. Mississippi Glass Company d. Pittsburg Plate Glass Company 2 N J � ,I W BOG 8 PACKAG m Ek'4006 C�6 r.., b CJ U Ct _,:� � � ,:� U 7� -g V P_� 0 w V Cv 0 Q O �i V CZ `° Z V WM _ z co a -i Q o W U 0 o O o-, z �Q w .¢ 0 Cn = 0 E E 0 i r- Q Cv N o �- z � o �FE CZ = o Q W-1 = .6 U5 O p -' LL J Z 0)N _ w M con 0- O E � LLJ N 0- a 19 a a V O CZ U .0 0- W m LU _J V/ P E- Wi n w = u) -- 3 � 1. 1. .11 I � z �t. . R >� 1-1 ,,, in m `.. Q 1_ C ._ ',�� z a Cr _ IN" > J w LL -. -w ....�F, .� z 0 W m W CC ,,., IL 0 r- w q En ED J - _ _ _ - L U N c*J CO 1__ co Urn 0 a_ o Lm QD U) C) M o CO z o 0= U c� m : BLDG B PACKAGE -- cures of at least 0.01 inch of water is maintained at a distance of 0.78 inch below the fill materials surrounding the penetrating items in the test assembly. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: 1. Fire -Resistive Rating of Joint Sealants: As indicated by reference to design designations listed by UL in their "Fire Resis- tance Directory" or by another testing inspecting agency. D. Mockups: Before installing joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not meet requirements specified in this Section or fail in adhesion within specified warranty period two years from date of Final Acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field expe- rience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 2.03 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Silicone Sealant: (Gutters & Coping Sealant) 1. Products: a. Dow Corning; 795. b. GE Silicone, SilPruf. C. Tremco Spectrem 2 B. Single -Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: 1. For vertical masonry control joints, provide the following: a. Products: 1) Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc.; NP 1. 2) Tremco; Vulkem 116. 3) Sika Corporation; Sikaflex - 1 a. b. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). C. Class: 25. 2. Exposure: Use T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic). 3. Substrates: Uses M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. C. Urethane Sealant: 1. Concrete paving joints, horizontal traffic surfaces. a. Products: 1) Bostik, "Chem -Calk 950". 2) Sonneborn, "SL-1". 3) Tremco, Vulkem 45 b. Type and Grade S (singe component) and NS (nonsag). C. Class 25 d. Exposure: T (traffic). e. Substrate: O 2.3 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide through -penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating through -penetration firestop system under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through -penetration firestop system manufacturers based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components for each through -penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and comply with "Performance Requirements" article. Use only components specified through penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items: 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, include the following: a. Slat -/rock -wood -fiber insulation. b. Sealants in combination with other form ing/damming/bac king materials to prevent leakage of full materials in liquid state. C. Fire -rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves. 6. Products: a. 3M Fire. Prevention Products. b. Hilti Firestop Systems C. International Protective Coatings Corporation (IPC, a Division of W.R. Grace). d. Trernco Inc. 2.4 JOINT -SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, prim- ers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 1. Type: C (closed -cell material with a surface skin). C. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint -filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indi- cated, as determined from preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to romote opt] adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. p P C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Contractor performing work must be one the Sealant Manufacturer's Approved Applicators. B. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants. I . Remove foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose par- ticles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. 3. Remove laitance and form -release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues could interfere with adhesion of joint sealants. 5. All surfaces to be caulked shall be clean and dry. C. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests or prior experience. Confine primers to areas of joint -sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migra- tion onto adjoining surfaces. D. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. E. Sealant Installation: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, appli- cations and condition. indicated. , S F. Install sealant backings to support sealants during application and at position required to produce optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. G. Install bond -breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back of joints. H. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. I . Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 2. Produce uniform, cross -sectional shapes and depths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 3. All deep cracks shall be filled to within 1/2 inch of the surface with an appropriate back-up material and caulked with a caulking gun. Caulking beads shall be smooth and straight. 4. Caulk around all door and storefront openings and where noted on the drawings. L Masonry control joints shall be caulked with a high -quality paintable urethane caulk. Control depth of caulk at 3/8 inch to 1/2 inch with a continuous closed -cell rod. J. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Joint Configuration: Concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. K. Clean excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as installation progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. L. Through -Penetration Firestop Installation: 1. General: Installation through -penetration systems to comply with "Performance Requirements" of the firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for the applications indicated. END OF SECTION 07920 SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes steel doors and frames. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include door designation, type, level and model, material description, label compliance, fire -resistance ratings, and finishes. B. Door Schedule. Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Amweld Building Products, Inc. 2. Ceco Door Products; a United Dominion Company. 3. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. B. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 620/A 620M, Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher -leveled standard of flatness. C. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with an A40 zinc -iron -alloy (galvannealed) coating; stretcher -leveled standard of flatness. D. Electrolytic Zinc -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591 M, Commercial Steel (CS), Class B coating; mill phosphatized; suitable for unexposed applications; stretcher -leveled standard of flatness where used for face sheets. 2.3 DOORS A. Interior Doors: Complying with ANSI 250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical -endurance level indicated. 1. Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C, Model 1 (Full Flush). B. Exterior Doors: Complying with ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical -endurance level ;ndicated. 1. Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C, Model 1 (Full Flush). 2.4 FRAMES A. General: ANSI A250.8; conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. B. Frame Steel Sheet Thickness: 1. 0.042-inch-for level I steel doors 2. 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) for openings wider than 48 inches. C. Door Silencers: Three silencers on single -door frames and two silencers on double -door frames. D. Plaster Guards: 0.016-inch-thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to close off interior of openings. E. Supports and Anchors: Not less than 0.042-inch- thick zinc -coated steel sheet. 1. Masonry Wall Anchors: 0.177-inch diameter, steel wire complying with ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 51OM) may be used in place of steel sheet. F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Zinc -coat items that are to be built into exterior walls according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. B. Exterior Doors: Fabricate doors, panels, and frames from metallic -coated steel sheet. CIose top and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, metallic -coated steel channels with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges. C. Interior Door Faces: Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from cold -rolled steel sheet. D. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction that produces a door complying with SDI standards. E. Clearances for Non -Fire -Rated Doors: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch between pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom. F. Clearances for Fire -Rated Doors: As required by NFPA 80. G. Door -Edge Profile: Beveled edge. H. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117. I. Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI AI15 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. J. Frame Construction: 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners and seamless face joints. Provide temporary spreader bars. 2. Fabricate knock -down frames with mitered or coped corners, for field assembly. 3. Fabricate knock -down, drywall slip-on frames for in -place gypsum board partitions. 4. Provide terminated stops where indicated. K. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface -applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface -applied hardware may be done at Project site. L. Locate hardware as indicated or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8. M. Glazing Stops: Manufacturer's standard, formed from 0.032-inch-thick steel sheet. 1. Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. 2. Provide screw -applied, removable, glazing stops on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. N. Astragals: As required by NFPA 80 to provide fire ratings indicated. 2.6 FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory -applied coat of rust -inhibiting primer complying with ANSI A250.10 for accep- tance criteria. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. Wall Anchors: Provide at least three anchors per jamb. For openings 90 inches or more in height, install an additional anchor at hinge and strike jambs. 2. Gypsum Board Partitions: For in -place partitions, install knock -down, drywall slip-on frames. 3. Fire -Rated Frames: Install according to NFPA 80. B. Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and ANSI/DHI A115.1 G. 1. Fire -Rated Doors: Install within clearances specified in NFPA 80. 2. Smoke Control Doors: Install to comply with NFPA 105. C. After installation, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames and touch up prime coat with compatible air -drying primer. END OF SECTION 08110 SECTION 08311 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Access doors and frames. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of access door indicated. B. Samples: For each exposed finish upon request of Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. Hot -Dip Galvanized Steel: Coat to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for steel and iron products and ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware. B. Steel Sheet: 1. Metallic Coated: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with A60) zinc -iron -alloy (galvannealed) coating or G60 mill-phosphatized zinc coating; stretcher -leveled standard of flatness. C. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299-inch zinc -coated steel sheet formed to receive joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum panels indicated. D. Plaster Bead: Casing bead formed from 0.0299-inch zinc -coated steel sheet with flange formed out of expanded metal lath and in size to suit thickness of plaster. E. Paint: 1. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide sound foundation for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. 2. Shop Primer for Metallic -Coated Steel: Organic zinc -rich primer complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with top- coat. 2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cesco Products. 2. Elmdor/Stoneman; Div. of Acorn Engineering Co. 3, MIFAB Manufacturing, Inc. 4. Milcor Limited Partnership. B. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: 1. Material: Prime -painted steel sheet. 2. Surface Type: Masonry, Finish on gypsum substrate, or as indicated on Drawings. 3. Locations: Ceilings or as indicated on Drawings 4. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal, set flush with exposed face flange of frame. 5. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal with 1-inch-wide, surface -mounted trim. 6. Hinges: Spring -loaded concealed pin type. 7. Latch: Screwdriver. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door and floor door installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices. B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. C. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. END OF SECTION 08311 SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior entrance systems. 2. Exterior storefront systems. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding loads and thermal and structural movements indicated without failure when supporting full dead loads and without framing members transferring stresses to glazing. B. Structural -Silicone -Sealant Joints: Less than 20-psi tensile and shear stress in joints. C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Load: As indicated on Drawings or required by authority having jusrisdiction. 2. Seismic Load: As indicated on Drawings or required by authority having jusrisdiction. D. Structural Performance: Provide systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding loads indicated. 1. Deflection Normal to Glazing Plane: Limited to I/175 of clear span or 3/4 inch, whichever is smaller. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: When carrying full dead load, not to exceed arnount that reduces glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components to less than 1/8 inch. E. Structural Testing: ASTM E 330 at 150 percent of inward and outward wind -load design pressures for duration required by design wind velocity without system evidencing material failures, structural distress, deflection failures, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of clear span. F. Air Infiltration: Limited to 0,06 cfm/sq. ft. of system surface area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static -air -pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.. G. Water Penetration: No water leakage when tested according to ASTM E 331 at minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward acting wind -load design pressure but not less than 6.24 ibf/sq. ft.. H. Temperature Change (Range): Accommodate 120 deg F ambient and 180 deg F material surfaces. I. Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF): Not less than 45 per AAMA 1503.1. J. Average Thermal Conductance (U-Value): Not more than 0.63 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F per AAMA 1503.1. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each system indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details of installation and attachments to other Work. 1. Prepare data based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project. 2. For entrance systems, include hardware schedule and locations. C. Samples: For each exposed finish and for each color required upon request of Architect. D. Product test reports indicating compliance with applicable wind load provisions required by the authority having jurisdiction. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace systems that fail in materials and workmanship within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Failure includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. 2. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Failure of operating components to function normally. 5. Water leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of -Design Product: The design for systems is based on Kawneer Tri-Fab 450. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. EFCO Corporation. 2. Arch Aluminum and Glass Co. 3. YKK AP America Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: ASTM B 209 sheet; ASTM B 221 extrusions. B. Finish: Clear Anodic Finish. Class I, AAMA 607.1. C. Glazing: Specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." D. Glazing Gaskets: Pressure -glazing system of black resilient glazing gaskets with sealed corners, setting blocks, and shims or spac- ers. E. Structural -Sealant -Glazing System: 1. Spacers, Setting Blocks, Gaskets, and Bond Breakers: Permanent, nonmigrating types in hardness recommended in writing by manufacturer, and compatible with sealant. 2. Structural Silicone Sealant: ASTM C IJ 84, recommended in writing by sealant and system manufacturers for application indicated, and compatible with system components with which it comes in contact. a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range. b. Tensile Strength: 100 psi minimum. C. Modulus of Elasticity: Allows maximum movement of 25 percent of joint width, unless less movement is required by system design. 3. Secondary Sealant (Weatherseal): ASTM C 920, compatible with structural silicone sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact, and accommodates 50 percent increase or decrease in joint width at the time of application when tested according to ASTM C 719. a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range. F. Gaskets, Sealants, and Joint Fillers: I. For joints within training system, as recommended in writing by manufacturer for joint type indicated. 2. For joints at perimeter of systems as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." G. Bituminous Paint: SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no asbestos, cold -applied asphalt mastic paint formulated for 30-mil thick- ness per coat. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Doors: 1-3/4-inch-thick glazed doors with minimum 0.125-inch-thick, extruded tubular rail and stile members, mechanically fas- tened corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie -rods, and with snap -on extruded -aluminum glazing stops and preformed gaskets. 1. Exterior Doors: Provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. At other locations, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. a. Stile Design: Medium, 3-1/2-inch maximum width. 2. Hardware: As specified in Division 8 door hardware Section. B. Fasteners, Flashings, and Accessories: Compatible with adjacent materials, corrosion -resistant, nonstaining, and nonbleeding. Use concealed fasteners except for application of door hardware. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate framing in profiles indicated for flush glazing (without projecting stops). Provide subframes and reinforcing of types indicated or, if not indicated, as required for a complete system. B. Fabricate components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior. C. Doors and Door Framing: Reinforce to support imposed loads and for hardware indicated. Cut, drill, and tap for factory -installed hardware before finishing components. D. Factory assemble framing and components to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Isolate metal surfaces in contact with incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint or primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer. B. Install components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior. C. Install glazing t.) omply with requirements of Division 8 Section "Glazing." 1. Mechanically fasten glazing in place until structural sealant is cured. 2. Install secondary sealant (weatherseal) to produce weatherproof joints. 3. Remove excess sealant before sealant has cured. D. Install sealants at system perimeter to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." E. Install framing components true in alignment with established lines and grades to the following tolerances: l . Variation from Plane: Limit to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4 inch over total length. 2. Alignment: For surfaces abutting in line, limit offset to 1/16 inch For surfaces meeting at comers, limit offset to 1/32 inch. 3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch. F. Install doors without warp or rack. Adjust doors and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and smooth operation. END OF SECTION 08410 SECTION 08800 - GLAZING PART I - GENERAL I A SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications: I. Doors. I. Glazed entrances. 3. Storefront framing. B. See Division 8 Alwlnnum Entrances and Storefronts". 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Work under this specification includes the furnishing of all labor, material and services necessary and reasonably incidental to the providing and installing of all glazing in sash and doors shown on the drawings. B. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where appli- cable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. s, 1 s Design: Glas: thickness indicated r minim m� , C. Gas.s s are minimums are for detailing only. glass thickness b analyzing Project g Y ga Y Y g J loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass liter for various size openings in nominal thickness indicated, but not less than thickness and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Glass Thickness: Select minimum glass thickness to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to the following require- ments: a. Specified Design Wind Loads: As indicated. b. Specified Design Snow Loads: As indicated. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for Ines set vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. I ) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less. d. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than r/4 inch tempered. e. Thickness of Tinted and Heat -Absorbing Glass: "Insulated", 1/4 inch tempered inside and outside with r/2 inch air- space. D. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from a maximum change (range) of 120 deg F (67 deg C), in ambient and surface temperatures, respectively, acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's pub- lished test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic -glass liter, properties are based on units with lises 1/4 inch thick. 2. Center -of -Glass U-Values: National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC) 100 methodology using LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer program, expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K). 3. Center -of -Glass Solar- Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200 methodology using LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer pro- gram. 4. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Samples: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square, for tinted glass product indicated upon request of architect. C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. D. Sealant compatibility and adhesion test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Use sealant manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other articles including schedules where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified. a. ASA Industries, Inc. b. Libby -Owens Ford -Glass Company C. Mississippi Glass Company d. Pittsburg Plate Glass Company cn U _U N kn Iri U 0 v dd U `c .,-r p Cj i-4 U U as U � w U a Q) O Q O !L V CZ `° o U wco z = Qo � Q) U 0 Qo 0 0_J z Q �¢ a w .¢ U (n C O E E O U i 0- a) N o �' _ 0 rr L. CZ (no Q � ii M M .6C6 O p� z (Mw= Y '.0 () CE w M c0i� LU L I.JJ OY N Of EL CD SE Mg . 00Q (V CU h Q r .14 u D I- N .14 IN cl- Cn C O - -=# CZ U 4 U Q) Q U) m UJ -A 0) U w 120 w U) a, . "" ,_ Z � >� � M m6 .. �5+ :. ,N b 3k ¢¢ * _ t�� .. `�� w rr -, > 3 w ,- w r1$� Z 0 U) m U) r- Cc w a r- 0 w q U) ZTD J _ _ w - N n �1J CO I� Of w rn 2 N Q L, o, M O m � C.� Y U co BLDG B PACKAGE 2. Trade names herein denote grade, type and quality of material required. 2.2 GLASS MATERIALS A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select); class as indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3. B. Heat -Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent glass, flat); Quality q3 (glazing select); class, kind, and condition as indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3 1. Fabrication Process: At manufacturer's option. 2.3 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating -glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Colors of Exposed Sealants: As indicated. B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid -applied, chemically curing sealant in the Glazing Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifica- tions for type, grade, class and uses. 1. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in the Glazing Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements in ASMT C 920 for uses indicated. C. Cylindrical Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open -cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and other- wise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. 2.4 GLAZING TAPES A. Back -Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl -based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed -cell, PVC foam tape; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.5 GLAZING GASKETS A. Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of type and material indicated below and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. Neoprene or EPDM dense compression gaskets complying with ASTM C 846. 2. Silicone dense compression gaskets complying with ASTM C 1115. 3. Neoprene, EPDM or Silicone soft compression gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type I I, black. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufactur- ers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to main- tain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open -cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire -Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test assembly to obtain fire -resistance rating. 2.7 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing stan- dard, to comply with system performance requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. 1. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 2. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. 3. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by sealant compatibility and adhesion testincy 4. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass liter. 5. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm) unless gaskets and dazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances. B. Protection: I . Protect exterior lass from damn e immediately after installation b y attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from g g �' ) � g Y glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. 2. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. C. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged, including natural causes, accidents, and vandal- ism, during construction period. D. At completion this contractor shall wash and polish all glazing and clean adjacent surfaces soiled by his work. END OF SECTION 08800 SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Portland Cement Plaster Finishes: Stucco. 2. Non -load -bearing steel framing and furring. 3. Metal lath and metal accessories. B. See Division 5 Section "Cold -Formed Metal Framing" for load -bearing steel framing. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Samples: For each exposed finish and for each texture required upon request of the Architect. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide assemblies identical to those tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements, General: Comply with requirements of referenced plaster application standards and recommenda- tions of plaster manufacturer for environmental conditions before, during, and after plaster application. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NON -LOAD -BEARING STEEL FRAMING A. Steel Sheet Components, General: Metal complying with ASTM C 645 requirements. 1. Protective Coating: a. Interior Applications: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot -dip galvanized zinc coating. b. Exterior Applications: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot -dip galvanized zinc coating. B. Suspended Ceiling and Soffit Framing: Size metal ceiling supports to comply with ASTM C 1063, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: Anchors fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching hanger wires and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by a qualified independent testing agency. a. Type: Postinstalled, expansion anchor. 2. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 3. Carrying Channels: Cold -rolled, commercial -steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538 inch, a minimum 1/2-inch- wide flange, and in depth indicated. 4. Furring Channels (Furring Members): a. Cold -Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flange, 3/4 inch deep. C. Partition and Soffit Framing: 1. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated. 2. Cold -Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch wide flange, and in depth indicated. 3. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated. 2.2 LATH A. Expanded -Metal Lath: ASTM C 847. 1. Material: Zinc -coated (galvanized) steel sheet, structural quality, with coating complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z 180) coating designation. 2. Diamond -Mesh Lath: Self -furring. a. Weight: 2.5 lb/sq. yd.. B. Paper Backing: Factory bonded to back of lath, complying with FS UU-B-790, Type I. 1. Vapor -Permeable Paper: Grade D, Style 2. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General: ASTM C 1063. Coordinate depth of accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. B. Metal Corner Reinforcement: Expanded, large -mesh, diamond -metal lath fabricated from zinc -alloy or welded -wire mesh fab- ricated from 0.0475-inch diameter, zinc -coated (galvanized) wire and specially formed to reinforce external corners of portland cement plaster on exterior exposures while allowing full plaster encasement. 1. Zinc Alloy: Minimum 0.0207 inch thick. 2. Aluminum: Minimum 0.050 inch thick. C. Cornerbeads: Small nose cornerbeads with expanded flanges of large -mesh diamond -metal lath allowing full plaster encase- ment. 1. Material: Zinc alloy or aluminum. D. Casing Beads: Square -edged style, with expanded flanges. 1. Material: Zinc alloy or aluminum. E. Curved Casing Beads: Square -edged style, fabricated from aluminum coated with clear plastic, preformed into curve of radius indicated. F. Control Joints: Prefabricated with removable protective tape on plaster face of control joints. 1. Material: Zinc alloy or aluminum. 2. Type: 2-piece, casing beads with back flanges formed to produce slip -joint action, adjustable for joint widths from 1/8 to 5/8 inch. G. Corner Reinforcement: Special Stucco type woven wire corner reinforcing strips. H. Lath Attachment Devices: Material and type required by ASTM C 1063 for installations indicated. 2.4 PLASTER MATERIALS A. Base -Coat Cements: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I. B. Job -Mixed Finish -Coat Cement: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I. C. Stucco Finish Coat: Manufacturer's standard factory -packaged stucco, including portland cement, aggregate, and other propri- etary ingredients. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorpo- rated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Florida Stucco Corp. b. Highland Stucco. C. IPA Systems, Inc. d. United States Gypsum Co. D. Lime: Special hydrated lime for finishing purposes, ASTM C 206, Type S; or special hydrated lime for masonry purposes, ASTM C 207, Type S. E. Sand Aggregate for Base Coats: ASTM C 897. F. Aggregate for Finish Coats: ASTM C 897 system, manufactured or natural sand, white. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable. B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 932. C. Acid -Etching Solution: Muriatic acid (I 0 percent solution of commercial hydrochloric acid) mixed 1 part to not less than 6 nor more than 10 parts water. D. Dash -Coat Material: 2 parts portland cement to 3 parts fine sand, mixed with water to a mushy -paste consistency. E. Steel Drill Screws: I . ASTM C 1002 for fastening metal lath to wood or steel members less than 0.033 inch thick. 2. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening metal lath to steel members 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 3. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ChemRex, Inc., Contech Brands, PL Acoustical Sealant. b. Pecora Corp.; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. C. United States Gypsum Co., SHEETROCI{ Acoustical Sealant. F. Three -Coat Work over Metal Lath: 1. Scratch and Brown Coat Mixes: Scratch, 1 part portland cement, 0 to 3/4 parts lime, 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate; brown, I part portland cement, 0 to 3/4 parts lime, 3 to 5 parts aggregate, G. Two -Coat Work over Concrete Unit Masonry: 1. Base Coat Mix: 1 part portland cement, 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime, 3 to 4 parts aggregate. H. Job -Mixed Finish Coats: 1. Mixes with Sand Aggregates: 1 part portland cement, 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime, 3 parts sand. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LATH AND FURRING INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Standards: Comply with ML/SFA 920, "Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring," and ASTM C 1063. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in work and for support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, handrails, furnishings, and similar work to comply with details indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, to comply with applicable written instructions of lath and furring manufacturer. C. Isolation: Where lathing and metal support system abut building structure horizontally and where partition or wall abuts overhead structure, isolate from structural movement to prevent transfer of loading from building structure. 1. Frame both sides of control joints independently and do not bridge joints with furring and lathing or accessories. D. Install additional framing, furring, runners, lath, and beads, as required to form openings and frames for other work as indicated. Coordinate support system for proper support of framed work that is not indicated to be supported independently of metal furring and lathing system. 3.2 NON -LOAD -BEARING FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Ceiling Suspension Systems: 1. Preparation and Coordination: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension system with installation of overhead struc- tural systems to ensue inserts and other structural anchorage provisions have been installed to receive ceiling hangers in a manner that will develop their full strength and at spacings required to support ceiling. 2. Hanger Installation: Comply with ML/SFA 920, "Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring," and with referenced standards. a. Do not attach hangers to metal deck tabs. 3. Install ceiling suspension system components of sizes and spacings indicated, but not in smaller sizes or greater spacings than those required by referenced lathing and furring installation standards. B. Partition Framing and Furring: Comply with ASTM C 754 and ML/SFA 920, "Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Fur- ring." 1. Steel Stud Systems to Receive Metal Lath: a. Extend and attach partition support systems to structure above suspended ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. b. Extend partition support systems to finish ceilings and attach to ceiling suspension members, unless otherwise indi- cated. 3.3 LATHING A. Install where plaster base coats are required. Provide appropriate type, configuration, and weight of metal lath selected from mate- rials indicated that comply with referenced ML/SFA specifications and ASTM lathing installation standards. 1. Suspended and Furred Ceilings: Use flat, diamond -mesh lath. 2. Vertical Metal Framing and Furring: Use flat, diamond -mesh lath and cold -rolled channel stud framing. 3. Exterior Sheathed Wall Surfaces: Use paper -faced, self -furring, diamond -mesh lath 4. Monolithic Surfaces: Use [self -furring, diamond -mesh lath or vertical metal framing and furring as required for plaster thickness. 3.4 PREPARATIONS FOR PLASTERING A. Protect contiguous Work from damage and deterioration caused by plastering with temporary covering and other provisions neces- sary. B. Clean plaster bases and substrates for direct application of plaster, removing loose material and substances that may impair the Work. C. Etch concrete and concrete unit masonry surfaces indicated for direct plaster application. Scrub with acid -etching solution on previously wetted surface and rinse thoroughly with clean water. Repeat application, if necessary, to obtain adequate suction and mechanical bond of plaster (where dash coat, bonding agent, or additive is not used). D. Apply bonding agent on concrete and concrete unit masonry surfaces indicated for direct plaster application. E. Apply dash coat on concrete surfaces indicated for direct plaster application. Moist -cure dash coat for at least 24 hours after appli- cation and before plastering. F. Install temporary grounds and screeds to ensure accurate rodding of plaster to true surfaces; coordinate with scratch -coat work. G. Refer to Division 6 Sections for installing permanent wood grounds. H. Refer to Division 7 Sections for installing flashing. L Surface Conditioning: Immediately before plastering, dampen concrete and concrete unit masonry substrates, except where a bonding agent has been applied, to produce optimum suction for plastering. 3.5 PLASTERING ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with referenced lathing and furring installation standards for provision and location of plaster accessories. Miter or cope accessories at corners; install with tight joints and in alignment. Attach accessories securely to plaster bases to hold acces- sories in place and in alignment during plastering. 1. External Corners: Install corner reinforcement at external corners. 2. Terminations of Plaster: Install casing beads, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Control Joints: Install at locations indicated or, if not indicated, at locations complying with the following criteria and approved by Architect: a. Where an expansion or contraction joint occurs in surface of construction directly behind plaster membrane. b. Distance between Control Joints: Not to exceed 18 feet in either direction or a length -to -width ratio of 2-1/2 to 1. C. Wall Areas: Not more than 144 sq. ft. d. Horizontal Surfaces: Not more than 100 sq. ft. in area. e. Where plaster panel sizes or dimensions change, extend joints full width or height of plaster membrane. B. Where sound -rated plaster work is indicated by STC ratings or other notation, seal work at perimeters, control joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Comply with ASTM C 919 and plaster manufacturer's written instruc- tions for location of sealant beads. C. Install sound attenuation blankets within stud cavities where indicated. 3.6 PLASTER APPLICATION A. Plaster Application Standard: Comply with ASTM C 926. 1. Mixing: Mechanically mix Cementitious and aggregate materials for plasters to comply with applicable referenced applica- tion standard and with recommendations of plaster manufacturer. 2. Do not use materials that are frozen, caked, lumpy, dirty, or contaminated by foreign materials. 3. Do not use excessive water in mixing and applying plaster materials. B. Flat Surface Tolerances: Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10-foot straightedge placed at any location on surface. C. Grout hollow -metal frames, bases, and similar work occurring in plastered areas, with base -coat plaster material, and before lath- ing where necessary. Except where full grouting is indicated or required for fire -resistance rating, grout at least 6 inches at each jamb anchor. D. Sequence plaster application with installation and protection of other work so that neither will be damaged by installation of other. E. Plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where interior plaster is not terminated at metal frame by casing beads, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal. F. Corners: Make internal corners and angles square; finish external corners flush with cornerbeads on interior work, square and true with plaster faces on exterior work. G. Number of Coats: 1. Metal Lath: Three coats. 2. Concrete Unit Masonry: Two coats. 3. Concrete, Cast -in -Place or Precast: Two coats when surface condition complies with ASTM C 926 for plaster bonded to solid base. H. Finish Coats: 1. Float Finish: Apply ii nosh coat to a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch to completely cover base coat, uniformly floated to a true even plane with fine -textured finish matching sample. 2. Trowel -Textured Finish: Apply finish coat with hand -troweled -textured finish matching sample. 3. Moist -cure plaster base and finish coats to comply with ASTM C 926, including written instructions for time between coats and curing in "Annex A2 Design Considerations." 3.7 CUTTING, PATCHING, AND CLEANING A. Cut, patch, replace, repair, and point up plaster as necessary to accommodate other work. Repair cracks and indented surfaces. Point -up finish plaster surfaces around items that are built into or penetrate plaster surfaces. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, excessive pinholes, and similar defects. Repair or replace work as neces- sary to comply with required visual effects. B. Remove temporary covering and other provisions made to minimize spattering of plaster on other work. Promptly remove plaster from door- frames, windows, and other surfaces not to be plastered. Repair surfaces stained, marred or otherwise damaged during plastering work. END OF SECTION 09220 SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL I.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum wallboard. 2. Exterior gypsum board panels for ceilings and soffits. 3. Non -load -bearing steel framing. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Samples: For each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work upon request of Architect. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire -resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency accept- able to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified. 2.2 STEEL FRAMING A. Steel Framing, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Metal complying with ASTM C 645 requirements. a. Protective Coating: 1) Interior Applications: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot -dip galvanized. 2) Exterior Applications: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot -dip galvanized zinc coating. B. Suspended Ceiling and Soffit Framing: 1. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class I zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475- inch-diameter wire. 2. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: a. Powder -Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by a qualified indepen- dent testing agency. 3. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch diameter. 4. Carrying Channels: Cold -rolled, commercial -steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538 inch, a minimum 1/2-inch- wide flange, and in depth indicated. 5. Furring Channels (Furring Members): a. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated. b. "Z" Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 1 1/2 inch deep. C. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct -hung system composed of main beams and cross -furring members that interlock. 1. Products: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Furring Systems/Drywall. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Fire Front 630 System. C. USG Interiors, Inc.; Drywall Suspension System. D. Partition and Soffit Framing: 1. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated. 2. Deep -Leg Deflection Track: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch-deep flanges. 3. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch or as indicated. 4. Cold -Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flange, and in depth indi- cated. a. Clip Angle: 1-1/2 by I- 1/2 inch, 0.068-inch-thick, galvanized steel. 5. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated. a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch. b. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0. 0475 - inch- diameter wire. 6. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. 2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS A. Panel Size, General: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36. 1. Regular Type: In thickness indicated and with long edges tapered. 2. Type X: In thickness indicated and with long edges tapered. C. Flexible Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to bend to fit tight radii and to be more flexible than standard regular - type panels of the same thickness, 1/4 inch thick, and with long edges tapered. Apply in double layer at curved assemblies. D. Sag -Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular -type gypsum board, 1/2 inch (12.7 min) thick, and with long edges tapered. Apply on ceiling surfaces. E. Exterior Gypsum Panels for Ceilings and Soffits: 1. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, with core type and in thickness indicated. a. Product: G-P Gypsum Corp; Dens -Glass Gold. 2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside corners . 3. LC -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047, hot -dip galvanized steel sheet or rolled zinc. 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering slot opening. C. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1. Products: a. Fry Reglet Corp.; As indicated by designation on Drawings. b. Gordon, Inc.. C. MM Systems Corporation; As indicated by designation on Drawings. d. Pittcon Industries; As indicated by designation on Drawings. 2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5 3. Finish: Corrosion -resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified. 2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. 3. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting -type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, flanges of trim accessories, and fasteners, use set- ting -type taping compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting -type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting -type, sandable topping compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting -type, sandable topping compound. D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications: I . Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting -type taping and setting -type, sandable topping compounds. 2. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by manufacturer. E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting -type taping and setting -type, sandable topping compounds. 2. Glass -Mat, Water -Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by manufacturer. 3. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by manufacturer. 2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommenda- tions. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 min) thick. 2. For fastening Cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 NON -LOAD -BEARING STEEL FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Suspended Ceiling and Soffit Framing: 1. Suspend ceiling hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, con: tersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hang- ers in form f trapezes r i e . o o t a e es o equivalent valent devices.. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads P q PP P g PP g within performance limits established by referenced standards. 3. Attach hangers to structural members. Do not support ceilings from or attach hangers to permanent metal forms, steel deck tabs, steel roof decks, ducts, pipes, or conduit. 4. Screw furring to wood framing. 5. Wire -tie furring channels to supports, as re quired to comply with requirements for assemblies indicated. 6. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross -furring members to each other and butt -cut to fit into wall track. C. Partition and Soffit Framing: 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and wall. 2. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 3. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. 4. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install fram- ing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 3.2 PANEL PRODUCT INSTALLATION A. Gypsum Board: Comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216. 1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications. 2. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 3. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire - resistance -rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resis- tance -rated assembly. 4. Single -Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 5. Laminating to Substrate: Comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. Cn ^ U^ll a) N p o 0 C. .r-4 0 C�j ;--r U U W �� N g V P_ I 6� U O Q. O i 0 CZ o U wzM i ¢o 2 ( v C 0 Qo o QLL z �a 4i 0- co J U cc 3 CV E qg cog C0 . o oM N o a, 0 Z N JQ 1� o>< x ¢!t N 01f z00 w 0 N ¢I- N 1* �_ a. W = 0 (Z U _ U (1) 0- U) m LU � F co w w = CO z 0 W U) cn r- _ w IL 0 w o - - - - - - - - w N C"J �fJ CO I- co IY U � a C,Q N w o^ `? m z 0 Ir C� U Z U m BLDG B PACKAGE B. Exterior Ceilings and Soffits: Apply exterior gypsum panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports. 1. Fasten with corrosion -resistant screws. 3.3 FINISHING A. Installing Trim Accessories: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Finishingm Gypsum Board Panels: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. 1. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. 2. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. 3. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as exposed soffit board. 4. Glass -Mat, Water -Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated: 1. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION 09260 SECTION 09900 - PAINT AND WALL FINISHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed items and surfaces. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Samples: For each type of finish -coat material indicated. 1.; QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full -coat benchmark finish sample for each type of coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. 1. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft.. 2. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 3. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well -ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. B. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F. C. Apply solvent -thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F D. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. 1. Quantity: 3 percent, but not less than 1 gal. or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles. C. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore). 2. ICI Dulux Paint Centers (ICI Dulux Paints). 3. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams). 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish -coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best -quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory for- mulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint -material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. C. Colors: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 2.3 PREPARATORY COATS A. Concrete Unit Masonry Block Filler: High-performance latex block filler of finish coat manufacturer and recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated. B. Exterior Primer: Exterior alkyd or latex -based primer of finish coat manufacturer and recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated. 1. Ferrous -Metal and Aluminum Substrates: Rust -inhibitive metal primer. 2. Zinc -Coated Metal Substrates: Galvanized metal primer. 3. Where manufacturer does not recommend a separate primer formulation on substrate indicated, use paint specified for finish coat. C. Interior Primer: Interior latex -based or alkyd primer of finish coat manufacturer and recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated. 1. Ferrous -Metal Substrates: Quick drying, rust -inhibitive metal primer. 2. Zinc -Coated Metal Substrates: Galvanized metal primer. 3. Where manufacturer does not recommend a separate primer fonnulation on substrate indicated, use paint specified for finish coat. 2.4 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Exterior Low -Luster - Satin Finish Acrylic Paint: 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec 100% Acrylic Exterior Satin No. 184. 2. ICI Dulux Paints; 2402 series Dulux Professional Exterior 100% Acrylic Satin Finish. 3. Sherwin-Williams; A- 100 Exterior Latex Satin House & Trim Paint A82 Series. B. Exterior Full -Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Ferrous and Other Metals: 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Gloss Enamel M28. 2. ICI Dulux Paints; 3028-XXXX Dulux Interior/Exterior Acrylic Gloss Finish. 3. Sherwin-Williams; DTM Acrylic Coating Gloss (Waterborne) B66W 100 Series. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4 for inspection and acceptance of surfaces to be painted. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. C. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface -applied protec- tion before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. D. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. C. If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on back side. e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on deliv- ery. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommen- dations. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. C. Touch up bare areas and shop -applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire -brush, clean with solvents recom- mended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat. 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. E. Material Preparation: 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. F. Exposed Surfaces: Include areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned -tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and pro- vide desired protection. 1. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 2. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 3. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 4. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 5. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field -finished casework to match exterior. G. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. H. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 2. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. I. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. J. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. K. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces. L. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. M. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn -through or other defects due to insufficient seal- ing. N. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfec- tions will not be acceptable. O. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass -smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. P. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregular- ity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site. B. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. C. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. 1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA Pl. 3.3 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry): 1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. Lt. Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer. b. Finish Coats: See section 2.4. B. Concrete Unit Masonry: 1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler. a. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler. b. Finish Coats: See section 2.4. C. Mineral -Fiber -Reinforced Cement Panels: I. Acrylic Finish:Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer. b. Finish Coats: See section 2.4. D. Ferrous Metal: 1. Acrylic Finish Two finish coatsover a rust -inhibitive primer. a. Primer: Exterior ferrous -metal primer (not required on shop -primed items). b. Finish Coats: See section 2.4. E. Zinc -Coated Metal: 1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer. b. Finish Coats: See section 2.4. J. Aluminum: 1. Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Exterior aluminum primer under acrylic finishes. b. Finish Coats: See section 2.4. END OF SECTION 09900 SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fixed, extruded -aluminum louvers. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide louvers capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and wind loads based on a uniform pressure of 20 Ibf/sq. ft., acting inward or outward, without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. B. Thermal Movements: Provide louvers that allow for thermal movements resulting from a temperature change (range) of 120 deg F , ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces, by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connec- tions, and other detrimental effects. C. Air -Performance, Water -Penetration, and Wind -Driven Rain Ratings: As demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units according to AMCA 500-L. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. C. Samples: For each type of finish upon request of Architect. D. Product test reports verifying compliance with applicable wind loads by testing methods approved by the authority having jurisdic- tion.. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Louvers: a. Airline Products Co. b. Cesco Products. C. Greenheck. d. Vent Products Company, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5 or T-52. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003 or 5005. C. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Fabricate frames to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. B. Join frame members to each other and to louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view. C. Join frame members to each other and to louver blades with fillet welds, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manu- facturer, concealed from view. 2.4 FIXED, EXTRUDED -ALUMINUM LOUVERS A. Horizontal, Nondrainable-B lade Louver: 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Greenheck ESU or a comparable product of one of the following: a. Airline Products Co. b. Cesco Products. C. Vent Products Company, Inc. 2. Blade Profile: Plain blade without center baffle. 3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.080 inch. 4. Performance Requirements: a. Free Area: Not less than 7.5 sq. ft. for 48-inch- wide by 48-inch- high louver. b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 700 fpm. C. Air Performance: Not more than 0.10-inch wg static pressure drop at free -area velocity. 2.5 LOUVER SCREENS A. General: Provide screen at interior face of each exterior louver. B. Louver Screen Frames: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. C. Louver Screening: 1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch- square mesh, 0.063-inch wire. 2.6 FINISHES A. Aluminum, High -Performance Organic Finish: Two -coat thermocured system with fluoropolymer coats containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2605. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. D. Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the fac- tory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units. E. Protect galvanized and nonferrous -metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals. END OF SECTION 10200 U CU O Q 0 i Cis co 0 _ C.� _ z i Qo 2 <Fr 0 Qo 0 0U_ Z �Q w c Q U CI E E 0 i Q Cv N < o CZ 0 0 �LL_ 0 m �_J 0 o J Z z Y 0� w 0 O LU N 0- C�E Mg O 00 a _ M �? o o a, N 01 gN CD CD 0 `r x ¢l N N Z T w °O N J ti CD a W O CZ U �0 C]) 00 Lli P: 70 W w w a d LU O LJJ CO m Q� K �. z � J w_J Z 0 C0 U) 2i m 0 CO Er w Cl- 0 rr w q Q o J U r w d m N o w U) C) o m 0 C J C3 0 w Y U LLJ= U c] BLDG B PACKAGE D1 ALL WORK SHALL CONFORM TO AT LEAST THE MINIMUM STANDARDS OF THE FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, 2004 EDITION, WITH 200(o REVISIONS. D2 FOR DESIGN LOAD VALUES, SEE SPECIFIC PLANS. FOUNDATION SHEET 5101 ROOF FRAMING SHEETS 8102 D3 TO THE BEST OF THE ENGINEER'S KNOWLEDGE, THE STRUCTURAL PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS HAVE BEEN DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE BUILDING CODE. D4 EVERY REASONABLE EFFORT HAS BEEN MADE TO ENSURE COORDINATION BETWEEN THESE DWGS AND THE BOUND STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATIONS. SHOULD THERE BE ANY DISCREPANCIES, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REQUEST A CLARIFICATION IN WRITING. GENEfRAL G1 THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW AND DETERMINE THAT DIMENSIONS ARE COORDINATED BETWEEN ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS PRIOR TO FABRICATION OR START OF CONSTRUCTION. G2 THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL MEASURES NECESSARY TO PROTECT THE STRUCTURE, THE WORK PERSONS AND OTHER PEOPLE DURING CONSTRUCTION. HE SHALL SUPERVISE AND DIRECT THE WORK AND BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL CONSTRUCTION. G3 NO STRUCTURAL MEMBER SHALL BE CUT, NOTCHED OR OTHERWISE REDUCED IN STRENGTH. G4 THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ARCHITECTURAL, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR ANCHORED, EMBEDDED AND SUPPORTED ITEMS WHICH AFFECT THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES. G5 ALL SUBMITTAL SETS SHALL CONSIST OF A MAXIMUM OF (5) COPIES. ANY ADDITIONAL COPIES WILL BE DISCARDED. Gro ANY SUBMITTALS RECEIVED BY ARCH/ENG THAT HAVE NOT BEEN CHECKED BY THE GC AND HIS SUBCONTRACTOR SHALL BE RETURNED WITHOUT REVIEW. G7 ALL SECTIONS AND DETAILS SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO BE TYPICAL OR SIMILAR UNLESS ANOTHER SECTION OR DETAIL IS NOTED. G8 ANY CONFLICTS BETWEEN THE SPECIFICATIONS AND DESIGN DRAWINGS SHALL BE IMMEDIATELY BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ARCHITECT. THE MORE STRINGENT REQUIREMENTS SHALL GOVERN UNLESS DETERMINED OTHERWISE BY THE ARCHITECT. GS BBM STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS ASSUMES NO RISK OR LIABILITY FOR THE SITE SAFETY OR WELL-BEING OF ANY CONTRACTOR, SUBCONTRACTOR NOR THEIR EMPLOYEES DURING THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE PROJECT CONTAINED IN THESE DOCUMENTS. FOUNDATIONS F1 A CERTIFIED TESTING AGENCY SHALL BE ENGAGED TO PERFORM INDUSTRY -STANDARD SOIL DENSITY TESTS TO ENSURE CONFORMANCE WITH GEOTECHNICAL SOILS REPORT. SUBMIT REPORTS TO ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER. F2 CONTRACTOR, IN CONJUNCTION WITH GEOTECHNICAL FIELD REPRESENTATIVE, SHALL DETERMINE IF ANY UNSUITABLE CONDITIONS ARE DISCOVERED DURING EXCAVATION WHICH WOULD PREVENT ATTAINMENT OF THE DESIGN SOIL PRESSURE RECOMMENDED BY THE SOILS REPORT. F3 FOR FOUNDATION DESIGN VALUES, SEE FOUNDATION SCHEDULE. 5L,4 ON GfRADE SOG1 UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE IN THE GEOTECHNICAL REPORT, COMPACT INTERIOR FILL TO S5i® OF MODIFIED PROCTOR MAXIMUM DRY DENSITY (ASTM D155-i). SOIL COMPACTION SHALL BE FIELD -CONTROLLED BY A REPRESENTATIVE TECHNICIAN OF A QUALIFIED LABORATORY. EACH LAYER OF FILL SHALL NOT EXCEED 12" THICK AND SHALL BE COMPACTED PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF NEXT LAYER. 50G2 MAXIMUM SPACING OF CONTROL JOINTS (i.e. SAWCUT JOINT OR CONSTRUCTION JOINT) SHALL BE AS SET IN THE TABLE BELOW, OR AS NOTED ON PLANS. THE MORE STRINGENT SHALL APPLY. PATTERNS SHALL BE APPROXIMATELY SQUARE WITH A RATIO OF LONG SIDE TO SHORT SIDE NOT EXCEEDING 1.5 TO 1. SLAB THICKNESS (IN) 3/4' OIL LARGER AGGREGATE SPACING (FT) 4 12 5 13 14 -1 16 8 18 9 1S 10 20 * MIX DESIGNS CONTAINING AGGREGATE LESS THAN 3/411 ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. * * SAWCUT SLAB AS SOON AS AGGREGATE DOES NOT DISLODGE (MUST BE WITHIN 12 HOURS OF CONCRETE PLACEMENT). SOG3 GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF SJ'S AND CJ'S WITH ARCHITECTURAL FLOOR FINISHES TO ENSURE SLAB JOINTS DO NOT READ THROUGH. SOG4 SLAB THICKNESS SHALL BE INCREASED AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE ADEQUATE SUPPORT FOR CRANE LOADS WITHOUT CRACKING SLAB. ME C�4AN I CAL_ PASTENEiRS MF1 EXPANSION ANCHORS SHALL BE "POWER-5TUD11 BY RAWL OR "TRUBOLTI' BY ITW RAMSET/REDHEAD OR ENGINEER -APPROVED EQUAL. MF2 ADHESIVE ANCHORS SHALL BE 11POWER-FAST" BY RAWL OR "EPCON" BY ITW RAMSET/REDHEAD OR ENGINEER -APPROVED EQUAL. MF3 MASONRY SCREWS SHALL BE "TAPPERS" BY RAWL OR 11TAPCON" BY ITW RAMSET/REDHEAD OR ENGINEER -APPROVED EQUAL. MF4 POWDER -ACTUATED FASTENERS (PAF) SHALL BE BY ITW RAMSET/REDHEAD, HILTI OR ENGINEER -APPROVED EQUAL. MF5 REFER TO LIGHT -GAGE FRAMING NOTES (IF APPLICABLE) FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. MFro CARBON -STEEL EXPANSION ANCHORS SHALL HAVE A ONE-PIECE ANCHOR BODY WITH A LENGTH IDENTIFICATION CODE. THE ANCHORS SHALL HAVE AN EXPANSION MECHANISM WHICH CONSISTS OF A PAIR OF INTERLOCKING INDEPENDENT WEDGES. CARBON STEEL COMPONENTS SHALL BE PLATED ACCORDING TO ASTM SPECIFICATION B 6.33. EXPANSION ANCHORS MUST MEET THE DESCRIPTION IN FEDERAL SPECIFICATION FF-8-325 FOR CONCRETE EXPANSION ANCHORS. MFi ALL FASTENERS SHALL BE INSTALLED PER THE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. REFER TO LIGHT GAGE METAL FRAMING NOTES (IF APPLICABLE) FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. S i �UClUh,�L G,cNE�,�L NOTES C1 A CERTIFIED TESTING AGENCY SHALL BE ENGAGED TO PERFORM INDUSTRY STANDARD TESTING INCLUDING SLUMP TESTS AND CYLINDER BREAKS TO ENSURE CONFORMANCE WITH PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS CIF PROVIDED). SUBMIT REPORTS TO ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER. C2 CONCRETE WORK SHALL CONFORM TO ACI 318-02 BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE. C3 ALL CONCRETE SHALL HAVE THE FOLLOWING PROPERTIES: C4 C5 C6 C-i CS CS LOCATION 23 DAY SLUMP COARSE STRENGTH AGGREGATE(S) FOUNDATIONS 3000 PSI 411 +/- 1" 1'1 SLAB -ON -GRADE: FOOT TRAFFIC 3000 PSI 411 +/- 111 1° TIE BEAMS AND TIE COLUMNS 3000 PSI 4" +/- 111 3/81' (MAX 50' BETWEEN COLD JOINTS) ELEVATED SLABS (MTL DECK) 3000 PSI 4" +/- 111 3/011 4 111 FILLED CELL, PRECAST COARSE GROUT: 3/8" LINTELS 4 BOND BEAM GROUT 2500 PSI 8" TO 11" FINE GROUT: (ASTM C416) - SEE NOTE 2 NONE NOTES: 1. SLUMP FOR RAMPS AND SLOPING SURFACES SHALL NOT EXCEED 4" 2. SEE MASONRY NOTE M21 FOR TESTING REQUIREMENTS OF GROUT TO BE USED TO FILL CORES OF CMU. CONCRETE MIX DESIGN SUBMITTALS: 1. EACH MIX DESIGN SHALL BE LABELED TO INDICATE THE AREA IN WHICH THE CONCRETE IS TO BE PLACED (I.E. FOUNDATIONS, SLAB- ON -GRADE, COLUMNS, ETC-). FAILURE TO DO SO WILL CAUSE DELAY AND/OR REJECTION OF SUBMITTALS. 2. PROPOSED MIX DESIGN SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH METHOD 1 OR METHOD 2 OF ACI 301. PROVIDE SUPPORTING DATA IN TABULAR FORM FOR EACH SEPARATE PROPOSED MIX. 3. SUBMIT CONCRETE MIX DESIGN FOR EACH PROPOSED CLASS OF CONCRETE. REBAR SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM-ro15 GRADE 00. WELDED WIRE FABRIC SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A-185 AND SHALL BE LAPPED MINIMUM ONE MESH + 2" WHERE SPLICED. ALL REINFORCING SHALL BE DOMESTICALLY PRODUCED. SPLICES AND ANCHORAGE OF REINFORCING SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED): WELDED WIRE FABRIC: 8" ALL OTHER: 48 DIA (12" MIN) REINFORCEMENT IN WALLS, FOOTINGS AND BEAMS SHALL BE CONTINUOUS AND LAPPED 48 BAR D IA AT SPLICE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. HOOK AND LAP ALL CORNER AND INTERSECTING BARS. (SEE REINF DEVELOPMENT DETAIL). 48�0 LAP SPLICE (TYP) EXTEND INTERIOR BARS TO FAR FACE (TIP, NO HOOKS OR CORNER BARS REQ'D) STD HOOK (TYP) CORNER BAR (TYP) - MATCH OF HORIZONTAL BARS (TYP) SEE GEN NOTES FOR CORNER INTERSECTION REINF DEVELOPMENT DETAIL. COVER FOR REINFORCING SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: CONCRETE CAST AGAINST AND PERMANENTLY EXPOSED TO EARTH: 311 CONCRETE EXPOSED TO EARTH OR WEATHER: *ro THRU *18 BARS: 211 *5 BAR, W31 OR D31 WIRE AND SMALLER: 1 1/2" CONCRETE NOT EXPOSED TO EARTH OR WEATHER: SLABS, WALLS, JOISTS: *14 AND *18 BARS: 1 1/2" *11 BAR AND SMALLER: 3/411 BEAMS, COLUMNS: PRIMARY REINF, TIES, STIRRUPS, SPIRALS: 1 1/2" SHELLS, FOLDED PLATE MEMBERS: *ro BAR AND LARGER: 3/411 *5 BAR, W31, OR D31 WIRE AND SMALLER: 1/211 STEPPED FOOTING DETAIL (IF REQUIRED): SEE PLAN FOR 3roo LAP LOCATION 211 CLR T/ FTG EL SEE d FIDN 4° PLAN T/ FTG d d 3" CLR EL SE FDN d ° d a d ° (TYP) I PLAN ° d 84 d FTG REINF (SEE SCH) RE INF SAME AS THAT IN FDN SCH MATCH FTG Tkr_KNFSS FTG RE INF (SEE SCH) DETAIL STEPPED FuuTING O FOOTING PENETRATION TYP FTG REINF NOTE: PIPE MUST BE S0® MATCH TYP (±10') TO WALL FTG FTG RE INF WRAP PIPE WITH A MINIMUM 111 THICK MIN 18" COMPRESSIBLE PIPE INSULATION FOR 10 ENTIRE WIDTH OF FTG + 4" MIN EACH SIDE T/ FTG EL Z . a d SEE FDN 4 so PLAN °d 16 = Z / 11 -MI -N /7 OPTION 2A (FTG AFTER PIPE) TYP FTG RE INF NOTE: PIPE MUST BE S0' FTG �REINF CH P (+-10') TO WALL FTG SLEEVE (2 SIZES LARGER MIN 1011 THAN PIPE) FOR ENTIRE WIDTH OF FTG + 4" MIN EACH SIDE T/ FTG EL SEE FDN PLAN MIN OPTION 213 (FTG BEFORE PIPE) WALL - SEE WALL FOOTING, SEE FOUNDATION PLAN FOUNDATION AND SCHEDULE FOR PLAN SIZE ANDIREINF. HOOK 211 EDGE / ADD'L BAR *5x5'-011 BAR PLAN VIEW K/ L � t FTG 4 WALL DOWNSPOUT, COORD INATE WALL - SEE WITH ARCH'L FOUNDATION PLAN AND CIVIL DWGS NOTE: ADD'L BAR, CONFIGURATION OF SEE ABOVE PIPE MAY VARY. _ T/ FTG EL COORD W/ CIVIL SEE FDN PLAN u_. t- W U 3" CLR SEE FDN SCH (TYP) OPTION 3 (NOTCH IN FTG) DETAIL - FOOTING PENETRATIONS- HANDfRAIL HRl HANDRAILS SHALL BE DESIGNED PER APPLICABLE BUILDING CODE (SEE D1). FABRICATOR SHALL SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS SIGNED AND SEALED BY A REGISTERED FLORIDA ENGINEER TO THE ENGINEER OF RECORD FOR APPROVAL. STEEL_ RQQ0= DECK RD1 SEE ROOF FRAMING PLAN(S) FOR STEEL DECK ATTACHMENT TO STRUCTURE. RD2 STEEL ROOF DECK UNITS SHALL BE FABRICATED FROM STEEL CONFORMING TO SECTION A3 OF THE LATEST EDITION OF THE AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL INSTITUTE, SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE DESIGN OF COLD - FORMED STEEL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. THE STEEL USED SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM YIELD STRENGTH OF 33 K8I (230 MPa). RD3 ALL FIELD WELDING OF DECK SHALL BE IN STRICT CONFORMANCE WITH ANSI/AWSD1.3 STRUCTURAL WELDING CODE. RD 4 GAL VAN I Z ING SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM - A6 53, STRUCTURAL QUALITY AND FEDERAL SPEC. QQ-S--iiS. RD5 SEE CHART BELOW FOR MINIMUM SECTION PROPERTIES REQUIRED FOR STEEL DECK. PROPERTIES SHOWN ARE REPRODUCED FROM THE VULCRAFT MANUAL. —�• ST1 A CERTIFIED TESTING AGENCY SHALL BE ENGAGED TO PERFORM INDUSTRY STANDARD INSPECTIONS TO ENSURE CONFORMANCE WITH PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS CIF PROVIDED). SUBMIT REPORTS TO ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER. ST2 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PLANS, DETAILS AND CALCULATIONS SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO ARCHITECT FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO FABRICATION. CALCULATIONS SHALL BE SIGNED AND SEALED BY AN ENGINEER REGISTERED IN THE SAME STATE AS PROJECT LOCATION. 1155M STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS" WILL REQUIRE THAT THE ENGINEERED DRAWINGS FOR THE STEEL TRUSSES BE REVIEWED FOR COMPATIBILITY WITH THE DESIGN INTENT OF THE STRUCTURE PRIOR TO FABRICATION. ANY AND ALL COSTS ASSOCIATED WITH FABRICATING TRUSSES FROM SUBMITTALS NOT BEARING OUR SHOP DRAWING STAMP AND APPROVAL WILL BE THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. ST3 SEE ROOF FRAMING PLANS AND ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXTENT AND SLOPES OF STEEL TRUSSES. ST4 ALL TRUSSES SHALL BE DESIGNED BY A SPECIALTY ENGINEER WITH A MINIMUM OF (5) YEARS EXPERIENCE IN SIMILAR TYPE STRUCTURES. ST5 ALL TRUSSES SHALL BE TEMPORARILY AND PERMANENTLY BRACED AS REQUIRED BY TRUSS MFR. BRACING AND BRIDGING BY TRUSS 1" IFR. ST6 MINIMUM THICKNESS FOR TOP CHORD OF ALL TRUSSES SHALL BE 18 GA. ST-t THE ROOF FRAMING PLAN SHOWN HEREIN IS A GRAPHICAL REPRESENTATION ONLY. REFER TO TRUSS SUBMITTALS FOR ACTUAL LAYOUT, TRUSS PROFILES AND CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS AT ALL TRUSS SUPPORTS. STS ALL TRUSS -TO -TRUSS 4 TRUSS TO STRUCTURE CONNECTIONS SHALL BE DESIGNED AND DETAILED BY TRUSS MANUFACTURER. CONNECTIONS SHALL BE DESIGNED FOR DEAD, LIVE AND WIND (BOTH UPLIFT 4 LATERAL) LOADS. STS TRUSSES SHALL BE SHOP FABRICATED, INCLUDING ANY FIELD SPLICE CONNECTION COMPONENTS AND SHIPPED TO SITE IN MAXIMUM LENGTHS AND HEIGHTS. FIELD FABRICATION OF TRUSSES WILL NOT BE PERMITTED. 5T10 ALL TRUSS MEMBERS SHALL BE GALVANIZED METAL STUD STOCK AND GALVANIZED SHEET OF SIZES AND GAGES TO BE DETERMINED BY THE MANUFACTURER'S STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS. GALVANIZED CUSTOM SHAPE AND CONNECTOR SYSTEMS SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED FOR USE IN TRUSSES WILL BE ACCEPTABLE. ST11 REVIEW ARCHITECTURAL FLOOR PLANS FOR OPERABLE WALLS THAT ARE SUSPENDED FROM THE TRUSSES. ANALYSIS FOR CLOSED, PARTIALLY OPEN AND OPEN POSITION LOAD CURVES IS REQUIRED. REFER TO WALL MANUFACTURER FOR SPECIAL DEFLECTION CRITERIA. 6T12 REVIEW ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLANS AND SECTIONS FOR SPECIAL CEILING CONDITIONS, INCLUDING CEILING SLOPES, TROFFERS, COFFERS, TRAYS, STEPS AND OTHER SPECIAL FEATURES. 8T13 THE SUPPORTS FOR SCISSOR, ARCHED CHORDS OR ANY OTHER SIMILAR TYPE TRUSS, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, SHALL BE DESIGNED WITH A PINNED CONNECTION AT ONE END AND A HORIZONTAL ROLLER AT THE OTHER END. THE SUPPORTING STRUCTURE, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, HAS NOT BEEN DESIGNED FOR ANY GRAVITY LOAD HORIZONTAL FORCE DUE TO DEFLECTION. DO NOT DESIGN THESE TYPE OF TRUSSES WITH PINNED SUPPORTS EACH END. B-B' STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS Orlando Boca Raton P:407.645.3423 F:407.645.3790 191 Z Boothe Circe Suite 100 Longwood, FL 32750 bbmsttuctural.com EB5343 Bora Erbilen P.E. #55996 ENGINEER HEREBY EXPRESSLY RESERVES HIS COMMON LAW COPYRIGHT AND OTHER PROPERTY RIGHTS IN THESE PLANS. THIS DESIGN AND DRAWINGS ARE NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, CHANGED, OR COPIED IN ANY FORM OR MANNER WHATSOEVER WITHOUT FIRST OBTAINING THE EXPRESSED WRITTEN PERMISSION AND CONSENT OF "BURTON BRASWELL MIDDLEBRO0KS ASSOCIATES', NOR ARE THEY TO BE ASSIGNED TO ANY PARTY WITHOUT FIRST OBTAINING SAID WRITTEN PERMISSION AND CONSENT. a 0 0 E m z c� 0 0 ST1 A CERTIFIED TESTING AGENCY SHALL BE ENGAGED TO PERFORM INDUSTRY STANDARD INSPECTIONS TO ENSURE CONFORMANCE WITH PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS CIF PROVIDED). SUBMIT REPORTS TO ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER. ST2 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PLANS, DETAILS AND CALCULATIONS SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO ARCHITECT FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO FABRICATION. CALCULATIONS SHALL BE SIGNED AND SEALED BY AN ENGINEER REGISTERED IN THE SAME STATE AS PROJECT LOCATION. 1155M STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS" WILL REQUIRE THAT THE ENGINEERED DRAWINGS FOR THE STEEL TRUSSES BE REVIEWED FOR COMPATIBILITY WITH THE DESIGN INTENT OF THE STRUCTURE PRIOR TO FABRICATION. ANY AND ALL COSTS ASSOCIATED WITH FABRICATING TRUSSES FROM SUBMITTALS NOT BEARING OUR SHOP DRAWING STAMP AND APPROVAL WILL BE THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. ST3 SEE ROOF FRAMING PLANS AND ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXTENT AND SLOPES OF STEEL TRUSSES. ST4 ALL TRUSSES SHALL BE DESIGNED BY A SPECIALTY ENGINEER WITH A MINIMUM OF (5) YEARS EXPERIENCE IN SIMILAR TYPE STRUCTURES. ST5 ALL TRUSSES SHALL BE TEMPORARILY AND PERMANENTLY BRACED AS REQUIRED BY TRUSS MFR. BRACING AND BRIDGING BY TRUSS 1" IFR. ST6 MINIMUM THICKNESS FOR TOP CHORD OF ALL TRUSSES SHALL BE 18 GA. ST-t THE ROOF FRAMING PLAN SHOWN HEREIN IS A GRAPHICAL REPRESENTATION ONLY. REFER TO TRUSS SUBMITTALS FOR ACTUAL LAYOUT, TRUSS PROFILES AND CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS AT ALL TRUSS SUPPORTS. STS ALL TRUSS -TO -TRUSS 4 TRUSS TO STRUCTURE CONNECTIONS SHALL BE DESIGNED AND DETAILED BY TRUSS MANUFACTURER. CONNECTIONS SHALL BE DESIGNED FOR DEAD, LIVE AND WIND (BOTH UPLIFT 4 LATERAL) LOADS. STS TRUSSES SHALL BE SHOP FABRICATED, INCLUDING ANY FIELD SPLICE CONNECTION COMPONENTS AND SHIPPED TO SITE IN MAXIMUM LENGTHS AND HEIGHTS. FIELD FABRICATION OF TRUSSES WILL NOT BE PERMITTED. 5T10 ALL TRUSS MEMBERS SHALL BE GALVANIZED METAL STUD STOCK AND GALVANIZED SHEET OF SIZES AND GAGES TO BE DETERMINED BY THE MANUFACTURER'S STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS. GALVANIZED CUSTOM SHAPE AND CONNECTOR SYSTEMS SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED FOR USE IN TRUSSES WILL BE ACCEPTABLE. ST11 REVIEW ARCHITECTURAL FLOOR PLANS FOR OPERABLE WALLS THAT ARE SUSPENDED FROM THE TRUSSES. ANALYSIS FOR CLOSED, PARTIALLY OPEN AND OPEN POSITION LOAD CURVES IS REQUIRED. REFER TO WALL MANUFACTURER FOR SPECIAL DEFLECTION CRITERIA. 6T12 REVIEW ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLANS AND SECTIONS FOR SPECIAL CEILING CONDITIONS, INCLUDING CEILING SLOPES, TROFFERS, COFFERS, TRAYS, STEPS AND OTHER SPECIAL FEATURES. 8T13 THE SUPPORTS FOR SCISSOR, ARCHED CHORDS OR ANY OTHER SIMILAR TYPE TRUSS, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, SHALL BE DESIGNED WITH A PINNED CONNECTION AT ONE END AND A HORIZONTAL ROLLER AT THE OTHER END. THE SUPPORTING STRUCTURE, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, HAS NOT BEEN DESIGNED FOR ANY GRAVITY LOAD HORIZONTAL FORCE DUE TO DEFLECTION. DO NOT DESIGN THESE TYPE OF TRUSSES WITH PINNED SUPPORTS EACH END. B-B' STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS Orlando Boca Raton P:407.645.3423 F:407.645.3790 191 Z Boothe Circe Suite 100 Longwood, FL 32750 bbmsttuctural.com EB5343 Bora Erbilen P.E. #55996 ENGINEER HEREBY EXPRESSLY RESERVES HIS COMMON LAW COPYRIGHT AND OTHER PROPERTY RIGHTS IN THESE PLANS. THIS DESIGN AND DRAWINGS ARE NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, CHANGED, OR COPIED IN ANY FORM OR MANNER WHATSOEVER WITHOUT FIRST OBTAINING THE EXPRESSED WRITTEN PERMISSION AND CONSENT OF "BURTON BRASWELL MIDDLEBRO0KS ASSOCIATES', NOR ARE THEY TO BE ASSIGNED TO ANY PARTY WITHOUT FIRST OBTAINING SAID WRITTEN PERMISSION AND CONSENT. a 0 0 E m z c� 0 0 V a) 0 0_ O �L V (a c co U J (0 U CO C r11 -0 J O VJ 2 M O E 2 co u- z a' w �C.0�� cy) [— to U O O C) L _c=M C� 5 N�L� 0 06!EU O w� ccnn0-uUi o WYN0- 0- M p w c, -o ffi p o� �w >p E Qo 0 U� v ar,� a �0. 3 U) W O z J Q F_ U W Q W Z ~ W W w W U) z LLI co J L0 m 0!� LO w:ft I.,J o� 0D ti 0 C 0 .E T E w Q w W 0 Z M o Lu U co o 2:w N '.4-¢ lL C3 ca O 1LU — UJI aY ® ® U C11 File=F: \2007\07146\07146—TECH\07146—SDWGS\07146—Sdwgs\RETAIL 3\07146_S001.dwg Tab=S001 Date/Time= Apr 07, 2008 — 1: 30pm Plot by feid 1`1ASONF`' M1 MASONRY CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS AND INSPECTIONS SHALL CONFORM TO THE LATEST EDITION OF THE ACI BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE MASONRY STRUCTURES (ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402-02), SPECIFICATIONS FOR MASONRY STRUCTURES (ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TM6 ro02-02) ASTM C416, ASTM C1019, AND NCMA TEK 107. M2 CONCRETE BLOCKS SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM C-90. (f'm = 1500 PSI) (1900 PSI ON THE NET AREA). M3 MORTAR SHALL COMPLY WITH ASTM C210, TYPE M FOR RETAINING WALLS AND WALLS BELOW GRADE, TYPE S FOR TYPICAL WALLS. (COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH = 2500 PSI AND 1000 PSI, RESPECTIVELY. SITE TESTED MORTAR CUBES SHALL ACHIEVE A MINIMUM OF .50% OF THE DESIGN COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH) M4 BLOCK SHALL NOT BE MOISTENED BEFORE GROUTING. MS ALL MASONRY CROSS WEBS SHALL BE FULLY BEDDED IN MORTAR AROUND CELLS TO BE GROUTED. M6 REINFORCE WALLS WITH LADDER TYPE (ASTM A-82, *9 GAGE WIRE) DEFORMED REINFORCEMENT EQUAL TO DURO-WALL IN BED JOINTS AT 16" CC UNO, MEASURED VERTICALLY. PLACE PER MFR INSTRUCTIONS. LAP ALL HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING 6 " MIN. M1 VERTICAL REINFORCING MUST HAVE A MINIMUM CLEARANCE OF 1/2" TO INSIDE FACE. VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT IN WALLS SHALL BE SECURED AND LATERALLY SUPPORTED AGAINST DISPLACEMENT AT INTERVALS NOT EXCEEDING 192x(5AR DIAMETER) OR 10 PT (WHICHEVER IS LESS) WHENEVER A CLEANOUT IS REQUIRED. SEE GROUTING DETAIL NOTE FOR CLEANOUT REQUIREMENTS. MS GROUT PLACEMENT STOPPED FOR (1) HOUR OR MORE SHOULD BE STOPPED 1 1/2" BELOW THE TOP OF THE MASONRY UNIT TO PROVIDE A KEY FOR SUBSEQUENT GROUTING. M9 TYPICAL VERTICAL REINFORCING SIZE AND SPACING SHALL BE ABOVE AND BELOW ALL WALL OPENINGS. M10 TEMPORARY BRACING AND SHORING OF: WALLS TO PROVIDE STABILITY DURING CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR. M11 PROVIDE FILLED PRECAST U-LINTELS AS MANUFACTURED BY CAST- CRETE OR APPROVED EQUAL WITH (1) *5 CONT AT ALL OPENINGS WHERE BEAMS ARE NOT SHOWN, SCHEDULED OR NOTED. LINTELS SHALL HAVE MINIMUM UNFILLED CAPACITY OF 400 lb/LF AND BEAR NOMINAL 6" (MIN (o") EACH END ON A GROUT FILLED CELL. PROVIDE PRE -CAST LINTEL SUBMITTALS SIGNED AND SEALED BY A SPECIALTY ENGINEER WHO IS REGISTERED IN THE SAME STATE AS THE PROJECT LOCATION. M12 STOPPING AND RESUMING WORK: RACK BACK 1/2-UNIT LENGTH IN EACH COURSE. DO NOT TOOTH. CLEAN EXPOSED SURFACES OF SET MASONRY. REMOVE LOOSE MASONRY UNITS AND MORTAR PRIOR TO LAYING FRESH MASONRY. M13 REINFORCE MASONRY OPENINGS GREATER THAN 1'-0" WIDE, WITH HORIZ JOINT REINF PLACED IN (2) HORIZ JOINTS APPROXIMATELY 8" APART, IMMEDIATELY ABOVE THE LINTEL AND IMMEDIATELY BELOW THE SILL. EXTEND REINFORCING A MINIMUM OF 2'-0" BEYOND JAMBS OF THE OPENING EXCEPT AT CONTROL JOINTS. SEE PLAN FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. M14 DO NOT APPLY UNIFORM LOADS TO MASONRY WALLS FOR (3) DAYS. M15 DO NOT APPLY CONCENTRATED LOADS TO MASONRY WALLS FOR Cl) DAYS. M16 EXTEND ALL VERTICAL WALL REINFORCEMENT TO WITHIN 2" OF TOP OF WALL OR BEAM UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. TERMINATE REINFORCING WITH STANDARD ACI 9O DEGREE HOOK IF ROOF JOISTS AND/OR TRUSSES BEAR ON TOP OF WALL AND THERE IS NO PARAPET. IF PARAPET EXISTS, HOOK IS NOT REQUIRED. M11 MAXIMUM CONTROL JOINT SPACING FOR CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS: SPACING FOR CONTROL JOINTS 3 x WALL HEIGHT = SPACING IN FT (NOT TO EXCEED 50'-011) M18 REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR WATERPROOFING DETAILS AT MASONRY CONTROL JOINTS. M19 GROUT FOR PILLED CELLS SHALL BE PLACED IN CONFORMANCE WITH ACI 530.1 AND AS INDICATED BELOW: MAX HEIGHT OF GROUT LIFT = 5' -0 ". CONSOLIDATE BY MECHANICAL VIBRATION PER ACI 530.1. ONE OR MORE GROUT LIFTS CONSTITUTE A GROUT POUR. SEE NOTE C3 FOR GROUT PROPERTIES w U IF WALL IS LAID UP NO GREATER THAN 5'-OU IN HEIGHT ABOVE THE FOOTING OR PREVIOUS GROUT POUR(S), A CLEAN -OUT HOLE SHALL NOT BE REQUIRED. OTHERWISE, PROVIDE CLEAN -OUT HOLE WITH MINIMUM SIZE OF 3"x3" OVERHANGING MORTAR AND DEBRIS SHALL BE REMOVED FROM INSIDE THE CELL WALLS. SEAL PRIOR TO GROUTING BUT AFTER INSPECTION. NOTES: 1. DO NOT GROUT UNTIL MORTAR HAS SET SUFFICIENTLY TO WITHSTAND THE PRESSURE OF THE GROUT. WAIT NOT LESS THAN 24 HOURS. 2. PLACE GROUT WITHIN 90 MINUTES FROM INTRODUCING WATER IN THE MIXTURE AND PRIOR TO INITIAL SET. 3. MAXIMUM WALL HEIGHT FROM TOP OF FOOTING OR PREVIOUS GROUT POURS LAID UP AT ONE TIME SHALL BE 12'-0" FOR COARSE GROUT 4 24'-0" FOR FINE GROUT, A GROUT POUR CONSISTS OF ONE OR MORE LIFTS. 4. THE MINIMUM CONTINUOUS UNOBSTRUCTED CLEAR AREA IN CELL TO RECEIVE GROUT MUST BE NOT LESS THAN 3 "x3 ". MORTAR FINS MUST BE REMOVED AS BLOCK PLACEMENT PROCEEDS. MORTAR DROPPINGS MUST BE KEPT OUT OF CELLS WHICH ARE TO BE GROUTED. GROUTING DETAIL ST�U� l! ��,�L G-ENER,�L /VOTES M20 TYPICAL MASONRY DETAILS: DOOR OPENING (SEE NOTE 4) 10 SEE PLANS FOR ADD'L FILLED CELLS REQ'D AT OPENINGS TYP INTERIOR LO, CMU WALL ON FCC TYP INTERIOR NON -LOAD -BEAR CMU WALL ON THICKENED SLAB WINDOW OPNGz (SEE NOTE 4) TYPICAL SPACING TYP EXTERIOR LOAD -BEARING CMU WALL ON FOOTING— ct YPICAL WALL SEALANT - SEE 1' ARCH DWGS AND Z OR SPECSEXTERIOR '- LOAD- BEARING WALL -1 06 OL PROVIDE ADD'L INTERIOR NON-LOAD- RE INPORCED BEARING WALL ON �- FILLED CELL �INTERSECTION THICKENED SLAB OF LOAD—BRG c NOTES: 1. SEE DETAIL "pp" FOR LOCATING MASONRY CONTROL JOINTS. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT MCJ PLAN TO ARCHITECT FOR APPROVAL. 2. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR OPENING SIZES AND LOCATIONS. 3. SEE FDN PLAN NOTES FOR REINFORCED FILLED CELL SIZE 4 SPACING. 4. MULTIPLE FILLED CELLS MAY BE REQUIRED AT JAMBS. ADDITIONAL BARS WILL BE SHOWN ON PLAN(S). IF NONE ARE SHOWN, THEN A SINGLE TYPICAL REINFORCED JAMB CELL IS SUFFICIENT. 5. SEE MASONRY NOTES ON GENERAL NOTE SHEETS POR HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING AND OTHER ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. ILLUSTRATIVE PLAN OF VARIOUS CMU WALL CONDITIONS "'s PRE -FAE 'IT'' JOINT INTERSEc MASONR WALL INTERSECTION JOINT RE SHALL B CONT INUC IN BOTH IDIRECTIC INTERSEC MASONR wr-t—v WALL INTERSECTION M21 JOB SITE MIXING OF GROUT SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED, TESTING SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM C1O19. SEE TEST MOLD DETAIL BELOW. SEE SCHEDULE UNDER CONCRETE NOTES FOR COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH AND SLUMP REQUIREMENTS. GROUT TEST PRISt I ; COVER UNITS USING ABSORPTIVE PAPER L TOWELLING W/ TAPE (4) Sxax16 CMU BLOCKS REQUIRED (FRONT BLOCK 311x3"xl 5/8" WOOD BLOCK7 REMOVED FOR CLARITY) DETAIL — MASONRY GROUT TEST MOLD (ASTM C-1019) & NON—LOAD—BRG WALLS � z II II Z O _ 3/8 W x 1 D VERT � N� STIRRUPS SEE (DUMMY) JOINT EACH d SCH FOR SIZE SIDE OF TIE BEAM----., -4 To AND SPACING-7 ADJUST STIRRUP \—REINF IS CONTINUOUS LOCATION SLIGHTLY TO AT CONTROL JOINT CLEAR JOINT BY MIN 2" IN CONC TIE BEAM -- MCJ @ TIE BEAM SEALANT - SEE ARCH FILLED CELL W/ TYP WALL DWGS AND OR SPECS. REINF EA SIDE OF MCJ 7�BOND BEAM REINF —1/2" THROUGH -WALL CONTINUOUS AT MCJ VERTICAL CONTROL JOINT MCJ Q BOND BEAM 4 STOP VERTS 2" FROM TOP OF WALL. HOOK MAY BE REQ'D, SEE NOTE M16 VERT BAR CENTERED IN FILLED CELL DOWELS SAME AS 1 VERT BARS HORIZ JOINT REINF s 16" CC VERT SPACING STANDARD HOOK (ALTERNATE SIDES) TYPICAL FILLED CELL DETAILS SEALANT - SEE ARCH FILLED CELL W/ TYP WALL DWGS AND OR SPECS. REINF EA SIDE OF MCJ . 1/2" THROUGH -WALL VERTICAL CONTROL JOINT NOTES: 1. THROUGH -WALL JOINT SHALL BE CONTINUOUS WITHOUT INTERRUPTION FROM FOUNDATION TO TOP OF WALL. 2. TERMINATE TYPICAL HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING 2" FROM JOINT. 3. MAXIMUM SPACING OF CONTROL JOINTS SHALL BE 3 x (WALL HEIGHT) OR 50'-O" WHICHEVER IS LESS. MAS CONTROL JOINT (MCJ) M22 MINIMUM LAP SPLICES FOR REINFORCED CMU PER 2004 FBC (WITH 2O06 SUPPLEMENT) SECTION 21072.3: 0'4 *5 #6 r *s *9 (NOTE 1) �10 (NOTE 2) 3211 011 A Q I I 56 11 6411 -12 11 NOTES: 1. NOT ALLOWED IN 8" CMU BUT ACCEPTABLE FOR 12" CMU. MAXIMUM BAR DIAMETER SHALL NOT EXCEED ONE -EIGHTH OF THE NOMINAL WALL THICKNESS. 2. REINFORCING BARS LARGER THAN *9 SHALL BE SPLICED USING MECHANICAL CONNECTORS. STfRUCTUfRAL STEEL 6S1 A CERTIFIED TESTING AGENCY SHALL BE ENGAGED TO PERFORM INDUSTRY STANDARD INSPECTIONS TO ENSURE CONFORMANCE WITH PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS CIF PROVIDED). SUBMIT REPORTS TO ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER. 552 FABRICATE AND ERECT STRUCTURAL STEEL IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE A18C "SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE DESIGN, FABRICATION AND ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS". 583 MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS: ALL STEEL SHALL BE PRODUCED DOMESTICALLY. ROLLED SHAPES, PLATES AND BARS: ASTM A36, EXCEPT WIDE -FLANGE 4 WT SECTIONS, WHICH SHALL BE ASTM A992. HOLLOW STRUCTURAL SECTION (HSS): ASTM A500, GRADE B. ANCHOR BOLTS, RODS, NUTS AND WASHERS: PER BASE PLATE SCHEDULE. HEADED STUDS: ASTM A108, GRADE 101E THROUGH 1020, COLD -FINISHED CARBON STEEL, AWS D1.1, TYPE B. BOLTED STRUCTURAL CONNECTIONS: UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, ALL BOLTS SHALL BE 3/4",P ASTM A325, TYPE N. BOLTS INDICATED LESS THAN 5/8"(P SHALL BE ASTM A30-1. WELDED CONNECTIONS: ELECTRODES - E10XX UNO (LOW HYDROGEN). FILLET WELDS SHALL BE 3/16" UNO. ee4 HIGH -STRENGTH FIELD -BOLTED CONNECTIONS SHALL BE INSTALLED, TIGHTENED, TESTED AND INSPECTED ACCORDING TO "SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL JOINTS USING ASTM A325 OR A49O BOLTS" BY THE RESEARCH COUNCIL ON STRUCTURAL CONNECTIONS (RCSC). ALL A325N BOLTS SHALL BE BROUGHT TO A "SNUG -TIGHT" CONDITION, AS DEFINED IN THE SPECIFICATION. SLIP -CRITICAL (SC) BOLTS MUST BE FULLY TENSIONED PER SPECIFICATION. ee5 THE SHEAR CONNECTIONS HAVE BEEN DESIGNED AND THE NECESSARY INFORMATION MAY BE FOUND IN THE SCHEDULES. THE DOUBLE ANGLE/DOUBLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS SHALL BE USED FOR ALL GIRDERS AND THE SINGLE ANGLE/SINGLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS SHALL BE USED FOR ALL BEAMS. THE ULTIMATE (i.e. FACTORED) REACTIONS HAVE BEEN PROVIDED AT EACH END OF EACH MEMBER SHOULD THE FABRICATOR WISH TO RE -ENGINEER THE CONNECTIONS TO THEIR PREFERENCES. SHOULD THE FABRICATOR WISH TO RE -ENGINEER THE CONNECTIONS, THEY MUST PROVIDE SUBMITTALS THAT HAVE BEEN PREPARED AND SIGNED AND SEALED BY A PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER LICENSED IN THE SAME STATE AS THE PROJECT LOCATION. 666 BRACE AND MAINTAIN ALL STEEL IN ALIGNMENT UNTIL OTHER PARTS OF CONSTRUCTION NECESSARY FOR PERMANENT SUPPORT ARE COMPLETED. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INSTALLING TEMPORARY SHORING AS REQUIRED FOR THE STABILITY OF THE STEEL FRAME UNTIL ALL STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS HAVE BEEN COMPLETED AND BUILDING IS ENCLOSED. SSl ALL WELDING SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF "THE STANDARD CODE FOR WELDING IN BUILDING CONSTRUCTION" OF THE AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY. SSS GROUT POP, COLUMN BASE PLATES AND PRESET BEARING PLATES SHALL BE NON -SHRINK, NON-METALLIC GROUT (5000 PSI MIN). SS9 SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS INDICATING ALL SHOP AND ERECTION DETAILS INCLUDING PROFILES, SIZES, SPACING AND LOCATIONS OF STRUCTURAL MEMBERS, CONNECTION ATTACHMENTS, FASTENERS, LOADS AND TOLERANCES. SS10 ALL STEEL EXPOSED TO WEATHER SHALL BE HOT DIP GALVANIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM A123 FOR MEMBERS AND ASTM A153 FOR CONNECTION ELEMENTS. SS11 STRUCTURAL STEEL SHALL RECEIVE A SHOP COAT OF PRIMER (COLOR AS DIRECTED BY ARCHITECT) WHERE EXPOSED TO VIEW. ALL OTHER AREAS, INCLUDING THOSE WHICH WILL RECEIVE SPRAY -ON FIRE PROTECTION, OR WHERE HEADED STUDS ARE TO BE WELDED, SHALL NOT BE PRIMED. 5S12 STEEL BEAMS SHALL BE CAMBERED AS INDICATED ON THE FRAMING PLAN(S). IF NO CAMBER IS SPECIFIED, THE FABRICATOR SHALL ENSURE THAT THE "NATURAL" CAMBER IN ALL ERECTED BEAMS OCCURS IN AN UPWARD DIRECTION. SS13 THE STRUCTURAL STEEL SHALL BE FABRICATED AND ERECTED IN FULL CONFORMANCE WITH THE "OSHA STEEL ERECTION STANDARD". IF THE CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS DEVIATE FROM THE OSHA STANDARD THEN THE FABRICATOR SHALL PROVIDE SUBMITTALS THAT CLEARLY INDICATE THE DEVIATION WITH A REVISION CLOUD AND REQUEST APPROVAL FROM BBM TO MAKE THE CHANGE SO THAT CONFORMANCE WITH THE OSHA STANDARD IS ASSURED. ELEVATION SYMBOL GRID ID NORTH NORTH ARROW Ai REVISION MARK � TYPICAL PLAN KEYNOTE SYMBOL SECTION CUTS NUMBER FOR SECTION LETTER FOR DETAIL s SHEET ON WHICH SECTION OR DETAIL OCCURS SECTION & DETAIL ID NUMBER FOR SECTION LETTER FOR DETAIL TITLE TYPICAL LINETYPES GRID LINE ---------------------------- EXISTING -- MATCH LINE -------- - ---------- HIDDEN —-- DASHED CONTINUOUS MATERIALS 8" CMU LOAD GROUT BRG WALLS (ON PLANS) PRECAST II 8 CMU NON- CONCRETE LOAD BRIG WALLS (ON STEEL PLANS) EARTH CONCRETE SHEET NuYeER SYMBOL LEGEND B-B-M - t, 0 0 r 0 STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS — (Orlando Boca Raton P:407.645.3423 O F:407.645.3790 1912 Boothe Circle Suite 100 a Longwood, FL 32750 bbmstructural.com EB5343 Bora Erbilen P_E #55996 ENGINEER HEREBY EXPRESSLY RESERVES HIS COMMON LAW COPYRIGHT AND OTHER PROPER71 RIGHTS IN THESE PLANS. THIS DESIGN AND DRAWINGS ARE NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, CHANGED, OR COPIED IN ANY FORM OR MANNER WHATSOEVER WITHOUT FIRST OBTAINING THE EXPRESSED WRITTEN PERMISSION AND CONSENT OF "BURTON BRASWELL MIDDLEBROOKS ASSOCIATES', NOR ARE THEY TO BE ASSIGNED TO ANY PARTY WIT40UT FIRST OBTAINING SAID WRITTEN PERMISSICN AND CONSENT. 14D ` r�A ® o o 0 C ci U w /+ �; o �o ^o �o - O %� d- o IS Q� _V aS =S, W >oE .� o doO O ct U oZ v 0 E E 0 >>a CL Neu— co =) T :E0 z �°,6I V .— >,O w -U)0-cn o rn 0 U) W 0 z J U ry U) J Of w Lij J ~ w �— w w co z W co m - w� Lj Ow O d m CD CD 0 U) E a U Q w W 0 z M 00 0 Ow 0 co r` w o Z N w m O t- w a a U File=F: \2007\07146\07146-TECH \07146_SDWGS\07146_Sdwgs\RETAIL B\07146_S002.dwg Tab=S002 Date/Time= Apr 07, 2008 - 1: 30pm Plot by feid SJ1 A CERTIFIED TESTING AGENCY SHALL BE ENGAGED TO PERFORM INDUSTRY STANDARD INSPECTIONS TO ENSURE CONFORMANCE WITH PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS (IF PROVIDED). SUBMIT REPORTS TO ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER. SJ2 ALL DESIGN, FABRICATION AND ERECTION OF STEEL JOISTS AND BRIDGING SHALL BE IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THE CURRENT SPECIFICATIONS OF STEEL JOIST INSTITUTE AND RECOMMENDED CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE. SJ3 THE ENDS OF ALL BRIDGING LINES TERMINATING AT WALLS OR BEAMS SHALL BE ANCHORED TO THE WALL OR BEAM. 5J4 ALL STEEL JOISTS ARE TO BE CAMBERED AS SPECIFIED BY STEEL JOIST INSTITUTE. SJ5 PROVIDE BOTTOM AND/OR TOP CHORD EXTENSIONS AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. SJ6 UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, MINIMUM JOIST BEARING SHALL BE 2 1/2" FOR K-SERIES JOISTS, 4" FOR LH, DLH AND SLH 15-18, AND 6" FOR SLH iS-25 ON A STEEL MEMBER OR EMBED PLATE. ail BRIDGING SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED TO MEET THE SIZE AND SPACING REQUIREMENTS OF THE SJI STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR OPEN WEB STEEL JOISTS. ALL BRIDGING AND BRIDGING ANCHORS SHALL BE COMPLETELY INSTALLED BEFORE CONSTRUCTION LOADS ARE PLACED ON THE JOISTS. SJS ALL HANGERS, CURBS AND/OR ROOFTOP FRAMES TO SUPPORT MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, ETC., TO BE SUPPORTED BY THE JOISTS SHALL BE LOCATED AT THE PANEL POINTS OF THE JOISTS. IF THE CONCENTRATED LOAD MUST BE LOCATED FURTHER THAN 6" FROM A PANEL POINT, PROVIDE JOIST STIFFENERS. L2x2x3/16 JOIST STIFFENERS MUST BE INSTALLED FROM LOAD TO OPPOSITE CHORD PANEL POINT BEFORE LOAD IS APPLIED. SEE DETAIL BELOW: CONCENTRATED LOAD ING ADD'L WEB ANGLE REQD Lz_�,._WHEN GREATER THAN 6" ADD'L WEB ANGLE FROM LOAD POINT CONCENTRATED TO OPPOSITE SUSPENDED PANEL POINT LOADING DETAIL AT CONCENTRATED LOADS SJ9 CONTRACTOR TO FURNISH BAR JOIST CERTIFICATIONS SIGNED AND SEALED BY AN ENGINEER REGISTERED IN THE SAME STATE AS THE PROJECT LOCATION. THE SPECIALTY ENGINEER FOR THE STEEL JOIST SUPPLIER SHALL ALSO CERTIFY THAT THE STEEL JOIST BOTTOM CHORDS WILL SAFELY RESIST THE WIND UPLIFTS, CONSIDERING THE SPACING OF BRIDGING. SJ10 PROVIDE UPLIFT BRIDGING PER TABULATED PRESSURES ON SHEET 5103 4 5104. SJ11 ALL ITEMS SUSPENDED FROM JOISTS (I.E. CATWALKS, BALCONIES, OPERABLE PARTITIONS, ETC.) SHALL BE INSTALLED AFTER DEAD LOAD HAS BEEN APPLIED. 5J12 BOLTED TIE JOISTS (BTJ) ARE USED IN STEEL FRAMES WHERE COLUMNS ARE NOT FRAMED IN AT LEAST TWO DIRECTIONS WITH STRUCTURAL STEEL MEMBERS. JOieT(5) AT COLUMN LINES SHALL BE FIELD BOLTED AT THE COLUMNS WITH TWO 1/2",P BOLTS TO PROVIDE LATERAL STABILITY DURING CONSTRUCTION. 5J13 STEEL JOISTS SHALL RECEIVE SHOP COAT OF PRIMER (COLOR AS DIRECTED BY ARCHITECT) WHERE EXPOSED TO VIEW. ALL OTHER AREAS, INCLUDING THOSE WHICH WILL RECEIVE SFRAY-ON FIRE PROTECTION, SHOULD NOT BE PRIMED. SJ14 ANY STEEL JOIST WITHIN A 4'-0" DISTANCE FROM A PARALLEL SUPPORT SHALL BE FABRICATED IN SUCH A WAY THAT CAMBER OF THE JOIST WILL NOT CAUSE A PROBLEM INSTALLING THE METAL DECK. 8J15 IN THE EVENT THAT FIRE SPRINKLERS ARE REQUIRED FOR THIS PROJECT, THE STEEL FABRICATOR SHALL PROVIDE A DIMENSIONED JOIST BRIDGING AND JOIST GIRDER BOTTOM CHORD BRACE FLAN ALONG WITH DETAILS TO THE SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR. THE FABRICATOR AND SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH EACH OTHER TO ENSURE THAT ANY CONFLICTS ARE RESOLVED BEFORE ANY FABRICATION BEGINS. SJ16 FABRICATOR SHALL ENSURE THAT ALL OSHA REQUIREMENTS ARE MET. PARTICULAR ATTENTION SHALL BE PAID TO THE ERECTION PROCESS, BOLTED CONNECTIONS MAY BE REQUIRED. SUBMIT DETAILS FOR APPROVAL. SJ1-1 THE JOIST MANUFACTURER MAY NOT INCREASE ALLOWABLE STRESSES. SJ18 THE OPEN WEB STEEL JOISTS SHALL BE FABRICATED AND ERECTED IN FULL CONFORMANCE WITH THE "OSHA STEEL ERECTION STANDARD". IF THE CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS DEVIATE FROM THE OSHA STANDARD THEN THE FABRICATOR SHALL PROVIDE SUBMITTALS THAT CLEARLY INDICATE THE DEVIATION WITH A REVISION CLOUD AND REQUEST APPROVAL FROM BBM TO MAKE THE CHANGE SO THAT CONFORMANCE WITH THE OSHA STANDARD IS ASSURED. 5J1e THE SUPPORTS FOR SCISSOR, ARCHED CHORDS OR ANY OTHER SIMILAR TYPE JOIST, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, SHALL BE DESIGNED WITH A PINNED CONNECTION AT ONE END AND A HORIZONTAL ROLLER AT THE OTHER END. THE SUFPORTING STRUCTURE, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, HAS NOT BEEN DESIGNED FOR ANY GRAVITY LOAD HORIZONTAL FORCE DUE TO DEFLECTION. DO NOT DESIGN THESE TYPE OF JOISTS WITH PINNED SUPPORTS EACH END. eTEEL JOI Te CONT' SJ20 ALL PIPES MUST BE SUPPORTED AS SHOWN BELOW: EQUAL EQUAL BEAM CLAMP (TYP) JOIST - SEE PLAN - ALL -THREAD ROD (TYF) 4"0 PIPE TRAPEZE � 10' -0" OC MAX HANGER RING (TYP) 5" OR 6114 PIPE 4"-P AND SMALLER PARALLEL TO PIPES MAY BE JOISTS REQUIRES SUPPORTED FROM TRAPEZE A SINGLE JOIST. PROVIDE HANGERS AT 10' -0" OC MAX - FOR PIPES PERPENDICULAR TO JOISTS - PROVIDE HANGERS AT EVERY JOIST FOR 5"4,AND 6",P PIPES, AND AT EVERY OTHER JOIST FOR 4"0 AND SMALLER PIPES NOTES: I. LOCATE HANGERS WITHIN 6" OF THE JOIST TOP CHORD PANEL POINTS. 2. PIPES LARGER THAN 6'I SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO ARCHITECT FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO FABRICATION OF JOISTS. INCLUDE LOCATION OF PIPE AND PREFERRED HANGING DETAIL IF OTHER THAN INDICATED ABOVE. JOISTS SHALL BE SPECIALLY DESIGNED BY THE FABRICATOR TO SUPPORT PIPES LARGER THAN 6". THE WEIGHT OF THE PIPES LARGER THAN 6" IS NOT INCLUDED IN THESE DOCUMENTS UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED OTHERWISE. COORDINATE WITH APPLICABLE TRADES. 3. DESIGN OF LATERAL BRACING FOR SUSPENDED FIFES IN SEISMIC AREAS SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO ARCHITECT FOR APPROVAL. 4.. FIFES SUSPENDED IN CONFORMANCE WITH THIS DETAIL WILL LIMIT THE PIPE SYSTEM WEIGHT TO 3.5 PSF EQUIVALENT DISTRIBUTED LOAD. TYPICAL PIPE HANGER DETAIL. L f GHTC AGE 1'lE TAL f=fRAM f NG LMF1 A CERTIFIED TESTING AGENCY SHALL BE ENGAGED TO PERFORM INDUSTRY STANDARD INSPECTIONS TO ENSURE CONFORMANCE WITH PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS (IF PROVIDED). SUBMIT REPORTS TO ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER. LMF2 LMF3 LMF4 LMF5 LMF6 CONNECT STEEL STUDS AND TRACKS TO A36 STEEL OR CONCRETE WITH (2) POWDER ACTUATED FASTENERS (FAF) AT EACH STUD, AND CONNECT STEEL STUDS AND TRACKS TO EACH OTHER WITH (2) #8-18 SCREWS AT EACH STUD (TYPICAL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE). SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LOCATION AND EXTENTS OF STEEL STUD WORK. NOTE: "POWDER ACTUATED FASTENER (FAF)" REFERS TO 0.1450 SHANK DOMED -HEAD, LOW -VELOCITY FOWDER ACTUATED FASTENERS AS MANUFACTURED BY POWERS RAWL OR APPROVED EQUAL WITH MINIMUM CAPACITIES AS FOLLOWS: CONCRETE: 1 1/2" FENETF ATION = 1850 PULLOUT $ 225# SHEAR IN A36 STEEL: 1/4" MATERIAL = 4300 PULLOUT 4 6600 SHEAR (PIN MUST FULLY PENETRATE THE MATERIAL BY 1/4" MINIMUM) STEEL STUDS SHALL MEET FOLLOWING DESIGN CRITERIA: GALV G-60 ASTM A525, MINIMUM YIELD STRESS SHALL BE 50000 PSI FOR 12ga, 14ga, 16ga AND 33000 PSI FOR 18ga 4 20ga. STUD SIZE EFFECTIVE MINIMUM I EFFECTIVE MINIMUM S 3 5/8"x16 GA .8549 .4388 3 5/8"x18 GA .6941 .3652 3 5/8"x20 GA .5354 .2608 4"x16 GA 1.0152 .502-1 4"x18 GA .8i22 .41-1i 411x20 GA 6rt22 .2589 6 "xl6 GA 2.8033 88i2 6 "x18 GA 2.26-15 1328 6 "x20 GA 1.1421 B234 8"x14 GA 6.9471 1.100-1 8"x16 GA 5.11 1.34-10 8"x18 GA 4.5454 1.1018 8"x20 GA 3.48i6 .(o684 NOTES: 1. NOT ALL SIZES MAY BE USED. SEE PLANS AND SECTIONS FOR SfZE(S) REQUIRED. (SIZES AND GAGES ON STRUCTURAL DWGS SHALL GOVERN OVER ARCHITECTURAL DWGS) 2. ALL SIZES SHALL HAVE 1-5/8" FLANGES. BRACING DURING CONSTRUCTION: PROVIDE 1 1/2" COLD -ROLLED CHANNELS OR HORIZONTAL STRAP BRACING FOR WALLS IMMEDIATELY AFTER STUDS ARE ERECTED. EXECUTION: POSITION STUDS VERTICALLY IN RUNNERS AND SPACE NO GREATER THAN 16". SECURELY ANCHOR EACH STUD TO RUNNER WITH (4) 08-18 LOW -PROFILE SCREWS, TWO AT TOP AND TWO AT BOTTOM, WITH ONE SCREW IN EACH FLANGE. TRACKS SHALL BE SECURELY ANCHORED TO THE SUPPORTING STRUCTURE AS SHOWN ON THE PLANS. AT TRACK BUTT JOINTS, ABUTTING PIECES OF TRACK SHALL BE SECURELY ANCHORED TO A COMMON STRUCTURAL ELEMENT, OR THEY SHALL BE BUTT -WELDED OR SPLICED TOGETHER. JACK STUDS OR CRIPPLES SHALL BE INSTALLED BELOW WINDOW SILLS, ABOVE WINDOW AND DOOR HEADS, AT FREE STANDING STAIR RAILS, AND ELSEWHERE TO FURNISH SUPPORT, AND SHALL BE SECURELY ATTACHED TO SUPPORTING MEMBERS. PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURE VERTICAL MOVEMENT SHALL BE PROVIDED WHERE INDICATED ON THE PLANS. 5PL ICES IN AXIALLY LOADED STUDS SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED. EXTERIOR SHEATHING: ATTACH GYPSUM SHEATHING TO EXTERIOR OF EACH STUD WITH 1" TYPE(5) 5-12 COATED SCREWS SPACED 3/8" FROM ENDS AND EDGES AND AT APPROXIMATELY 8" OC. LMF_1 LATERAL BRACING (HORIZONTAL BRIDGING) FOR WALLS: (NOTE: IF NON -LOAD -BEARING WALLS (PARTITION WALLS OR CURTAIN WALLS) HAVE SHEATHING ON BOTH SIDES, LATERAL BRACING IS NOT REQUIRED.) ENSURE BOTH STUD FLANGES ARE ATTACHED TO TOP AND BOTTOM RUNNER FLANGES. HORIZONTAL BRIDGING MUST BE INSTALLED AT SPACING NOT TO EXCEED 48" OC FOR AXIAL LOAD BEARING WALLS AND 6 0" OC MEASURED VERTICALLY FOR NON -LOAD -BEARING WALLS CARRYING WIND LOAD ONLY. (TYPICAL FOR ALL OPTIONS BELOW.) 16ga V-BAR BRIDGING ATTACHED TO BOTH FLANGES. SEE NOTES FOR SPAC ING. (1) *110 (TYP) TIV � MTL STUD - SEE PLAN HORIZONTAL BRIDGING - OPTION #1 5/8" TYPE S -12 LOW PROFILE HEAD SCREWS ID BRIDGING RUNNER) 1 1/2"-20 GAGE STRAP BRIDGING STUD HORIZONTAL BRIDGING CONSISTS OF CUT -TO -LENGTH RUNNER FOR SOLID BRIDGING AND STEEL STRAPS ON BOTH SIDES OF STUD. SOLID BRIDGING 15 PLACED AT EA END OF WALL, ADJACENT TO WALL OFENINGS AND 8'-0" OC MAX, MEASURED VERTICALLY. RUNNER HAS WEB FLANGE BENT AT EACH END AND IS SECURED TO EACH STUD FLANGE WITH ONE 5/8" TYPE 5-12 LOW PROFILE SCREW. STRAP BRIDGING OF 1 1/2" WIDE BY 20ga STEEL IS FASTENED TO EACH STUD FLANGE WITH ONE 5/8" TYPE 5-12 SCREW AND TO EACH RUNNER FLANGE WITH FOUR SCREWS. HORIZONTAL BRIDGING - OPTION #2 v 1 1/2" COLD ROLLED CHANNELS MAY BE USED IN LIEU OF ABOVE DETAIL TO BRACE STUDS LATERALLY. CHANNELS ARE INSERTED THROUGH STUD WEB HOLES AND SECURED WITH SCREW -ATTACHED 1 1/2 "x2 "x16ga CLIP ANGLES CUT TO LENGTH 1/4" LESS THAN STUD WIDTH. HORIZONTAL BRIDGING - OPTION #3 LMFB METAL STUD INSTALLATION: METAL STUDS SHALL EXTEND INTO ALL TRACKS UNTIL IT IS WITHIN 1/2" OF THE TRACK WEB. NO METAL STUD TRACK SHALL EXTEND PAST THE EDGE OF THE SUPPORT MORE THAN ONE THIRD OF ITS WIDTH ( s.g. A 6" TRACK MAY EXTEND BEYOND THE EDGE OF SUPPORT A MAX OF 6/3 =2 "). • �=Evd•► AAC AUTOCLAVED AERATED lb, * POUND(S) CONCRETE LG LONG AB ANCHOR BOLT LL LIVE LOAD ABV ABOVE LLBB LONG LEG BACK-TO-BACK A.C.I. AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE LLH LONG LEG HORIZONTAL ADDL ADDITIONAL LLV LONG LEG VERTICAL AFF ABOVE FINISH FLOOR LNTL LINTEL AGGR AGGREGATE LSL LONG SLOTTED A.I.S.C. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL LOG LOCATION CONSTRUCTION LONG LONGITUDINAL A.-5-I. AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL LP LOW POINT INSTITUTE LW LONG WAY AL ALUMINUM ALT ALTERNATE MAS MASONRY AR ANCHOR ROD MAX MAXIMUM ARCH ARCHITECT(URAL) MB MACHINE BOLT ASTM AMERICAN SOCIETY OF TESTING MBM METAL BUILDING MFR MATERIALS MC MOMENT CONNECTION A.W.S. AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY MCJ MASONRY CONTROL JT ME MONOLITHIC EDGE B/ BOTTOM OF MECH MECHANICAL BB BOND BEAM MEZZ MEZZANINE BLDG BUILDING MF MONOLITHIC FOOTING BLW BELOW MFR MANUFACTURE(ER) BM BEAM MIN MINIMUM BOT BOTTOM MIS( MISCELLANEOUS BP BASE PLATE MO MASONRY OPENING BRDG BRIDGING MS METAL STUD BRG BEARING MTL METAL BRK BRICK MWF MONOLITHIC WALL FOOTING BS BOTH SIDES BTJ BOLTED TIE JOIST NIC NOT IN CONTRACT BTWN BETWEEN NS NEAR SIDE NTS NOT TO SCALE C/C CENTER TO CENTER CANT CANTILEVER CA OVERALL CB CONCRETE BEAM OC ON CENTER CC CONCRETE COLUMN OD OUTSIDE DIAMETER CFS COLD -FORMED STEEL OF OUTSIDE FACE CIF CAST- IN -PLACE OH OPPOSITE HAND / OVERHEAD CJ CONSTRUCTION JOINT (OR OFNG OPENING CONTROL JOINT) OFF OPPOSITE 4-:, CL CENTERL INE CLR CLEARANCE) FAF POWDER -ACTUATED CM CONSTRUCTION MANAGER FASTENERS) CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT PB Pf AST BEAM COL COLUMN FEMB PRE-ENGINEERED METAL CON( CONCRETE BUILDING CONN CONNECTION PERF PERPENDICULAR CONT CONTINUOUS PC PRECAST CONTR CONTRACTOR iF_, PL PLATE COORD COORDINATE PLS PLACES CSK COUNTER SfNK PLF POUNDS PER LINEAR FOOT CTR CENTER PLYWD PLYWOOD CTRD CENTERED PNL PANEL CY CUBIC YARD PSF POUNDS PER SQUARE FOOT PSI POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH DBA DEFORMED BAR ANCHOR PTN PARTITION D IA DIAMETER D IAG DIAGONAL R RADIUS DL DEAD LOAD RC REINFORCED CONCRETE DN DOWN REF REFERENCE DTL DETAIL REINF REINFORCED) (ING) DWG DRAWING REQ REQUIRE DWL DOWEL REQ'D REQUIRED RF ROOF EA EACH RM ROOM EE EACH END RP RADIUS POINT EF EACH FACE RTN RETURN EJ EXPANSION JOINT RW RETAINING WALL ENG ENGINEER EOS EDGE OF SLAB SCH SCHEDULE EL ELEVATION SDI STEEL DECK INSTITUTE EQ EQUAL SECT SECTION Ea SF EQUAL SFACE(S) (ING) SF STEPPED FOOTING ES EACH SIDE SHT SHEET EW EACH WAY 51M SIMILAR EXF EXPANSION SJ SAWCUT JOINT EXT EXTERIOR SJI STEEL JOIST INSTITUTE SL SLOPE F/ FACE OF 5LB8 SHORT LEG BACK-TO-BACK FBC FLORIDA BUILDING CODE SOG SLAB ON GRADE FD FLOOR DRAIN SP SPACE(S) FDN FOUNDATION SPECS SFECfFICATIONB FF FINISHED FLOOR SQ SQUARE FIN FL F SS STAINLESS STEEL FLG FLOOR FLANGE SSL SHORT SLOTTED FMG FRAMING STD STANDARD FS FAR SIDE STfFFR STIFFENER FT FOOT FTG FOOTING STL STEEL ga GAUGE STR STRENGTH GALV GALVANIZED) STRL STRUCTURAL GB GRADE BEAM SW SHORT WAY / SHEAR WALL GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR SYMM SYMMETRICAL GFC GROUT FILLED CELL(5) / COURSE SYP SOUTHERN YELLOW PINE GLB GLU-LAM BEAM GR GRADE T45 TOP AND BOTTOM TB TIE BEAM HC HOLLOW -CORE TC TIE COLUMN HK HOOK TEMP TEMPERATURE HORIZ HORIZONTAL THK THICK HP HIGH POINT TOFG TOPPING HS HEADED STUD TRANS TRANSVERSE HSS HOLLOW STRUCTURAL SECTION TYP TYPICAL T/ TOP OF ID INSIDE DIAMETER UNO UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE IF INSIDE FACE INT INTERIOR VIF VERIFY IN FIELD VERT VERTICAL JST JOIST JT JOINT WD WOOD WF WALL FOOTING K KIP WO WINDOW OPENING (MASONRY) KO KNOCK -OUT WP WORKING-: POINT WS WATERSTOP WWF WELDED WIRE FABRIC W/ WITH B-B- E 0 m c 0 m STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS - Orlando Boca Raton G P:407.645.3423 F:407.645.3790 0 1912 Boothe Circe Suite 100 ii 0 Longwood, FL 32750 0 bbmstructural,com EB5343 Bora Erbilen P.E. #55996 ENGINEER HEREBY EXPRESSLY RESERVES HIS COMMON LAW COPYRIGHT AND OTHER PROPERTY RIGHTS IN THESE PLANS. THIS DESIGN AND DRAWINGS ARE NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, CHANGED, OR COPIED IN ANY FORM OR MANNER WHATSOEVER WITHOUT FIRST OBTAINING THE EXPRESSED WRITTEN PERMISSION AND CONSENT OF "BURTON BRASWELL MIDDLEBROOKS ASSOCIATES', NOR ARE THEY TO BE ASSIGNED TO ANY PARTY WITHOUT FIRST OBTAINING SAID WRITTEN PERMISSION AND CONSENT. a3 8 0 (3 C 0 Q 0 L_ CD (0 CD: 00 U_ J Y) . L U cM C J.O VJ LL E2 caLL :E z i 0') 0- a) W � LrM- -I'_J co W 0 0 E E 0 V >>o i co J NFL m::)`�o LU °6:EU z (�.- >, 0 �cn0-U) LU 0 WYN Z wM J M �LO "' 4t <w 0ic m 0 N 0 .cn E - LU v, W J w 0 Z O 00 O P LU LU N o Z U_ v M w v d 0 0 File=F: \2007\07146\07146_TECH\07146_SDWGS\07146-Sdwgs\RETAIL D\07146_S003.dwg Tab=S003 Date/Time= Apr 07, 2008 - 1: 30pm Plot by feid FOUNDATION FLAN NOTES: 1. FLOOR SLAB SHALL BE 4" THICK CONCRETE REINF WITH &x&-W1.4xW1.4 WWF OVER 10 MIL VAPOR BARRIER ON COMPACTED SUBGRADE. SEE "SLAB -ON -GRADE DETAILS" ON SHEET 6301 FOR PLACEMENT OF REINF. 2. T/ SLAB EL = ID' -ID" (TYP, UNO). REFERENCE ONLY - SEE CIVIL DWGS FOR ACTUAL ELEVATION. 3. T/ WALL FTG EL = - (1'-4') (TYP, UNO). 4. T/ COL FTG EL = - (1'-411) (TYP, UNO). 5. ALL CMU BEARING WALLS ARE B" (TYP, UNO). ro. STEP AND/OR LOWER FOUNDATIONS WHERE SHOWN AND AS NECESSARY TO AVOID INTERFERENCE WITH OTHER TRADES. SEE CONCRETE GENERAL NOTES FOR DETAILS AND SECTIONS. PARTICULAR ATTENTION SHALL BE PAID TO DOWNSPOUTS ENSURING THAT PROPER ACTIONS HAVE BEEN TAKEN TO PREVENT PfPES FROM CONFLICTING WITH THE FOUNDATION SYSTEM. -1. ALL FTGS ARE CENTERED BENEATH BEARING WALLS AND COLUMNS (TYP, UNO). S. REINF LOAD -BEARING CMU WALLS WITH Oro VERT BAR CENTERED IN GROUT -FILLED CELL AT ENDS, CORNERS AND AT MAX SPACING OF 32" CC. ADDITIONAL FILLED CELLS REQUIRED AT JAMBS ARE SHOWN THUS " ■ " ON EACH STRUCTURAL PLAN. SEE "ILLUSTRATIVE PLAN OF VARIOUS CMU WALL CONDITIONS" ON SHEET PCSIDID2 FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIRED FILLED CELLS AND OTHER INFORMATION. 9. TYP SPACING OF FILLED CELLS SHALL APPLY ABOVE AND BELOW OPENINGS ALSO. 10. SEE SHEETS eOO1, 6IDID2 AND 6IDID3 FOR STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES. 11. MAINTAIN STRUCTURAL SLAB THICKNESS AT ALL FLOOR SLOPES AND DEPRESSIONS. 12. SEE SHEET 6301 FOR COLUMN AND BEAM SCHEDULES. SCH-FTG (2000 PSF) FOUNDATMN SC IEDULE MARK SIZE (L x W x ®) REINFORCING REMARKS F3ID 3'-ID" x 3'-ID" x 1'-411 (3) *5 EA WAY, BOT PAD FOOTING F36 3'-(o" x 3'-(o" x 1'-411 (4) *5 EA WAY, BOT PAD FOOTING F-40 4'-ID" x 4'-ID" x 1'-0" (4) 05 EA WAY, BOT PAD FOOTING F4ro 4'-ro x 4'-roll x 1'-411 (5) 05 EA WAY, BOT PAD FOOTING Froro ro' 6 x ro'-roll x 1'-4" (1) *5 EA WAY, BOT PAD FOOTING WF2ID CONT x 2'-ID" x 1'-011 (2) 05 CONT 4 05 a 48" TRANS, BOT WALL FOOTING MEIO CONT x 1'-0" x 1'-4" (1) *`5 CONT, BOT MONOLITHIC EDGE ASSUMED NET ALLOWABLE SOIL BEARING PRESSURE o 2000 PSI= SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION HAS NOT BEEN PERFORMED AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT WAS NOT AVAILABLE FOR FOUNDATION DESIGN. PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION, THE OWNER SHALL RETAIN THE SERVICES OF A QUALIFIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER TO PERFORM SOIL TEST BORINGS, PROVIDE RECOMMENDATIONS FOR FOUNDATION DESIGN (INCLUDING NET ALLOWABLE SOIL BEARING PRESSURE), PROVIDE EARTHWORK COMPACTION CRITERIA, AND PERFORM SOIL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PERFORMING ALL EARTHWORK OPERATIONS IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THIS REPORT. IF THE FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS AND NET ALLOWABLE SOIL BEARING CAPACITY DIFFER FROM THE ASSUMED VALUE, THEN MODIFICATIONS TO THE DRAWINGS WILL BE REQUIRED. SHOULD THIS OCCUR, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL STOP CONSTRUCTION AND NOTIFY ARCH ITECT/ENG[NEER IMMEDIATELY. I MIJ B 13 5301 1 5301 nB1 4ID'—OII � FOUNDATION FLAN E'' NOTES: B K WF2ID B K I I II ca ID3S CORNER CENTERED N LAB (TYP WHERE OWN).WIDE I II I O 1� FOOTING B"r ROVIDE (1) I I I I ADDITIONAL BOTTOM �W BARS II SJ Ile I I NOTE TO GC: LOCATION OF MASONRY CONTROL JOINTS (MCJ) ,p m I I SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH ARCHITECTURAL BI SJ DRAWINGS AND SHALL NOT EXCEED REQUIREMENTS I OUTLINED IN NOTE MIIl ON SHT 5002. FOR ADDITIONAL FILLED CELLS REQUIRED AT MASONRY CONTROL JOINTS AND NOT SHOWN ON FOUNDATION 1 S301 PLANS, SEE "ILLUSTRATIVE PLAN OF VARIOUS CMU WALL CONDITIONS" ON SHT 5002. SUBMIT MCJ PLAN TO ARCHITECT FOR APPROVAL, 1 ,.n I. TC1 F40 SJ OR CJ TC1 I F4ID I BJ II II BJ II I SJ I e ' I_I I I I I rA 5301 I 1 S301 I I SJ I WF2 -� O 1 II TYP WF2ID 1 YS301 2 s3o1 WF2ID I f � 1 J L__ tclQ F4ID _I I— SJ OR GJ r3L' tCl F40 II TC1 I I 5301 I I � II I I I SJ I 0I m I III I N N N I �I N I NI I N N I I I III TC1 SJ I _ II I TC2 F4ID II SJ OR CJ C2 � Froro L rt C3 � � F6� SJ OR CJ --� I I C3 Fro% I I C3 Frofo II rt SJ OR CJ I F4ID I "')l,J 5301 TCI SJ s301 I I I FOUNDATION PLAN �— - 8 S301 j , it C4 F3ID I rT u SJ I �01 I I I® SCALE. 1/8•-1'_0• I C4 I - F3ID C4 F3ID I j I L -- --� 4 3O ----- - Cl Faro --- --- -- - C1 F3ro _ - - _ --- - ----- C1 F36 t- -- _ ---- - Cl Fat --- -- ------ CI 1 F3� ------ ------ Cl F3G -- -- ------ r �t Cl F36 ------ ------ CI Faro --- - -- - - ----� C1 F3ro -- I F - I B D - - - - - - r 1 ME1ID I- ME1ID ME1ID ME10 MEIO ME1ID ME1ID ME1ID 5 ME1ID ME1ID ME1rd e c C4 C4 F30 ' — F3ID II 1O1-011 V /� I-1ID.' 12'-3" 2O1—OII SL/ K/ /� 1U 20'—ID" 2O1-0" 1C/ SC/ 2IDI—OII 1C/ SL/ Al /� /� V®1 20'-0" 20'-0" SU S(J 201-011 K/ SC/ 20' SL/ O" SL/ 20' O" SC/ STRU P: F: "1' &1—OII of—oll `'i'SL./ AOI—//III SG/ "'f' �{OI—011 �{OI-011 SG/ `°t `'Y SL/ BA 1912 Bo Lon Bora B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4 B 5 B 6 B 7 B 8 B 9 B 10 B 11 B 12 B 13 C1 Cl ENGINEER HE COMMON LAW C RIGHTS IN TH RURAL ENGINEERS rlando Boca Raton 407.645.3423 407.645.3790 othe Circle Suite 100 gwood, FL 32750 bbmstmctural.com EB5343 Erbilen P.E. #55996 EXPRESSLY RESERVES HIS OPYRIGHT AND OTHER PROPERTY ESE PLANS THIS DESIGN AND z U x C7 K 0 0 U ^U U 41.IIi U � " 0 U O 0 rL V (u N ao c U�� L. V M C E��co �cLL Z N E zco J M I- (n v c 0 E E 0 U L_ . — cli NU)L-- m:D`Lu )o .c U z mod V - cn Q U) o WYN0- a 00 N M p -ci go O� �w E ¢0 0 U � c� oZ I ,E c� �a 3 w ryo U) Z Q 0- z LU J_ LO Ca p LO LU L0 w� Lq o a- m 0 0 .co cn EL U Q LL J ui OZ rn 00 ~ ch O �Uj co f` LU LLJ o z N m O I'_C) LLI 0- o v File=F: \2007\07146\07146_TECH\07146_SDWGS\07146_Sdwgs\RETAIL B\07146_S101.dwg Tab=S101 Date/Time= Apr 07, 2008 — 1: 31 pm Plot by feid 7-- F_ r�ro B-14 t-�+ro U15B-16 DRAWINGS ARE NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, CHANGED, OR COPIED IN ANY FORM OR MANNER WHATSOEVER WITHOUT FIRST 09TAINING THE EXPRESSED WRITTEN PERMISSION AND CONSENT OF "BURTON BRASWELL MIDDLES ROOKS ASSOCIATES", OR ARE THEY TO BE ASSIGNED TO ANY PART' WITHOUT FIRST OBTAINING SAID WRITTEN PERMISSION AND CONSENT. B-F ROOF FS,41„1ENC; FLAN NOTES: 1. RIGID INSULATION ROOFING ON 1 1/2'' 22ga, TYPE "B" GALV G60 METAL DECK SECURED WITH 5/a"O PUDDLE WELDS AT SUPPORTS AND 0110 TEK SCREWS AT SIDELAPS ON OPEN WEB BAR JOISTS AND/OR STRUCTURAL STEEL MEMBERS. PROVIDE A 36/i PATTERN AT SUPPORTS W/ SPACING AT EXTREME SIDES OF 12" CC. (4) SCREWS PER SPAN SHALL BE PROVIDED AT SIDELAPS. AIR -DRIVEN PINS B"I' PNEUTEK MAY BE SUBSTITUTED ONE -FOR -ONE FOR 5/a"O WELDS. THE MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE SHALL INSPECT THE INSTALLATION AND PROVIDE A LETTER OF ACCEPTANCE FOR THE COMPLETE ROOF DIAPHRAGM. 2. SEE STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES FOR BRIDGING REaUIREMENTS FOR OPEN -WEB STEEL JOISTS. 3. JOISTS DESIGNATED "KCS" (K-SERIES CONSTANT SHEAR PER "VULCRAFT" TABLES) SHALL BE UTILIZED (IF REO'D) AT CONCENTRATED LOADS (SEE FRAMING PLAN). 4. SEE FRAMING PLAN FOR JOIST BEARING ELEVATIONS. 5. REF ARCH DWGS FOR INTERIOR DRAINS, SCUPPERS, CRICKETS AND SCUTTLES. 6. "BTJ" INDICATES BOLTED TIE JOIST PER OSHA REQUIREMENTS (T`f=)_ SEE GENERAL NOTE SJ12 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 1. COORDINATE SIZE AND LOCATION OF ROOFTOP UNITS WITH MECHANICAL DUGS. ASCE 7=02 WALL DESIGN WIN® PRESSURES AND SUCTIONS FOR MEAN ROOF HEIGHT :s 60 It WIND PRESSURE AND SUCTION (PSF) EFFECTIVE VALUE DENOTES PRESSURE `H WIND AREA VALE DENOTES SUCTION (SQ GREET) (-) 233 (-) 36.1 20 C+) 25.a (+) 25.8 (-) 20.0 C-) 33.1 50 (+) 24.2 (+) 24.2 (-) 26.4 (-) 30.5 100 (+) 22.9 (+) 22.e (-) 25.3 (-) 2a.0 F�00F FLAN <E'' NOTES: 10 W14x22 W/ Cax11.5 T45. 1 (B/ STEEL EL= 3'-2'L). 20 RIGID INSULATION ROOFING ON 1 1/2" 20ga, TYPE "B" GALV G60 METAL DECK SECURED WITH 5/8",P PUDDLE WELDS AT SUPPORTS AND 010 TEK SCREWS AT SIDELAPS ON OPEN WEB BAR JOISTS AND/OR STRUCTURAL STEEL MEMBERS. PROVIDE A 311 PATTERN AT SUPPORTS W/ SPACING AT EXTREME SIDES OF 12" OC. (4) SCREWS PER SPAN SHALL BE PROVIDED AT SIDELAPS. M PROVIDE 4 1/2" DEEP JOIST SEAT. M M1 ®I O 10 I 2 1 o� 1 o I 1 2 �o I I I I I I P LAN VI EW NOTES: (ROOF) 1. a = 4 Ft. 2. A (Kd) OF 0.85 HAS BEEN USED IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THESE VALUES. THE USE OF THESE VALUES SHALL ONLY BE APPLIED WHEN USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH LOAD COMBINATIONS SPECIFIED IN SECTIONS 2.3 4 2.4 OF ASCE 1-02. 3. PRESSURES AND SUCTIONS ON SOFFITS SHALL BE THE SAME AS CORRESPONDING WALL ZONES 4 4 5. 4. DEAD LOAD OF 10 PSF SHALL BE USED TO CONVERT GROSS UPLIFT TO NET UPLIFT FOR OPEN -WEB JOIST DESIGN. BUILDING B ASCE 7-02 GROSS UPLIFT DESIGN PRESSURES FOR MONOSLOPE ROOFS WITH ROOF SLOPE 00-c 0 2s 30 (MRH 2s 50') (0 -- ROOF SLOPE) GROSS UPLIFT EFFECTIVE PRESSURE (PSG=) WIND AREA (SQ FEET) O O O 10 (-) 210 (-) 4E.3 (-) 68.2 20 (-) 211 (-) 40.4 (-) 56.4 50 (-) 25.4 (-) 34.1 (-) 41.0 100 (-) 24.1 (-) 29.3 1(-) 29.3 LATERAL DESIGN CRITERIA WIND VELOCITY: 110 IMPORTANCE FACTOR: 1.0 EXPOSURE CATEGORY": C INTERNAL PRESSURE ±0,10 COEFFICIENT: (ENCLOSED) MEAN ROOF HEIGHT: R00F DESIGN LOADS (LIVE DEAD ROAD LOAD 20 PSF 20 PSF (UNREDUCIBLE) NOTES: 1. SEE PLAN FOR CONCENTRATED LOADS. IN STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS Orlando Baca Raton P:407.645.3423 F:407.645.3790 1912 Boothe Circle Suite 100 Longwood, FL 32750 bbmstructuraLcom EB5343 Bora ErbNen P.E. #55996 ENGINEER HEREBY EXPRESSLY RESERVES HIS COMMON LAW COPYRIGHT AND OTHER PROPERTY RIGHTS IN THESE PLANS. THIS DESIGN AND DRAWINGS ARE NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, CHANGED, OR COPIED IN ANY FORM OR MANNER WHATSOEVER WITHOUT FIRST OBTAINING THE EXPRESSED WRITTEN PERMISSION' AND CONSENT OF "BURTON BRASWELL MIDDLETROOKS ASSOCIATES", NOR ARE THEY TO BE ASSIGNED TO ANY PART' WITHOUT FIRST OBTAINING SAID WRITTEN PERMISSION AND CONSENT. a U 0 C E m 2 O 0 U U Q� 0 Q 0 rL V v00 c 03 .�Ucy)c: /71 U J O VJ LLI LL E2 caLL Q N �Lc,4Ea�i LL' J �M�__Cn U 0 E E 0 U L _ co Q� J N�U� 0 °6 s U `>, O W - cn Q_ cn o mYNca a W NW I..L� � 1 V J Z Lr..Ln� V z_ �QN U_ W 0 0 F- F- I- w w U) Qcs::) Z W co J_ O) m p L0 W Uk W O a- m ti p LI E .n cE, a`> d w J W O Z rn co iI M W LIJ N o Z � U.I v LZL- U CD ILL! Q File=F: \2007\07146\07146-TECH \07146-SDWGS\07146-Sdwgs\RETAIL B\07146_S102.dwg T Tab=S101 Date/Time= Apr 07, 2008 - 1: 31 pm Plot by feid NOTE: SEE 5002 FOR TYP FILLED CELL DTLS 5" OR 12" CMU WALL, GLAZING 4 WINDOW S (1) 05 CONT, EXTEND 5" INTO JAMB EA 511✓ FILL SOLID W/ CONC FTG = CMU FOR REINF SEE FDN ,I 11VINDOW SILL PLAN EJ, TYP I I SLAB OR GRADE WWF, SEE PLAN TYP REF: ARCH DWGS II 1 5301 FIN FLR EL d SEE FDN PLAN NOTES I II T/ FTG EL z p SEE FDN d PLAN W RE INF, SEE FDN 91- SCH TYP TYP SEE FDN SCH TYP SECTION @ EXT WALL I I I CMU BEYOND SLOPE, REF: ARCH (IF REQUIRED) I I REF CIVIL I I D WGS I I I el cp 5" OR 12'' CMU FILL \\\\\\\ W/ CONC TYP l� d W 2 ° SEE FDN SCH 10 TYP 2 5301 SECTION @ CMU OPNG (MASONRY WALLS BEAM SCHEDULE NOMINAL REINFORCING STIRRUPS MARK TYPE SIZE COMMENTS (W"xD") SOT MID TOR SIZE SPACING 551 1 Sx5 -- (2) *5 -- -- -- BB2 2 5xl& (2) *5 -- (2) #5 -- -- CBI ro 5X1ro (2) *5 -- (2) #5 #3 roll OC TBl 6 Px12 (MIN (2) *5 -- (2) 05 #3 45" CC, P51 3 axe (2) 05 - - - - - - - - MIN 1900 PLF CAP. FOR SPAN UP TO ro' -O" (NOTE 1) d e 1 2 3 4 ��/�75 ro BEAD( TYPES NOTES: I. MIN PB CAPACITY FOR THE INDICATED SPAN MUST BE VERIFIED BY THE PRECAST MFR AND DOCUMENTATION PROVIDED IN THE SUBMITTALS. 2 "BB" = BOND BEAM (COMPOSED OF KNOCK -OUT BLOCK) 3 "PB" = PRE -CAST BEAM (COMPOSED OF PRE -CAST U-LINTEL AT BOTTOM AND KNOCK -OUT BLOCK AT TOP, ALL GROUTED SOLID TO FORM INTEGRAL BEAM) 4. 75" = TIE BEAM (FORMED AND POURED) 5. "CB" = CONCRETE BEAM (FORMED, SHORED AND POURED) roll MIN BEARING FILLED CELL REINF FILL CELL SOLID 4—TYP SHALL APPLY TO THE W/ GROUT AREA ABOVE AND BELOW THE OPENINGS ALSO ,e I SEE BEAM SCHEDULE .----- --- FOR SIZE 4 REINF IF LINTEL IS PRE-CAJAMB A ST, A NEATLY SAWCUT BOTTOM OUT TO ALLOW VERTICAL JAMS RE INF TO PASS j UNINTERRUPTED (IF SLOT COORD SILL IS NOT ALREADY DETAILS W/ MASONRY OPNG - I PROVIDED BY MFR) ARCH DWGS REF ARCH DWGS FOR I ° ♦ l+ SIZE AND LOCATION A l a (2) 05 I I VERT WALL REINF I I I (CENTER BARS IN CELLS) SI LL SEE FDN PLAN NOTES B (IF READ) U I (L.MIN _j II II K! ------------- ADD HORIZ JOINT REINF ABOVE 4 BELOW OPENINGS. --u SEE MASONRY GENERAL NOTES FOR ADD'L INFO. SLAB, CONCRETE BEAM, II I II FOUNDATION, OR WALL PRECAST BEAM ELEVATION LAP TOP BARS AT MID -SPAN (IF NECESSARY) BOTTOM SEE NOTE 2 J< COLUMN CLEAR 'a J, COLUMN L CLEAR (TC) V SPAN (CC) SPAN NOTES: I. PLACEMENT OF REINF TO BE PER ACI 315. 2. FOR BOTTOM BARS PROVIDE A CLASS "A" TENSION LAP CENTERED OVER SUPPORT OR TERMINATE BARS AS CONDITION WARRANTS. 3. SEE COLUMN SCHEDULES AND DETAILS FOR SIZE AND REINFORCING. CONCRETE BEAM ELEVATION — MASONRY WALL BEAM SCHEDULE m 5" OR 12" CMU WALL, r SEE PLAN FOR REINF I COLUMN BLOCK -OUT EJ, ES I II PROVIDE BITUMINOUS COATING TO ENTIRE �i BASE OF COL WHERE FIN FLR SEE ENCASED IN CONCRETE FDN PLAN I NOTES EXP JT — SEE FDN PLAN NOTES " LL +— ° W = L° W U •° d • SEE FDN SCH TYP 31 SECTION @ INT CMU. WALL 7 5301 9 5301 10 5301 r± r— r- I — 311 CLR (TYP)- S301, TE NEATLY SAWCUT END OF EVERY OTHER COURSE TO ALLOW CELL TO FILL W/ CONCRETE • NOTES- 1. TIE COLUMNS (TC'S) SHALL SECTION A -A EXTEND R OI NNEXT FLOOR LEV°EL,H SEE SCH 2. PROVIDE REVEAL (COORD SIZE FOR SIZE AND SHAPE W/ ARCH) AT ALL EXPOSED CONDITIONS. DO NOT ALLOW TIE COLUMN CONCRETE PASTE TO PASS BEYOND THE A s A REVEAL. d ° TIE COL (SEE SCH FOR SIZE 4 REINF) EXTEND HORIZ JOINT ° ,e REINF roll INTO COL 45 BAR DIA LAP SPLICE FOR TIE COLS. SEE GENERAL NOTES FOR MASONRY LAP SPLICES ° DOWELS W/ STD HOOK d ea d TO MATCH VERT RE INF DETAIL — TIE COLUMN SEE PLAN STL COL - SEE FDN PLAN 5TL COL, SEE FDN PLAN BASE fit`' AND ANCHOR BOLTS - SEE 5CH BASE E AND ANCHOR I I BOLTS -SEE SCH � i PROVIDE CONCRETE ENCASEMENT AROUND COL PROVIDE BITUMINOUS COATING TO ENTIRE I I EJ (TYP) BASE OF COL WHERE I I WWF -SEE FDN 1 1/2" NON -SHRINK ENCASED IN CONCRETE I I PLAN NOTES GROUT, TYP FIN FLR EL I I FIN FLR EL SEE FDN 8 I- -I • - - SEE FDN PLAN NOTES SEE FDN /I // SEE FDN /\ 1 1/2 NON -SHRINK ° � ° � ` \\ ° \ PLAN NOTES GROUT, TYP ° I/ice PLAN NOTES T/ FTG EL T/ FTG EL SEE FDN PLAN Q SEE FDN PLAN ° EXTEND VAPOR a 4�j EXTEND VAPOR =� BARRIER ON TOP OF 2 BARRIER ON TOP OF FTG TO PREVENT SLAB U ° FTG TO PREVENT SLAB FROM BONDING TO FTG FROM BONDING TO FTG 3" CLR (TYP) SEE FDN SCH (TYP) SECTION INT HSS(`5�SECTION O HSS COL COL FTG 511 10 11/201 CLR TC;I (4) #ro VERT 4 #3TIES aS"CC, 5" TC2 (6) #6 VERT 4 *3 TIES as"CC �S301 FTG SEE ARCH DWGS FOR FINISH 7 I 3" MIN ALL AROUND I PEDESTAL: RE INF W/ 05 EACH CORNER 4 I MAX 6" CC, 4 #3 TIES ia 4" CC; (1) TIE IN FTG Q s wu 4 or 8 TIE COLUMN TYPES saol FOR C1, C2 4 C3 p = PLATE WASHERS C4 C5 _<Luz (SEE SCH FOR SIZE) T/ CONC Z LU `" e (3) HEX NUTS p O4 PER ROD LU a _ Z a HEAVY HEX NUT, TYP - - W 1 a4 TACK 2d 2d cn a° OR PEEN 01 IIA II B/ CONC BASE PLATE DETAIL ANCHOR ROD DETAIL NOT TO SCALE NOT TO SCALE COLUMN AND BASE PLATE SCHEDULE SEE "X-BRACE" DETAILS SEE PLAN 4 SCHEDULE - I M&WIS �j STEEL BM, SEE PLAN _STL COL - SEE FDN PLAN T BASE i AND ANCHOR BOLTS - SEE SCH 1 1/2" NON -SHRINK GROUT I T/ PEDESTAL = FIN FLR EL = 0'-0'1 211 T/ FTG EL SEE FDN PLAN 3" CLR (TYP) SEE FDN SCH (TYP) SECTION @ EXTERIOR. HSS COL FTG E COLUMN BASE PLATE SCHEDULE MARK SIZE BASE PLATE SIZE (INCHES) ANCHOR ROD (INCHES) COMMENTS A B T E (NOTE 2) Cl HSS &x&x5/I& 12 12 3/4 10 3/4 C2 HSS IoxI'oxl/4 12 12 3/4 10 3/4 C3 HSS 5x5xl/4 11 11 3/4 10 3/4 C4 He 5x5x3/lr'o 11 11 3/4 10 3/4 C5 HSS 4x4x3/1(o 10 10 3/4 N/A N/A PROVIDE (4) 3/4"41 A325N BOLTS AT BASE NOTES: 1. ANCHOR RODS SHALL BE ABTM F1554 (GRADE 3(0) UNO, THREADED EACH END WITH NUT AT BOTTOM, TACK -WELDED SECURE. PLATE WASHER AT BOTTOM NUT IS NOT REQ'D. CONFORM TO CHART AT RIGHT FOR EMBEDMENT UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE IN SCHEDULE ABOVE. 2. MAX EMBEDMENT "E" = (FTG THICKNESS) - 5". 3. PLATE WASHERS SHALL HAVE HOLE WITH DIAMETER I ROD MIN MIN MATERIAL EMBEDDED EMBEDDED LENGTH EDGE (NOTE 1) "Ell DISTANCE ASTM FI554 12d 56 > 4" (GRADE 3ro) EQUAL TO ROD DIAMETER + 1/1r'o . CIRCULAR OR SQUARE WASHERS ARE ACCEPTABLE. 4. IT SHALL BE ACCEPTABLE TO PROVIDE A HEAVY HEX HEAD BOLT iN LIEU OF THE THREADED ROD W17H HEAVY HEX NUT AT BOTTOM. OVERSIZE HOLES AND PLATE WASHERS FOR BASE PLATE$ ROD DIAMETER HOLE DIAMETER PLATE WASHER ROD DIAMETER DOLE DIAMETER PLATE WASHER 3/4" 1 5/lro" 1/4"x2 1 1/2" 2 5/16" 1/2"x3 1/2" I/5" 1 13/1ro 11 5 /16 "x2 1/2" 1 3/4" 2 3/4" 5/V x4 III1 13/1ro 11 3/8 x3 211 3 1/4 3/4 x51l 1 1/4" 2 1/lro" 1/2"x3" 2 1/2" 3 3/4" 1/5"x5 1/2" FACE OF WALL, TOOLED JOINT SHALL BE COL OR PANEL MADE WITH A "DEEP AND 1/2" PRE -MOLDED THIN GROOVER" BY EGOLDBLATT (PART XP JOINT FELLER m #5435'306211) OR EQUAL d 4 "SOFF-CUT" SAWCUT JOINT 1/5"xl" DEEP 1 1/2" TOOLED JOINT (TJ) EXPANSION JOINT (EJ) ° (NOTE: AT EXTERIOR LOCATIONS ONLY) NOTES: 1, CUT SLAB AS SOON AS AGGREGATE DOES NOT DISLODGE AND BEFORE CONCRETE Z CZ B. STARTS TO COOL. WAITING PERIOD WILL / `� a ° Q Z TYPICALLY VARY FROM 1 HOUR IN HOT DISCONTINUE B . B.M Z WEATHER TO 4 HOURS IN COLD WEATHER. REINF AT JOINT ^� •� `°' ° 1 � � p- 2. PLACE REINFORCING 1 1/2" CLEAR. lx2 KEY 2 \� SEE FDN SCH 3. NAND -TOOL JOINT TO FACE OF WALL WHERE SAWCUT DOES NOT REACH. � ° a a ° SEE DN SC FOR REINF SAWCUT JOINT (SJ) NOTE: « STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS 1. SIZE AND REINF VARIES. SEE CONSTRUCTION JOINT Orlando Boca Raton P: 407.645.3423 FOUNDATION SCHEDULE. F:407.645.3790 MONOLITHIC EDGE (ME) (ci), KEYED 19'Z Longwood, Longwood, FL 32750 com EB5343 Bora Erbilen P.E. #55996 rA SLAB —ON —GRADE DETAILS(FOOT TRAFFIC ENGINEER HEREBY EXPRESSLY RESERVES HIS COMMON LAW COPYRIGHT AND OTHER PROPERTY RIGHTS IN THESE PLANS. THIS DESIGN AND DRAWINGS ARE NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, CHANGED, O OR COPIED IN ANY FORM 0R MANNER WHATSOEVER WITHOUT FIRST OBTAINING THE EXPRESSED WRITTEN PERMISSION AND CONSENT OF "BURTON BRASWELL 5301 MIDDLEBROOKS ASSOCIATES", NOR ARE THEY TO BE ASSIGNED TO ANY PART' WITHOUT FIRST OBTAINING SAID WRITTEN PERMISSION AND CONSENT. E m z 0 CD o0 U N O O � � U � 4 7=1.0 W>o E +' U o "C� I ar_0 n<=> 3 a� 3 v V O Q O r0 V 00 U Ch � Q��J 0 � 2i c� c� E� Z �m rn > w 9 cMfMo�/� `o uJ U O E E O U L _ c') CL�rn 5 J IN 4- m`no iE 06 .L U z AO U - to Q. En U-io WYNa- U) _J Q w 0 fn Z Q W z O U Uj W z _O Q M z w J OI-__ L.LW Lu J L0 m d) LID W� �w Qa m 0 (V C O .E E CD Q w W b z M coo o Lu U c uJ z a 0 U File= _TECH 07146-SDWCS 07146_SdWgs wg Tab=S301 Date Time= Apr 07, 2008 - 1: 31 pm Plot by fe — -- I -' - -- -- - - __T I -- I BOLTED TIE JST TYP 6 COL L INES 3/4" CAP PLATE - REF 3/16 p� Ip- 2 1/2 TYP -3/411 T/ STL EL 4 JOIST BRG EL SEE FMG PLAN I, I; I (2) 3/411 P A325 SEE NOTE BELOW ®; I I 61 y BOLTS. - - I MIN 3/0" fiE STL BM - SEE FMG PLAN I I JOIST JOIST 1/\TYP 4 I UPL IFT BRIDGING 311 1/4 V 3" I I 1/4 TYP PER S.J.I. NO WELD I JST GIRDER - SEE (ANCHORED AT ENDS) NOTE: FMG PLAN STABILIZER fiE 3/5x4x0'--1" (DO STABILIZER i� STABILIZER e 3/ax4x0'-_1" (DO NOT WELD TO SOT CHORD), NOT WELD TO SOT CHORD), 3/4X6X0'-6" PROVIDE 13/16 "41 HOLE FOR PROVIDE 1311,1 HOLE FOR (DO NOT WELD TO GUYING/PLUMBING CABLES STABILIZER 1E GUYING/PLUMBING CABLES BOTTOM CHORD) 3/411x6xfd'-6 11 CAP iE 3/4" x (GIRDER SEAT WIDTH (DO NOT WELD TO OR COLUMN SIZE (WHICHEVER IS BOTTOM CHORD) GREATER) + 1") x (COL SIZE + 6 ") KJ SECTION @ BEAM & K2SECTION @ JST GIRDER, 5302 GIRDER TO COLU M N 5302 TO HSS COLUMN 6 5302 T/ BEAM EL SEE FMG PLAN (T/ EMBED fiE = T/ BEAM) 1/2" RETURN AT TOP, 1/4 FULL RETURN AT SOT SINGLE L3 1/2x3x3/a WITH HORIZ SHORT SLOTS. SEE SCH FOR LENGTH "L" AND NUMBER OF BOLTS (3" CC). FINGER -TIGHTEN THEN PEEN THREADS. FACE OF WALL, COL OR BEAM TYPICAL FL 1'-21I 211 loll II lTll Nk cv SLL// (4) 3/411Ox4" LONG HS W I I r„ I- _ ll Jl lL Jl __ I I I I Ea HSS 3x3xE-)Ill '-3 1/2" SHEAR LUG EMBED PLATE DETAIL (WIO AND DEEPER) TYP 1/4 11_rnll II (4) 3/4"Ox4" LONG HS WI , _ 51 - :4- EQ EQ SS 3x3x5/I&xo'-3 1/2" SHEAR LUG EMBED PLATE DETAIL (W16 AND SHALLOWER) OOR OR ROOF BEAM TO CONCRETE. CONNECTION (SINGLE SHEAR 3/10 2 MTL DECK - SEE 1/2" FMG PLAN NOTES UPL IFT 5RIDGING ALL POINTS OF CONTACT AFTER DEAD 3/16 LOAD IS APPLIED 8 SECTIO S302 rl 3' �S302 File=F: 720077 JST 5RG EL SEE FMG PLAN J�JST GIRDER - SEE FMG PLAN �L24x3/16 11 MIN SOT CHORD BRACING TO BE SPECIFIED AND SUPPLIED BY JOIST GIRDER MFR IN ACCORDANCE W/ SJI REQUIREMENTS N Q JOIST BRG NOTES: 1. DIM = GIRDER SEAT DEPTH PLUS 5" 2. DIM = GIRDER DEPTH MINUS GIRDER SEAT T/ WALL EL DEPTH MINUS 6 ". SEE ROOF FMG PLAN •- -• EXTEND CMU VERT WALL REINF 3ro "4 REF 11 5302 INTO TIE COL (2) 3/4"0 A325 BOLTS IN LSL MIN 4" HOLES "FINGER TIGHTEN" T/ TIE COL THEN PEEN THREADS JST BRG EL SEE ROOF - FMG PLAN W W LLI cD O 1/4 Z- 4-fiEMK"All W10x313x6" LONG pI. iE 3/4x6 xo' -6 " z e W !.0 iE MK 11511 _ GIRDER - SEE ROOF FMG PLAN SEE TIE COL DTL FOR RE INF NO WELD 1/4 3 1 SECTION @ GIRDER BRIG T/ WALL EL REF ARCH (Q r- 14 EP JST BRG EL REF ARCH W z mcn 8" CMU WALL - SEE FDN PLAN FOR RE INF 9 S302 TYP K-SERIES 3/16 V 2 JST TO EMBED /-CONT L5x3xl/4 (LLH) 3/l ro 2 _MTL DECK - SEE FMG ,{ PLAN NOTES STEEL CHANNELS 4M TTOM 3 SECTION ---a.... BUILT-UP SHAPE TO HSS COLUMN CONN SHEAR CONNECTMN SCHEDULE NUMBER OF EMBED PLATE MAX ULTIMATE EN® BEAM SIZE 3/4w DIA ANGLE REACTION (KIPS) (SEE ELAN) A325N LENGTH wLw HEIGHT THICKNESS 3000 PS11 4000 PsI BOLTS wMw wT. W5, W10 2 5 1/2" loll ll 1/211 23.4 313 W12 3 01/2" 1411 1/211 29.4 39.2 W14, W16 4 11 1/211 16" 5/8" 32.1 42.0 W18 5 14 1/211 ig" 5/8" 50.0 11 W21 6 1-I 1/2" 2111 3/41, 53.E i1.4 =4 -1 201/2" 24'' 3/411 53.5 11.4 W21 8 23 1/2" 2111 3/41' 53.5 "11.4 W30 g 26 1/2" 30'' 3/411 53.E -11.4 NOTES: I. FOR BEAMS NOT SHOWN HEREIN, FABRICATOR SHALL DESIGN THE SHEAR CONNECTION BASED ON THE REACTION SHOWN ON THE PLAN. 2. PLATE AND ANGLE MATERIAL SHALL BE ASTM 436. 3. BEAM MATERIAL SHALL SE 50 KSI. 4. FABRICATOR SHALL CHECK BEAM WEB TEAR -OUT (BLOCK SHEAR) IF BEAM IS COPED. 5. PROVIDE WASHER OVER SLOTTED HOLES. 6. INSTALL BOLTS FINGER -TIGHT THEN PEEN THREADS. UPL IFT SRDG EMBED iE 5/16x3 1/2x0'-8" WITH x 1'-4" LONG D5A'S 4" CC, SECTION rcb JOIST BRG 1011 21f /_ H 01 11 I I 51 /41 1 I I N 3/4" HS PLATE MK "A" NTS all 11/21 5" 1/2II I I 411 1/2 M ^ I I 1/211 Hey PLATE MK "B" NTS 1 5302 A' 5302 3/16 ��TYP - �MTL DECK SEE P IG PLAN NOTES 0 I -1 ca W Q a UPL IFT �u I + BRDG la STL JOIST, SEE EMBED E3/8x-1 1/2x1'-411 FMG PLAN WITH (4) 1/2"Ox511 LONG HS I a" CMU WALL - SEE FDN PLAN FOR REINF 0� SECTION @ DOUBLE JOIST BRG J� �vvr`l..i JC W/ MFR I I OPEN i AT DUCTS ONLY 11 I AL A I 1 I ------------------- I -- FIST 46 REQ'D DUE ro UNIT SIZE - 4X4X5/16 PLAN , NOTES: 1. VERIFY ALL DIMe 4 DETAILS W/ MECH CONTR BEFORE FA5RICAT ION. 2. A/C UNIT TOTAL WEIGHT -SEE PLAN FOR WEIGHT AND FRAME SCHEDULE FOR ANGLE FRAME SIZE. 3. PROVIDE L3x3xl/4 FRAME AT ALL OPNGS GREATER THAN 12" ON ANY SIDE. 4. THE ANGLE FRAME SHALL BE PROVIDED SO THAT THE ENTIRE PERIMETER OF THE RTU CUR5 15 SUPPORTED. SEE SCHEDULE FOR DEPTH OF TB TS RE INF SEE SCH, TYP -� l 4 5302 7 5302 TYP VERTICAL WALL REINF W/STD NOOK TOP RAKED TIE BM DETAIL, NOTE: COL CAP lE MAY NOT BE REQUIRED. COLS MAY EXTEND UPWARD. COL I CAP PLATE T/ STL EL SEE FMG PLAN cv II lie II III II IIe SHEAR 1E 1 STL 5M - SEE SEE SCH -/ I �L FMG PLAN I I HSS COL - SEE I I FDN PLAN 5� 5302 NOTE: VERT FILLED CELL REINF NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY TYP STEP IN BOND BM S NGLE-PLATE SMEAR CONNECTM SCHEDULE ULE (SHOP -WELDED, FIELD -BOLTED) BEAM SIZE NUMBER OF 3/4" PLATE PLATE FILLET WELD CAPACITY (KIPS) (SEE PLAN) DIA A325N LENGTH -Lw THICKNESS SIZE BOLTS (INCFIESI (36 KSI) (E70%x) ASD LRFD W8, W10 2 5 1/2 5/16 1/4 20.4 30.6 W12, W14 3 8 1/2 5/16 1/4 31.8 41-1 Wl6 4 111/2 5/16 1/4 42.4 63.6 W18 5 141/2 5/16 1/4 53.0 _1g.5 W21 6 1-11/2 5/16 1/4 63.6 95.4 W24 1 201/2 5/16 1/4 12.4 111-0 W2-1 8 23 1/2 5/16 1/4 841 121_0 W30 9 26 1/2 5I 1/4 94.8 142.0 1 1/GII II Ellro \l O S: NOTES: L FOR BEAMS NOT SHOWN HERE IN, THE SEE SCH FABRICATOR SHALL DESIGN THE SHEAR - I FOR NUMBER CONNECTION EASED ON THE REACTION 1 I I OF BOLTS SHOWN ON THE PLAN. _ 1 I (3" OG) 2 PROVIDE HORIZ SLOTS IN SHEAR PLATE. 3. BEAMS SHALL BE 50 K61. SEE SCH 4. PROVIDE HARDENED WASHER OVER SLOTTED HOLES. 5HEAR FLATE DETAIL 5. BOLTS SHALL 5E INSTALLED "SNUG -TIGHT". W BEAMS TYPICAL BEAM TO HSS COL CONNECTION. BRIDGING SCHEMATIC T/ WALL EL SEE FMG PLAN CONT L4x3xl/4 (LLV) W/ 5/0"(0 CaL - EPDXY BOLTS 's 32" 0C IN GROUT FILLED CELLS WELDED X-5RDG FOR 2nd AND 3rd SAYS ONLY wz ::S_ A- / I - ca ca ALL PTS OF g" CMU WALL - SEE FDN PLAN FOR RE INF 11 � S302 1/5 CONTACT HORIZ SRDG SHALL 5E CONTINUOUS L3x3x1/4x(J8T DEPTH) W/ (1) 3/4"41 EXP BOLTS, COPE (1) LEG AROUND DECK 5RG ANGLE AT TOP AND WELD AS SHOWN SECTION Ca BRIDGING --------i I ROOF TOP A/C UNIT I 3/a`0 LAG 5OLT5 4" FROM - - - - - - - I EACH CORNER 4 MAX 24" 0C (MIN 3 PER SIDE) TYP ALL 4 SIDES ROOFING ARCH ROOF TOP------- - A/C CURB (MIN 18ga) ------- ------- (2) POWDER ACTUATED STL JOIST FASTNERS T 4B STIFFENER L 18ga x 2" STRAP 24" (REF: SECT 5-5) CC, (3 MIN PER SIDE) TYP ALL 4 SIDES A/C SUPPORT FRAME SECTION A -A (A/C; CUR5 CONNECTION) 11,11111 11115TI-mmm • • • • NO �00 • •M&Affill NTS MTL DECK, SEE ROOF FMG PLAN NOTES T/ BB DOWN 1" FROM T/ JST EL - CONT L6x4x1/4 (LLV) WITH 1/21141 EXP BOLTS 'a 24" CC, a" CMU WALL, SEE FDN PLAN NOTES FOR REINF �74 :1:2 SECTION Ccb DECK BRIG S302 1. FOR HOLES WITH A MAXIMUM DIMENSION OF 6" TO 12", REINF DECK OPENING WITH A 20 GA GALV FLAT PLATE 12" LARGER IN SIZE THAN THE OPENING AND ATTACH WITH ill WELDS AT EACH RIS ALL AROUND. �o0, 0 PUDDLE WELD AT EA LOW CORRUGATION MAKX. IN L o ,J WHERE WIDTH EXCEEDS 12" - PROVIDE L3x3xl/4 AT EDGE OF OPENINGS AS SHOWN 2. FOR HOLES WITH A MAX DIMENSION OF 12" TO 2'-6", SEE DETAIL ABOVE. METAL DECK OPENING5 W B-B-M STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS Orlando Boca Raton P:407 645.3423 F:407.645.3790 1912 Boothe Circle Suite 100 Longwood, FL 32750 bbmstructural.com EB5343 Bora Erbilen P.E- #55996 ENGINEER HEREBY EXPRESSLY RESERVES HIS COMMON LAW COPYRIGHT AND OTHER PROPERTY RIGHTS IN THESE PLANS. THIS DESIGN AND DRAWINGS ARE NOT TO 9E REPRODUCED, CHANGED, CR CCPIED IN ANY FORM OR MANNER WHATSOEVER WITHOJT FIRST OBTAINING THE EXPRESSED WRITTEN PERMISSION AND CONSENT OF "BURTON BRASWELL MIDDLESROOKS ASSOCIATES', NOR ARE THEY TO BE ASSIGNED TO ANY PARTY WITHOUT FIRST OBTAINING SAID WRITTEN PERMISSION AND CONSENT. 0 C)Eli ddU � N N U -d • to �/ Iv :ZI W E >o o 0 w rJ U � (71 v U C O Q. 0 V (o c 00 U_10j� L U Cy C /f 1 O W coJ m m ILL!� Q z wLa� > Z m co JCr p i I- vJ O E O U L >.G co Q� S J Nr LL-c m��'0 z 0 -LU 0 m Y ►V a 0- CUB Q w z Q U) Z o_ 0 LLJ Cn w 0 J O L W W 0 N 0 E LIJ N Q W W zm 00 O 0 W LLI W N CDzU m ILL! U_ d U _TECH 07146_SD WGS 707146_Sdwgs 146_S302.dwq Tab=S302 Date Time= Apr 07, 2008 - 1:31pm Plot by fei PRE -ENGINEERED METAL TRUSS - 12 I 18 23/32" A.P.A. RAT D, EXPOSURE "1" TYI=E PLYWOOD SHEAT ING CONN TO TRUSSES W/ #10 TEK SCREWS EVE, YWHERE. 12 roll iBGA METAL 5 TRACK CONN TO EroID TRUSSES WITH (3) TYP 1/lro ;g' #lID TEK SCREWS EVERY TRUSS. 5/ TRUSS REF ARCH PT I (1) 010 TEK SCREWS ON EACH SIDE CTYP) JST 5RG EL SEE PLAN (4) 4110 TEK SCREWS s + EA. MS TO MS CONN (T'T'P THROUGHOUT + + THIS PROJECT). / "-18GA M5 24" OC C TYP I GAL ) + +i + +I CONT L 3X3X18GA TYP + 4- T/ STOREFRONT + + REF ARCH .WAAAto] S303 T/ PARAPET FMG REF ARCH 2 REF 5303 i + + + + I + + + + Y4" PER 1'-0" SLOPE GLAZING BY OTHERS B/TRUSS REF ARCH REF 5303 + ++ 5 O SOFFIT I ++ I i + +I +� I+ +I REF ARCH STL BEAM, SEE PLAN 04W CONT L 3X3X18GA TYP WT2Bx8 5ETWEEN JOIST SEAT 1/0 2 ea UPLIFT BRDG STL 5EAM, SEE PLAN KCS STL -L2X2X3/16 6 EVERY JOIST JOIST, SEE PLAN -L3X3X1roGA CLIP CONN TO STEEL W/ (2) 0.145"4, P.A.F. -SEE ARCH. DWGS FOR ADDITIONAL FRAMING TO PROVIDE NECESSARY FIRE RATING. STL BEAM 4 CHANNEL SEE PLAN STOREFRONT 5Y OTHERS roll-1r®GA MS e 24" OC PRE -ENG INEERED METAL TRUSS ON VERTICAL SURFACES PROVIDE 15/3211 A.P.A. RATED EXP05URE "1" TYPE PLYWOOD SHEATHING CONN TO TRUSSES W/ 418 TEK SCREWS 6 ro" OC EVERY WHERE. -------------- �� / SEE ROOF FRAMING NOTE #1 ON 5103 FOR \\ SIDELAP FASTENER \ REQUIREMENTS TYP \\ / (2)'010 TEK SCREWS EACH SIDE. \\ / / CONT METAL TRACK CONN TO \ TYP H65 W/ (2) 0.145"0 P.A.F. 'a 24" CC. I 3/lro I I I I-- j3/16 2�12 j I I \\\ CONT HSS 4X2X3/1ro CONT L2x2x3/1roxGONT % EA DE \ / \\ CONT L4x4xl/4 \ COPE VERT LEG / NECESSARY---�% ----------AS METAL DECK, SEE FMG PLAN REF / SEE ROOF FRAMING NOTE #1 ON 5103 FOR \\ / SIDELAP FASTENER \ j REQUIREMENTS TYP \\ / (2) 010 TEK SCREWS EACH SIDE. \\ + + + + SEE ARCH. j CONT METAL TRACK CONN TO \� I + + I I + + DWGS FOR P TYP 3/lro I HS5 W/ C2) ID.145"� P.A.F. 24" OC. I ADDITIONAL P FRAMING TO I I + + PROVIDE I 3/lro 21 12 I NECESSARY I P FIRE RATING.1 P 1H,1 + + + \ / T/ STOREFRONT + + I + \\ CONT HSS 4X2X3/1ro —CONT L2x2x3/1iI)NT j REF ARCH \e EA SIDE STL BEAM 4 \\ CONT L4x4x1/4 STOREFRONT 5Y ®TREKS CHANNEL SEE COPE VERT LEG / PLAN �� AS NECESSARY T/ PARAPET FRAMING REF ARCH + + + + + + + + 10 GA fiE CONN MS TO TRUSS AT TOP 4 BOTTOM, AND AT ALL INTERMEDIATE BREAK LOCATIONS. r GLAZING 5Y OTHERS REF 1 5303 ro'I-10 GA MS 6 24" CC. PROVIDE MS AT SAME LOCATION AS TRUSSES.-- 5/ TRUSS REF ARCH JST 5RG EL SEE PLAN Y4" PER 1'-0" SLOPE ++++ REF 1 � 3 JOIST 5 AT BETWEEN + + i+ + I + + + + + METAL STUD MID -SPAN REF + +I I+ I + I II + +I I+ I + + +i + T/ STOREFRONT + + I + REF ARCH STOREFRONT i 5Y OTHERS 0'_2� SECTION FRONT CANOPY S303 ro" 18GA METAL TRACK CONN TO TRUSSES WITH (3) 010 TEK SCREWS 6 EVERY TRUSS. - T/50ND BM %SEE PLAN (1) *10 TEK SCREWS ON EACH SIDE CTYP) 23/32" A.P.A. RATED, EXPOSURE "1" TYPE PLYWOOD SHEATHING CONN TO TRUSSES W/ #iID TEK SCREWS EVERYWHERE. I 12 5 1/S l/ 2 os8 - PRE-ENGINEERED METAL TRU55 METAL DECK, SEE FMG PLAN UPL IFT 5RDG REF 1 .5303 5TL SEAM, SEE PLAN STL JOIST 1 SEE PLAN REF 5303 -------- ---------------- SEE ARCH. / SEE ROOF FRAMING DWGS FOR % NOTE 01 ON 5103 FOR \\ ADDITIONAL SIDELAP FASTENER \ FRAMING TO / REQUIREMENTS TYP \\ PROVIDE (2) #10 TEK SCREWS EACH SIDE. \ NECESSARY / \ FIRE RATING. / CONT METAL TRACK CONN TO \ / TYP HSS W/ (2) 0.145"0 P-A-F- s 24" CC. I � I 3/1ro I REF 5303 1 1 I 3/lro 2�12 II / 1 / -STL BEAM 4 \\\ CONT HSS 4X2X3/iro \—CONT L2x2x3/1II)NT % CHANNEL SEE \ EA SIDE / PLAN \\ CONT L4x4xl/4 �\ COPE VERT LEG AS NECESSARY ------------------------------- PRE -ENGINEERED METAL TRU55 12 REF 1 5303 METAL DECK, SEE FMG PLAN SIDE INTO 3 5/8" la �— 552, SEE FMG 10GA TRACK. D IT ONAL A® PLAN ST E PLAN (4) 1*10 TEK SCREWS 6 + EA. MS TO MS CONN (TYP THROUGHOUT I THIS PROJECT). roll-1SGA Ms i / (Z) 010 TEK SCREWS EACH SIDE. \\ ' e 24 OC i (TYPICAL) CONT METAL TRACK \I ° -1 / tYP ' CONN TO HS5 W/ (2) I I 3/1ro 0.145"4, P.A.F. e 24" CC. CONT L 3X3X18GA TYP W cn i /A + + l m l i rk T/ STOREFRONT U I I REF ARCH I TRUCTURAL ENGINEERS (2) ROWS OF 3/1ro "OXI 3/4" \ \ PRECAST SEAM CP5) CONT L2x2x3/1II)Nt i : 407 o Boca Raton / P:4o7.645.34z3 tAPCONS 24" OC \ 3/lro 2�S SECTION 4A/5303 \ EA SIDE / F:407.645.3790 / STOREFRONT SEE SCHEDULE \ CONT HSs 4X2X3/lro 1912 Boothe Circle Suite 100 / Longwood, FL32750 5Y OTHERS e TYP 2 108 / bbmstructuraLcom \\ EB5343 Bora Erbilen P.E. #55996 SECTI SIDE \ Y ENGINEER HEREBY EXPRESSLY RESERVES HIS / COMMON RE COPYRIGHT AND OTHER PROPERTY / DRA 91 GSSA N THESE NOT TOPLANS. REPRODUCS GIN ANDGED, / OR COPIED IN ANY FORM OR MANNER WHATSOEVER ®-----------------------------� WITHOUT FIRST OBTAINING THE EXPRESSED WRITTEN PERMISSION AND CONSENT OF "BURTON BRASWELL MI DDLEBROOKS ASSOCIATES', NOR ARE THEY TO BE ASSIGNED TO ANY PARTY WITHOUT FIRST OBTAINING SAID WRITTEN PERMISSION AND CONSENT, N A� VJ � O A 5 �9 y 00 00 w U '-" b c� w a0 E o d® O � 3 V 0 CL V m c a_o UJ� S_ co cMM C (D co co m a z a) 0') z U U) c 0 E E 0 V L J N u- c Cn M D O 0s_rzv >, o U) Q. LU o mYN11 a z 0 U w CJ, Z 0 1� UL. WNN w 0 J f � _ V S j) w w ® v z LIJ co LO w Pt � w OL m 0 C 0 cn E E a) a w 2 Q w J w O z m o Lu o 0 LU v Q U_ m O r 0 U �O3 File=F: 2007 07146 707146_TECH 07146_SDWGS 07146_Sdwgs RETAIL B 07146_S303.dwq Tab=S303 Date Time= Apr 07, 2008 — 1:31pm Plot by feid a-.-•pi MV=jWAJQ-'-UdI1I O STL BN 34'-2" CONT L 3X3X3/16 W1 18GA CLIP L AT EA. STUD 4 (4) *10 TEK SCREWS AS SNOt - ;SA MS 24" OC JST BRG E1_ SEE PLAN 3 5/81' -18GA MS 6 24" CC (4)'MO TEK SCREWS 6 EA. MS TO MS CONN (TYP THROUGHOUT THIS PROJECT). 1' 5304 5 , 3 5/8"-18GA ++ + + + + ++ +++ + � + +++ TRACK e TO BOTTOM, (T ' 18GA P CON METAL DECK, SEE FMG PLAN ° AT TOP B AT ALL INTE BREAK LOC ++ ++ ++ I I STL BEAM, I I STL BEAM, I I I I + + + + + + + + + + + I I SEE PLAN I I SEE PLAN I I\-STL BEAM, I I + + + I I'I I I I I I'I I I I I I I I I I SEE PLAN I I'I I I I'I I I I'I I I I I I I HSS STUB I'I I I ++ I I I I Iii I I I I i°I I I I I I I I I I I I I COL, SEE PLAN I I+++ I I++ II I I roI' -18GA MS ++ 2411 CC + I i I I 3 5/8°-18GA ' I I I I �2411OC I I I I I I HSS COL BEYOND, SEE PLAN I i I I I I i C I METAL DECK, SEE RIG PLAN H55 COL BEYOND, SEE PLAN I I' I I I I I I ('2) *110 TEK SCREWS � 24" OC I I ( I 1 I I++ ++ j AREF 5303 I++ +\ � SL DN i— NA UPL IFT UPL IFT J ' /L BRDG BRDCc ++ STL BEAM, I I I I I 8'' SEE PLAN I I I I I L2X2X3/16 � V6TL EVERY JOIST SEE I I I I I I + II++ ++ -----------I I--- -- [CEILING ----------- F I------ I ++ STL BEAM, SEE PLAN EF ARCH R REF ARCH I I L--- ----� I i I+ +I + + CONT L 3X3X18GA TYP STOREFRONT BY OTHERS -_' L SECTION FRONT 3/1ro V 2 UPLIFT BRIDGING ALL POINTS OF CONTACT AFTER DEAD 3/l� LOAD IS APPLIED 0 MTL DECK - SEE FMG PLAN NOTES SEE PIG PLAN STL SEAM - SEE FRAMING PLAN L2x2x3/16" BOT FLANGE BRACING a EACH JOIST (ALTERNATE SIDES) P4 YP) -IS 0 'LIFT RDG JOIST PLAN Ur'• —.—.— CONT L 3� 18GA CLIP STUD 4 (4) SCREWS A, 0 0 0 SECTION � FRONT CANOPY 18GA iE CONN MS TO MS AT TOP 4 BOTTOM, AND AT ALL INTERMEDIATE BREAK LOCATIONS. METAL DECK, SEE 1=1 G PLAN STL JOIST SEE PLAN B--M STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS Orlando Boca Raton r:407.645.3423 F:407.645^3790 1912 Boothe Circe Suite 100 Longwood, FL 32750 bbmstructuraLcom EB5343 Bora Erbiler P.E. #55996 ENGINEER HEREBY EXPRESSLY RESERVES HIS COMMON LAW COPYRIGHT AND OTHER PROPERTY RIGHTS IN THESE PLANS. THIS DESIGN AND DRAWINGS ARE NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, CHANGED, OR CCPIED IN ANY FORM OR MANNER WHATSOEVER WITHOUT FIRST OBTAINING THE EXPRESSED WRITTEN PERMISSION AND CONSENT OF "BURTON BRASWELL MIDDLEBROOKS ASSOCIATES NOR ARE THEY TO BE ASSIGNED TO ANY PARTY WITHOUT FIRST OBTAINING SAID WRITTEN PERMISSION AND CONSENT. E m m Z E N� 0 U CA es- a M J® o ®� U w b a • o o Qo O ��l Li. U dl U V con03 �� Q ,✓ ci �:r 0 O CL CTOO CO c U J CO �L U M C /11 z J O W u- co u. Q 0 a) • i E F-- LLI N M I— CO U cn O E E O U L >>o i co 1�1� c o LU 06 .E U O U En Q fn o mYONa. d FIR Cn Z O V Uj U) z O Of LL- 00-0 w OJ F- f- I A LU V � w U) w Co J O) m m i+ ft� L0 wLj < W O a CO f` CV C O .O O E O a w y Q w J w O Z m M o co I`- w Uj O Z cv 'r U- m O H Q?' W ® d 0 U S304 E e=F: 2007 07146 07146_TECH 07146_SDWGS 07146_Sdwgs RETAIL B 07146_S304.dwg Tab=S304 Date Time= Apr 07, 2008 — 1:31pm Plot by fei PARTITION OF ROCKWOOL PIPE INSULATION THROUGH PENETRATION (INSU- LATED PIPE ONLY) PIPE INSULATION (WHERE REQUIRED) PIPE SLEEVE FIRESTOP MATERIAL (GONG. OR JTL MASONRY WALL ONLY ELEVATION - WALL PENETRATION 1 Firestopping Of Penetrations Through Walls No Scale WATER MOTOR GONG, APPROX.10'ABOVE FINISHED GRADE MAIN RISER ALARM PRESS. SWITCH - RETARDING CHAMBER FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION GRAPHIC SIGN - FDC APPROX. 3 FT. ABOVE FINISHED GRADE TERMINATE 2" MAIN DRAIN AT EXTERIOR WALL WITH 45° GALVANIZED ELBOW AND PIPE APPROX. 24" ABOVE FIN. GRADE 1" THICK 24"x24" CONC. SPLASH BLOCK ---\ TO SYSTEM CHECK VALVE GROOVED COUPLING WATER PRESSURE GAUGES ALARM CHECK VALVE WITH TRIM 2" MAIN DRAIN CONTROL VALVE WITH TAMPER SWITCH, LOCK AND CHAIN n 1'-0" FINISHED GRADE 2 Fire Protection Alarm Check Valve Detail No Scale 3/4" BALL DRIP FLANGED CONN. TO UNDERGROUND FIRE PROTECTION WATER SUPPLY FINISHED FLOOR REAR LEFT RIGHT 1 Fire Protection Floor Plan NScale 1/8"=1'-0" FRONT RETURN BEND FOR DRY OR PREACTION SYSTEM EXTERIOR BUILDING WALL BRANCH LINE 1" VALVE NOT OVER T-0" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR. ! WET SYSTEM 1" SIGHT GLASS FINISHED FLOOR 1"BALL VALVE -r FINISHEDGRADE/ROOF I 31nspector's Test Detail No Scale DRY OR PREACTION SYSTEMS TEMPORARY CONN. PLUG VALVE END WHEN NOT IN USE CAULKING SEALANT SMOOTH BORE, CORROSION RESISTANT OUTLET GIVING FLOW EQUIVALENT TO ONE SPRINKLER. 1"-45° ELBOW 24" 1" THICK 24"x24" CONC. SPLASH BLOCK FLORIDA ADMINISTRATIVE CODE CHAPTER 61G15-32 NOTES 1. THE FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM SCOPE OF WORK SHALL INCLUDE THE PREPARATION AND DESIGN OF THE FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM LAYOUT DOCUMENTS (WORKING PLANS). PROVIDE ALL EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, COMPONENTS, ASSEMBLIES AND SUPPORT SYSTEMS REQUIRED, AS DESCRIBED, IN NFPA 13. THE FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTOR SHALL CONDUCT A HYDRANT FLOW TEST AND PERFORM HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS FOR THE DESIGN OF THE FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM. 2, THE FIRE PROTECTION DESIGN, CALCULATIONS, INSTALLATION AND THE ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF THE FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 13, 2004 EDITION; NFPA 24, 2002 EDITION; THE FLORIDA BUILDING CODE AND THE FLORIDA FIRE PREVENTION CODE 2004 EDITION AND ALL LOCAL CODES REQUIRED BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. 3. AREA OCCUPANCIES AND HAZARD CLASSIFICATIONS ARE LISTED IN THE DESIGN CRITERIA NOTE LOCATED ON THIS SHEET. 4. ALL SYSTEM CONTROL VALVES SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH TAMPER SWITCHES AND INTERFACE WITH THE FACP ON THE SUPERVISORY CIRCUIT, ALL FLOW SWITCHES SHALL INTERFACE WITH THE FACP ON THE ALARM CIRCUIT. 5. THE FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE AND PROVIDE SIGNED AND SEALED FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM LAYOUT DOCUMENTS WITH HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS AND SHALL BE THE ENGINEER OF RECORD. SIGNED AND SEALED FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM LAYOUT DOCUMENTS WITH HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER AND THE LOCAL AHJ FOR ACCEPTANCE PRIOR TO PERMITTING. 6. ALL FIRE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENTS SHALL BE LISTED AND TESTED FOR FIRE PROTECTION USE. ALL FIRE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENTS SHALL BE THE U.L. LISTED AND FM APPROVED. 7. THE POINT OF SERVICE AND THE WATER SUPPLY CHARACTERISTIC'S FOR THE FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM IS SHOWN ON THE CIVIL SITE PLAN, 8. THE WATER SUPPLY FOR THE FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM HAS NOT SHOWN ANY EVIDENCE OF MICROBIAL INDUCED CORROSION (MIC). THE FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OF ANY EVIDENCE OF MIC AND PROVIDE NECESSARY WATER TREATMENT AS NEED TO REDUCE OR ELIMINATE MIC. 9. ALL METERING AND BACK FLOW PRVENTION DEVICES SHALL MEET WITH ALL WATER PURVEYORS REQUIREMENTS. GENERAL NOTES 1. THE FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS SHALL COMPLY WITH NFPA 13 - 2004 EDITION, THE FLORIDA FIRE PREVENTION CODE AND ALL LOCAL CODES AND REQUIREMENTS. 2. FINAL SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE AND APPROVAL SHALL BE CONDUCTED BY STATE FIRE MARSHAL AND ARCHITECTIENGINEER. 3. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE SYSTEM LAYOUT DRAWINGS PER CHAPTER 14, OF NFPA 13 - 2004 EDITION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PERFORM HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS. CONTRACTOR'S SPRINKLER SYSTEM LAYOUT (SHOP DRAWINGS), HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS AND MATERIAL DATA SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER AND AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO SYSTEM INSTALLATION. 4. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PERFORM HYDRANT -FLOW TEST TO VERIFY WATER PRESSURE REQUIRED FOR HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS. 5. THE FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS SHOWN REPRESENT THE DESIGN INTENT OF THE ENGINEER OF RECORD, IN ACCORDANCE WITH STATE REGULATION 61G15-32. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE INSTALLATION WITH ALL OTHER TRADES. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE COMPLETE SPRINKLER SYSTEM LAYOUT DRAWINGS WITH ANY ADDITIONAL OFFSETS, SPRINKLERS OR SYSTEM COMPONENTS AS REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE AND OPERABLE SYSTEM AND TO AVOID CONFLICTS WITH OTHER TRADES. 6. SEE ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLANS FOR CEILING TYPES, HEIGHTS AND ALL ASSOCIATED DATA. 7. PROVIDE FIRE STOP ASSEMBLIES FOR ALL PENETRATIONS OF SMOKE/FIRE WALLS, CEILINGS AND FLOORS, FIRE STOP ASSEMBLIES SHALL MEET ASTM E-814. SEE FIRE RATED PIPE PENETRATION DETAILS. 8. ALL DRAIN AND DRY PIPE SYSTEM PIPING AND FITTINGS SHALL BE GALVANIZED BOTH INSIDE AND OUTSIDE. 9. INSTALL ADDITIONAL SPRINKLERS UNDER ALL EXPOSED DUCTWORK OR OBSTRUCTIONS EXCEEDING 48" IN WIDTH. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL SPRINKLERS AS REQUIRED FOR PROPER COVERAGE OF OBSTRUCTIONS IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 13. 10. ALL SPRINKLERS INSTALLED WITHIN MECHANICAL ROOMS, STORAGE ROOMS, JANITORS CLOSETS OR AREAS SUBJECT TO MECHANICAL INJURY SHALL BE PROTECTED WITH LISTED GUARDS. 11. COORDINATE PIPE ROUTING WITH DUCT ROUTING, EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS, ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND BUILDING STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. DO NOT ROUTE PIPING OVER ELECTRICAL PANELS. PIPING ROUTED OVER ELECTRICAL PANELS SHALL BE REROUTED AT NO ADDITIONAL COST. 12. PROVIDE TAMPER SWITCHES ON ALL CONTROL VALVES. 13. SLOPE ALL PIPING TO THE SYSTEM MAIN DRAIN AS REQUIRED TO INSURE PROPER DRAINAGE. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO INSURE THAT ALL PIPING IS DRAINABLE. ADDITIONAL DRAINS AND PLUGS SHALL BE INSTALLED WHERE REQUIRED TO COMPLY WITH THE ABOVE REFERENCED CODES. 14. ALL ROLL GROOVED AND CUT GROOVED COUPLINGS AND FITTINGS SHALL BE PROVIDED BYA SINGLE MANUFACTURER. 15. SPRINKLERS SHALL BE CENTERED IN CEILING TILES IN AREAS WITH LAY -IN TILES AND VISUALLY ALIGNED IN AREAS WITH SMOOTH CEILINGS. 16. THIS BUILDINGS STRUCTURAL SYSTEM HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO SUPPORT THE ADDITIONAL WEIGHT ASSOCIATED WITH THE SPRINKLER SYSTEM. 17. PIPING IN AREAS WITH EXPOSED STRUCTURE SHALL BE INSTALLED AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE TO ALLOW THE OWNER MAXIMUM USE OF THE SPACE. 18. SPRINKLERS IN AREAS WITH EXPOSED STRUCTURE (OBSTRUCTED CONSTRUCTION) SHALL BE INSTALLED WITH DEFLECTOR 1" BELOW THE BOTTOM OF THE BEAM (MAXIMUM 22" BELOW ROOF DECK). EXPOSED BAR JOISTS THAT HAVE SPRAY -ON FIRE PROOFING THAT MAKES THE JOIST SOLID SHALL BE TREATED LIKE A BEAM WITH THE SPRINKLERS 1" BELOW THE BOTTOM OF THE FIRE PROOFING. 19. SLEEVE AND/OR FIRESTOP ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH RATED WALLS, CEILINGS, AND FLOORS WITH U/L LISTED ASSEMBLIES. FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES SHALL BE EQUAL OR EXCEED THE RATING OF THE WALL, CEILING OR FLOOR. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR FINAL FINISHES. 20. PROVIDE ACCESS PANELS TO ALL VALVES ABOVE NON -ACCESSIBLE CEILINGS AND CHASES. DRAWING CRITERIA THE FOLLOWING PUBLICATIONS SHALL BE USED AS A REFERENCE FOR DESIGN OF THE FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM ON THIS PROJECT. 1. NFPA 13, INSTALLATION OF SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 2. NFPA 24, PRIVATE FIRE SERVICE MAINS AND THEIR APPURTENANCES 3. FLORIDA FIRE PREVENTION CODE - 2004 EDITION ENTIRE BUILDING (EXCEPT AS NOTED): OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION: ORDINARY HAZARD GROUP 2 SYSTEM TYPE: WET PIPE DESIGN DENSITY: .20 GPM/SQ. FT. HYDRAULIC REMOTE AREA: 1,500 SQ. FT. SPRINKLER ORIFICE SIZE: 1/2" SPRINKLER TEMPERATURE RATING: 155°F DURATION OF SUPPLY: 60 - 90 MIN. MAXIMUM COVERAGEISPRINKLERHERD: 130 SQ. FT./QUICK RESPONSE TYPE HOSE STREAM ALLOWANCE: 250 GPM BATHROOMS: OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION: LIGHT HAZARD SYSTEM TYPE: WET PIPE DESIGN DENSITY: .10 GPMISQ. FT. HYDRAULIC REMOTE AREA: 1,500 SQ. FT. SPRINKLER ORIFICE SIZE: 1/2" SPRINKLER TEMPERATURE RATING: 155°F DURATION OF SUPPLY: 30 MIN. MAXIMUM COVERAGE/SPRINKLER HEAD: 225 SQ. FT./QUICK RESPONSE TYPE HOSE STREAM ALLOWANCE: 100 GPM FIRE PROTECTION SYMBOL LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION � -CONTROL VALVE W/TAMPER SWITCH N -CHECK VALVE 0-0 -FLOW SWITCH -SPRINKLER AND DRAIN RISER -NEW SPRINKLER PIPING Q1 -REVISION REFERENCE 1 -DETAIL REFERENCE: TOP -DETAIL#, FP-1 BOTTOM -DRAWING# SHOWN ON NOTE: SOME SYMBOLS SHOWN ON THIS LEGEND MAY NOT PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER LEGEND SYMBOL ORF TEMP RESPONSE K-FAG FINISH MODEL STYLE PLATE MFG. • 1!2" 155° QUICK 5.6 CHROME F1FR RECESSED CHROME RELIABLE 0 1l2" 155° QUICK 5.6 BRASS F1FR UPRIGHT HD/GD RELIABLE O 112" 155° QUICK 5.6 BRASS F1FR UPRIGHT NONE RELIABLE DRAWING INDEX N0. TITLE FP001 Fire Protection Floor Plan, Notes, Schedules &Details ikey Plan � I pUS Hwy 3o1 � _N�i E _8 0 o 0 U 4� a w � o l b� o Ow �/•� � U O O V co w N � Ll- O 0 U L �_ N .f.r �� CO Z) N p w >' .N U LU ��Y fl. fn W Y Na) o a u.f � co a w 1 w 0Cn Z 0 m W al 0 w o � o J W o z CD o W � o c M LO � W � FP001 --� T PVC WASTE LINE LENGTH TO SUIT BRONZE CLEANOUT PLUG W/COUNTER SUNK HEAD FINISHED GRADE 16" SQUARE CONCRETE PAD. TWO WAY CLEANOUT R&G SLOAN PVC PART NO.3724 WASTE LINE Exterior Cleanout Detail (ECO) SCALE:NTS _I_ L \\8-1 ') B 2 ,( B-3) B-4 1 f,\ B-5 ; B-6�B-7 �} B-8 B 9 �B 10 (B-11) REAR LEFT RIGHT 1 Plumbing Floor Plan NScale 1/8"=1'-0" FRONT PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE MARK EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER MODEL# PIPE SIZE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION CW HW WASTE -VENT CO-1 EXTERIOR 2-WAY ZURN ZN-1400-HD _ - SEE PLANS HEAVY TRAFFIC AREA EXTERIOR CLEANOUT WITH ACCESS CLEAN -OUT HEAVY TRAFFIC COVER AND TWO-WAY FITTING. SEE PLAN FOR PIPE SIZE CONNECTION. BRASS HOSE BIBB WITH POLISHED CHROME FINISH, HB-1 HOSE BIBB WOODFORD B24 3/4" - _ VANDAL PROOF VACUUM BREAKER BACK FLOW PREVENTER, 3/4-INCH MALE HOSE THREAD, WHEEL HANDLE ENCLOSED IN BRASS CASTING CHROME PLATED LOCKING RECESSED BOX OPERATED BY LOOSE KEY. PIPING MATERIAL SCHEDULE SERVICE SIZE MATERIAL SCHEDULE/TYPE INSULATION REMARKS TYPE THICK DOMESTIC COLD WATER ALL COPPER TYPE L FG 1" ALL SERVICE JACKETS SANITARY BELOW GRADE ALL C.I.OR PVC SERVICE WEIGHT NONE -- NO HUB SANITARY ABOVE SLAB ALL C.I.OR PVC SERVICE WEIGHT NONEA - NO HUB I NOTES: 1. WASTE AND VENT PIPING IN OFFICE PLUNUM SPACE SHALL BE SERVICE WEIGHT CAST IRON, NO HUB. PLUMBING GENERAL NOTES 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE CODES AND GOVERNING AUTHORITIES. I.E.=FLORIDA BUILDING CODE 2004 - PLUMBING. 2. ALL SANITARY PIPING SHALL HAVE A 1/8" PER FOOT SLOPE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ALL STORM WATER PIPING SHALL HAVE A 1/8" PER FOOT, MINIMUM, HORIZONTAL SLOPE UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 3. VALVES AND FITTINGS SHALL BE OF SAME SIZE OF LINE ON WHICH THEY ARE LOCATED, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. 4. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR MAINTAINING FIRE RATING AND WEATHERPROOFING INTEGRITY OF ALL PIPING AND PENETRATIONS. 5. ALL WATER SUPPLY AND SANITARY LINES SHALL BE RUN AS CLOSE TO PLANS AS POSSIBLE WITH NO CHANGES IN SIZING. 6. CHANGES IN THE DIRECTION OF SANITARY AND STORM DRAIN PIPING SHALL NOT BE MADE WITH FITTINGS WHICH WILL CAUSE EXCESSIVE REDUCTION IN THE VELOCITY OF FLOW OR CREATE ANY OTHER ADVERSE EFFECT (IE: USE OF SANITARY TEE IN A HORIZONTAL CONNECTION, USE OF A DOUBLE SANITARY TEE IN A VERTICAL STACK, IN GENERAL, USE OF SHORT -RADIUS FITTINGS FOR BRANCH TO HOUSE DRAIN OR STACK CONNECTION). 7. CONTRACTOR SHALL GIVE 24 HOURS NOTICE TO APPLICABLE UTILITY COMPANY PRIOR TO PERFORMING WORK INVOLVING UTILITIES. 8. ALL DRAINAGE PIPING SHALL BE MARKED WITH THE SEAL OF APPROVAL OF THE NATIONAL SANITATION FOUNDATION. 9. WHERE SANITARY SEWER LINES CROSS UNDERGROUND WATER SUPPLY LINES WITH LESS THAN 8" MINIMUM VERTICAL CLEARANCE, THE SANITARY SEWER SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF DUCTILE IRON PIPE (10' EACH SIDE OF WATER MAIN) OR THE WATER LINES SHOULD BE MODIFIED TO PROVIDE 8" MINIMUM CLEARANCE. 10. THE PLUMBING CONTRACTOR MAY BE REQUIRED TO DROP PIPE OUTSIDE OF BUILDING TO REQUIRED DEPTH TO PROVIDE CONNECTION TO AREA DEVELOPMENT UTILITY STUB. ALL DROPS IN DEPTH SHALL BE MADE BY THE USE OF 45' FITTINGS. 11. ROUTE ALL PIPING CONCEALED ABOVE CEILINGS, WITHIN WALLS, OR IN CHASES. EXPOSED PIPING SHALL BE SLOPED AND PAINTED TO MATCH ARCHITECTURAL FINISHES AND SHALL BE INSTALLED TIGHT TO MASONRY WALL. PIPING IN MECHANICAL ROOMS MAY BE EXPOSED. 12. SLEEVE AND FIRE STOP ALL PENETRATIONS (IF ANY) OF RATED WALLS, FLOORS, CEILINGS, ETC., IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE UL STANDARDS AND LOCAL CODES TO MAINTAIN RATINGS. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS AND ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR RATED WALLS, CEILINGS AND FLOORS INFORMATION. 13. ALL WATER PIPING INSTALLED IN EXTERIOR WALLS SHALL BE PLACED ON THE INTERIOR SIDE OF THE WALL. THE WALL INSULATION SHALL BE PLACED ON THE EXTERIOR SIDE OF THE PIPING. ANY PIPING INSTALLED IN UNCONDITIONED SPACES SHALL BE INSULATED AND PROTECTED FROM FREEZING TEMPERATURES. 14. SPACES SHALL BE INSULATED AND PROTECTED FROM FREEZING TEMPERATURES. SEE RISER DIAGRAMS FOR BRANCH PIPING DETAILS AND SIZES NOT SHOWN ON PLAN. 15. COLD WATER PIPING SHALL BE COPPER WATER TUBE (ASTM 888) TYPE "L" WITH WROUGHT -COPPER (ANSI B16.22), OR CAST BRASS (ANSI B16.18) PRESSURE FITTINGS AND ALLOY GRADE (ANSI-ASTM B32) 95TA LEAD-FREE SOLDER JOINTS. DISINFECT WATER PIPING AFTER PRESSURE TEST WITH CHLORINE SOLUTION 50 MG-L) FOR 24 HOURS. FLUSH LINES CLEAN AFTER COMPLETION. 16. PROVIDE CLEANOUTS AS FOLLOWS: (A) AT BASE OF EACH VERTICAL STACK INCLUDING BACK. (B) AT EACH CHANGE OF DIRECTION OF HORIZONTAL RUNS (C) AT 75 FOOT INTERVALS OF HORIZONTAL RUNS. 17. METERING AND SITE UTILITY CONNECTIONS SHALL BE PROVIDED ON SITE UTILITY DRAWINGS. ALL SERVICES SHOWN ON THIS SET OF PLANS TERMINATE 5'-0" FROM BUILDING, UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE ON DRAWINGS. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE FINAL CONNECTIONS TO SITE UTILITES. 18. FURNISH AND INSTALL HOSE BIBBS AND/OR WALL HYDRANTS 24" ABOVE FINISHED GRADE/FLOOR AND PROVIDE VACUUM BREAKERS. 19. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LOCATIONS OF ROOF DRAINS. 20. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY INVERT ELEVATIONS OF SEWERS TO WHICH NEW SEWER LINES ARE TO BE CONNECTED BEFORE INSTALLATION OF NEW SEWER LINE. 21. ALL VENTS THROUGH ROOF SHALL BE MIN. 10'-0" FROM ANY AIR INTAKES. 22. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL DIELECTRIC UNIONS AT CONNECTIONS OF DISSIMILAR METALS. 23. CONTRACTOR SHALL ROUGH -IN ALL WASTES AND SUPPLIES TO SPECIAL EQUIPMENT ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER'S SHOP DRAWINGS AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTIONS, ALL SUPPLIES SHALL BE VALVED. INSTALL VACUUM BREAKERS WHERE REQUIRED BY CODE. 24. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS (INCLUDING PIPE ROUTING AND EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS) TO ARCHITECT/ENGINEER FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO THE INSTALLATION OR PURCHASING OF ANY PIPING AND/OR EQUIPMENT. 25. ALL BELOW GRADE -SLAB COPPER PIPE SHALL BE PLACED WITHIN COPPER PIPE SLEEVE (10 MIL) POLYETHYLENE PLASTIC SLEEVING. EXTEND SLEEVING ABOVE GRADE/SLAB. 26. PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES SHALL BE INSTALLED ON BRANCH LINES SERVING FIXTURES AND/OR EQUIPMENT, WHEN THE PRESSURE IN THE LINE EXCEEDS 80 P.S.I. 27. WHEN THE INTENT OF THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS IS NOT CLEAR, OR IS CAPABLE OF MORE THAN ONE INTERPRETATION, SUCH MATTERS WILL BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER IN WRITING BEFORE THE SUBMISSION OF BIDS. THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER SHALL MAKE CORRECTION OR EXPLANATION IN WRITING. 28. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE INTENDED AS A GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK TO BE PERFORMED. ALL ITEMS NOT SPECIFICALLY MENTIONED OR SHOWN, BUT NECESSARY FOR THE COMPLETION OF THE INSTALLATION, SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THIS CONTRACTOR. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL THOROUGHLY ACQUAINT HIMSELF WITH THE MECHANICAL, ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL AND ELECTRICAL PLANS BEFORE SUBMITTING HIS FINAL BID. NO ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION WILL BE ALLOWED DUE TO THE CONTRACTOR'S FAILURE TO FAMILIARIZE HIMSELF WITH THE PLANS. 29. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BASE HIS PROPOSAL UPON THE EQUIPMENT AS SCHEDULED OR SPECIFIED, USING THE MANUFACTURER'S AND MODEL NUMBERS AS CALLED FOR IN THE SPECIFICATIONS AND SCHEDULED ON THE DRAWINGS. IF MORE THAN ONE MANUFACTURER OF EQUIPMENT IS SPECIFIED, ANY ONE OF THE MANUFACTURER'S OF EQUIPMENT MAY BE USED IN THIS CONTRACTOR'S PROPOSAL. IF THIS CONTRACTOR WISHES TO USE EQUIPMENT NOT SPECIFIED HE MUST, AT THE TIME OF BIDDING, SUBMIT SEPARATELY ON LETTERHEAD STATIONARY OF THE BIDDER, THE EQUIPMENT HE WOULD SUBSTITUTE AND THE COST TO BE ADDED OR TO BE DEDUCTED FROM HIS PROPOSAL. 30. THE CONTRACTOR IS EXPECTED TO ORDER ALL MATERIALS IN SUFFICIENT TIME TO AVOID DELAYING THE COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT. DELAY IN DELIVERIES WILL NOT BE CONSIDERED A JUSTIFIABLE REASON FOR SUBMISSION OF SUBSTITUTE MATERIALS. 31. DO NOT PENETRATE WALL FOOTINGS WITH PIPING, COORDINATE WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO DROP FOOTINGS AS REQUIRED TO CLEAR PLUMBING SERVICES WHERE ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY. ALL PIPING PENETRATING A BEARING WALL OR FOOTING MUST BE SLEEVED AND LOCATION APPROVED BY STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. 32. PROVIDE REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY CONNECTIONS AS REQUIRED BY CODE.. PLUMBING LEGEND DESCRIPTION ABBREV. SYMBOL SANITARY PIPING ABOVE SLAB SAN SANITARY PIPING BELOW SLAB SAN - - COLD WATER PIPING CW - - HOT WATER PIPING HW - - - - - - SHUT-OFF VALVE - - ----- i6H- - - FLOOR CLEANOUT FCO -0 CLEAN OUT TO GRADE COTG IN -LINE OR WALL CLEAN OUT COMCO CAP C - TEE UP --�-- TEE DOWN- 90° UP - - - 90° DOWN - HOSE BIBB HB -}}- TYPICAL (TYP) DRAWING LIST NO. TITLE P001 Plumbing Floor Plan, Notes, Schedules & Details Key Plan -- Kossik Rd i ........... �X 1 US Hwy 301 x i a U W C 0 CL 0 V (U Nc ao co m .LOCCMC U /1 ♦ U �V w � � � co LL a z a) '� 0) C> w �(N0� M H fn J U Cn C O E E 0 U L C_ cl'o co N (U U_ En =)�0 LLJ 06sU ��c v -0Oa)ca o m Y N 0- a .00 0 06 U U) Q) A--r 0 z CC n L O _O LL w EJ H w w co LLi 46.o- w z �. W N w A co Yo to LC a w __. „1 IL w O Z 0 U) U) m U) F_ M Of W C� 0 W �CD J W Q' d Z rn o F-CD W -� M p N w M o Z Uj he U LU Pool PROVIDE PLUG FOR MAINTENANCE PROVIDE CLEANOUT AT EACH CHANGE OF DIRECTION OR EVERY 30' DRAIN LINE. SLOPE A WITH FLOW 1/8"/FT TO LOCATION SHOWN A ON DRAWINGS A = FAN SUCTION PRESSURE + 1 INCH CONDENSATE CONDENSATE PIPE PIPE SIZE SIZE BELOW SLAB MAX. TONS ABOVE SLAB OR BELOW GRADE 2 3/4" 1-1/4" 5 1" 1-1/2" 30 1 1/4" 2" Condensate Drain Trap Detail SCALE:NTS #12 TEK SCREW (TYP.) - ROOF MEMBRANE CEMENT --� �1 WeAft:7\] SCHEDULE 40 PVC CONDENSATE PIPING MICRO PIPE SUPPORT ROOF SYSTEM 3 Condensate Pipe Support On Roof SCALE:NTS /B-H B-G ) C rx NOTE: PRE-ENGINEERED CURB BY RTU SUPPLIER 2 RTU Tie Down Detail SCALE:NTS ALUM. THRU WALL SCUPPER ROOF DRAIN COLLECTOR-/ DOWN SPOUT. TIED DIRECTLY INTO STORM DRAINAGE UNDER GROUND. RE: ARCH ROOF PLAN FOR CONT. NAILER SUPPLIED W/ CURB, ATTACH TO CURB AS PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS / SPECS. :7�I1 SECURE CURB TO STEEL FRAME USING #12 TEK SCREWS, 2 @ EA. CORNER & 12" O.C. BTW. STL. DECK Ly MICRO -HOLD (8 MIN.) (2 EA. SIDE) MICROMETL, 16 GA. MICRO -HOLD HOLD DOWN. ATTACH TO UNIT RAIL REF: MANUF. FOR INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR WALL AND ROOF TYPE I CONDENSATE LINE 4 Condensation Termination Detail SCALE:NTS ROOF TOP UNIT SCHEDULE COOLING EQUAL TO FAN COMPRESSOR(S) ELECTRIC HEATER CAPACITY CFM OIA E.S.P. (IN.) HP V/0 FLA QTY, V/0 RLA LRA KW CONTROL V/0 STAGES TC (MBH) SC (MBH) AMBIENT DB °FIWB °F ENTERING DB °FIWB °F MARK AREA NOMINAL SERVED TONS MCA MOCP WEIGHT (LBS.) SEER [EER] MFG. MODEL NOTES RTU-1 - RTU-2 RETAIL B 4 1600 400 0.6 1.0 208/30 5.0 1 208/30 14.6 91.0 4.5 1 208/30 25.2 35 625 49.4 37.3 95180 80/67 13.0 TRANE THC043A3 (1)-(8) RTU-3 RETAIL B 5 2000 430 1.2 1.0 208/3 5.0 1 208/3 18.6 128.0 9.0 2 208/3 39.0 50.0 750 63.1 48.2 95/80 80/67 13.0 TRANE THC063A3 (1)-(8) RTU-4 - RTU-8 RETAIL B 4 1600 400 0.6 1.0 208/30 5.0 1 208/30 14.6 91.0 4.5 1 208/30 25.2 35 625 49.4 37.3 95/80 80/67 13.0 TRANE THC043A3 (1)-(8) RTU-9 - RTU-10 RETAIL B 5 2000 430 1.2 1.0 208/3 5.0 1 20813 18.6 128.0 9.0 2 20813 39.0 50.0 750 63.1 48.2 95/80 80/67 13.0 TRANE THC063A3 (1)-(8) RTU-1 1 RETAIL B 6 2400 430 0.8 1.0 208130 5.0 1 208/30 19.0 156.0 13.5 1 208/30 53.1 60 800 71.7 53.6 95/80 80/67 10.3 TRANE THC072A3 (1) - (8) NOTES: (1) REFER TO CONTROL SYSTEM NOTES FOR CONTROL COMPONENTS REQUIREMENTS. (2) PROVIDE 5-MINUTE ANTI -SHORT CYCLE TIMER. (3) PROVIDE THRU THE BASE ELECTRICAL AND SINGLE POINT CONNECTION, POWERED CONVENIENCE OUTLET PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. (4) PROVIDE WITH FACTORY FILTERS. (5) PROVIDE WITH FACTORY ROOF CURB AND OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE HOOD WITH MANUAL DAMPER. (6) PROVIDE WITH STARTER. (7) PROVIDE WITH FACTORY INSTALLED DISCONNECT. (8) PROVIDE UNIT WITH HAIL GUARD. REAR MECHANICAL GENERAL NOTES 1. CONTRACTOR TO VISIT SITE AND VERIFY ALL CLEARANCES BEFORE FABRICATION OF DUCTWORK AND PROVIDE ADDITIONAL OFFSET AND/OR CHANGES IN DUCT SIZES TO MEET FIELD CONDITIONS AND COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING AND FIRE PROTECTION SUBCONTRACTOR BEFORE ANY CONSTRUCTION WORK. 2. SUPPLY, RETURN AND OUTSIDE AIR DUCTWORK SHALL BE EXTERNALLY INSULATED SHEET METAL CONSTRUCTION IN ACCORDANCE WITH LATEST SMACNA STANDARDS. INSULATION SHALL HAVE VAPOR BARRIER AND AN INSTALLED MINIMUM THERMAL RESISTANCE (R) VALUE OF 6.0. ALL EXHAUST DUCTWORK SHALL BE UNINSULATED SHEET METAL CONSTRUCTION IN ACCORDANCE WITH LATEST SMACNA STANDARDS. ALL JOINTS SHALL BE SECURELY TAPED WITH 3" WIDE GLASS FABRIC TAPE WITH FOSTER 30/35 MASTIC OR EQUAL. 3. DUCT SHALL BE SECURELY SUPPORTED, HUNG OR SUSPENDED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATEST SMACNA EDITION AND SECTION 603 OF THE FLORIDA BUILDING CODE MECHANICAL 2004 & FLORIDA BUILDING CODE 2006 SUPPLEMENT, 4. ROOF TOP UNIT OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE SHALL MAINTAIN A MINIMUM OF 10'-0" FROM ANY EXHAUST OR SANITARYVENT THROUGH ROOF PIPING. ALL TRANSFER DUCTWORK LEADING TO REST ROOMS SHALL HAVE A ZERO LEAKAGE BACK DRAFT DAMPER AS SHOWN ON MECHANICAL DRAWINGS. 5. PROVIDE ALL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED SERVICE AREA CLEARANCES. 6. ALL ROOF TOP UNITS SHALL BE REINFORCED TO WITHSTAND LOCAL WIND LOAD DESIGN. SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWING(S) FOR DETAIL(S) /CONSULT WITH BUILDING STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. 7. DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS SHALL BE FURNISHED BY THE FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR, INSTALLED IN DUCT BY THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR AND WIRED BY THE FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR. SMOKE DETECTORS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 72, NATIONAL FIRE ALARM CODE; NFPA 90A, STANDARD FOR INSTALLATION OF AIR-CONDITIONING AND VENTILATING SYSTEMS, THE FLORIDA BUILDING CODE 2004 AND THE MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION IN STRUCTIONS. COORDINATE LOCATION OF SMOKE DETECTORS WITH FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR. 8. IN GENERAL, PLANS AND DIAGRAMS ARE SCHEMATIC ONLY AND SHOULD NOT BE SCALED. 9. HVAC CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY ADDED ELECTRICAL COSTS WHICH MAY RESULT FROM SUBSTITUTED EQUIPMENT. 10. DUCTWORK INSULATION SHALL BE FOIL FACED FIBERGLASS DUCT WRAP WITH A MINIMUM THERMAL RESISTANCE (R) OF 6.0. INSULATION SHALL HAVE VAPOR BARRIER. INSTALL PER MFR. REQUIREMENTS. 11. DUCT DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS ARE CLEAR INSIDE DIMENSIONS. DUCTWORK, DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, GRILLES, AND OTHER ITEMS OF THE AIR HANDLING SYSTEM SHALL NOT BE SUPPORTED BY THE CEILING OR CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM. 12. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL SUPPLEMENTARY STEEL REQUIRED TO SUSPEND MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS. - , INSTALLATION OF THE EQUIPMENT SHALL COMPLY WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS AND CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR �B 131 8=16� SERVICING OF EQUIPMENT. / 13. VERIFY VOLTAGE WITH ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR BEFORE ORDERING EQUIPMENT. 14. PROVIDE A TRAP IN ALL CONDENSATE PIPING LOCATED AT AIR HANDLING UNITS. SLOPE CONDENSATE LINES 1/8" PER FOOT. CONDENSATE LINES SHALL BE PVC SCH. 40. ALL CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING SHALL BE PROPERLY SUPPORTED. SEE "CONDENSATE DRAIN TRAP" DETAIL. O 15. ALL MECHANICAL WORK SHALL MEET ALL THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE "FLORIDA BUILDING CODE 2004 - MECHANICAL" & FLORIDA BUILDING CODE 2006 SUPPLEMENT. B-K -' 16. GUARANTEE; FOR ONE YEAR AFTER DATE OF ACCEPTANCE BY THE OWNER, ALL EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP TO BE FREE MECHANICAL KEY PLAN NOTES: III FROM DEFECT. 17. DO NOT CUT STRUCTURAL MEMBERS WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OR ARCHITECT. ARRANGE FOR - REPAIRS REQUIRED TO RESTORE OTHER WORK, BECAUSE OF DAMAGE CAUSED AS A RESULT OF MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS. D COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF MECHANICAL UNITS WITH ARCHITECTURAL `r \ AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. REFER TO RTU CURB DETAIL ON MECHANICAL \ I it 18. ALL WALL MOUNTED THERMOSTATS SHALL BE INSTALLED AT AN ELEVATION OF 54" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR TO THE TOP UNLESS DETAIL SHEET AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR RTU INSTALLATION. ! OTHERWISE NOTED ON DRAWINGS. LOCATION OF THE WALL MOUNTED THERMOSTAT SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH OTHER TRADES FOR COORDINATE WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. �I I! A NEAT APPEARANCE. FINAL LOCATION OF THERMOSTAT SHALL BE SUBJECT TO THE APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER OR HIS RUN CONDENSATE FROM MECHANICAL UNITS TO ROOF DRAIN/GUTTER AND REPRESENTATIVE IN THE FIELD. D TERMINATE WITH APPROVED AIR GAP. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL ROOF PLAN FOR LOCATION OF DRAINS/GUTTER. �- �) 19. ALL UNITS SHALL BE BALANCED TO WITHIN 10 PERCENT OF THE DESIGN AIR QUANTITY. BALANCE DIFFUSERS AND REGISTERS TO WITHIN T .� 1 li 10 PERCENT OF QUANTITIES SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. 3 REFER TO CONDENSATE TRAP DETAIL ON MECHANICAL DETAIL SHEET FOR 1 114" 4 20. PROVIDE FLEXIBLE NEOPRENE DUCT CONNECTORS ON THE DISCHARGE AND ENTERING SIDES OF ALL VIBRATING EQUIPMENT TO WHICH PIPE SIZE. REFER TO PIPE SUPPORT DETAIL ON MECHANICAL DETAIL SHEET FOR INSTALLATION. (� 3� D x� 6 DUCTWORK IS ATTACHED. �r 7 21. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE 3 COPIES OF A TEST AND BALANCE REPORT. AIR BALANCING SHALL BE PERFORMED BY AN INDEPENDENT 4 INSTALL FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS BETWEEN ALL DUCT WORK AND TESTING AND BALANCING CONTRACTOR WHICH SHALL BE QUALIFIED AND CERTIFIED BY EITHER ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL MECHANICAL UNITS. it 8 (AABC) OR NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU (NEBB). THIS REPORT MUST BE REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER PRIOR TO THE FINAL INSPECTION. D REFER TO MECHANICAL ROOF TOP UNIT DETAIL AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS j RTU-11 FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT TIE DOWN DETAILS. COORDINATE WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. -ll 0 ( 22. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL TRADES' INSTALLATION SCHEDULES. COORDINATE WORK SCHEDULE WITH I 'I GENERAL CONTRACTOR. INSTALL SMOKE DUCT DETECTOR IN SUPPLY DUCTS. 23. WHEN THE INTENT OF THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS IS NOT CLEAR, OR IS CAPABLE OF MORE THAN ONE INTERPRETATION, SUCH PROVIDE PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT FOR EACH MECHANICAL UNIT TO BE r B-J } MATTERS WILL BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER IN WRITING BEFORE THE SUBMISSION OF BIDS. THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER SHALL MAKE CORRECTION OR EXPLANATION IN WRITING. LOCATED AND INSTALLED BY FUTURE TENANT. Ij 1! PROVIDE SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCT DROPS INTO SPACE AND CAP FOR 24. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE INTENDED AS A GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK TO BE PERFORMED. ALL ITEMS NOT FUTURE TENANT CONNECTION. ;I SPECIFICALLY MENTIONED OR SHOWN, BUT NECESSARY FOR THE COMPLETION OF THE INSTALLATION, SHALL BE FURNISHED AND (l INSTALLED BY THIS CONTRACTOR. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL THOROUGHLY ACQUAINT HIMSELF WITH THE MECHANICAL, ARCHITECTURAL, j STRUCTURAL AND ELECTRICAL PLANS BEFORE SUBMITTING HIS FINAL BID. NO ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION WILL BE ALLOWED DUE TO THE CONTRACTOR'S FAILURE TO FAMILIARIZE HIMSELF/ HERSELF WITH THE PLANS. HVAC LEGEND ! ! SYMBOL DESCRIPTION III �u NEW DUCTWORK T 1" I 4 5 - - - --� 6 FLEXIBLE DUCT DUCTWORK UP THRU PLAN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - `B-H DUCTWORK TRANSITION MANUAL AIR VOLUME CONTROL DAMPER ® SUPPLY AIR DEVICE F] \ / z RETURN AIR DEVICE / :L ® EXHAUST AIR DEVICE WALL MOUNTED THERMOSTAT ❑ I ! SD DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR CONDENSATE PIPING j -- - j---� ij TYPICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION ��1a ��El0 �� 0 0� I � B-G THE A/C UNIT SHALL BE STARTED AND STOPPED FROM A ROOM THERMOSTAT. r- T 1 1 T - T 1 T -� 1 T -� 1 _, �I� 4 4 1" 1" 4 1" 1" � 4 'I ON A CALL FOR COOLING, THE THERMOSTAT SHALL ENERGIZE THE 3 SD �I 5 5 SD �� 3 CO 3 SD �I 5 CO 3 SD �I 5 CO 3 p x�� 5 COMPRESSOR(S) TO MAINTAIN SET POINT. ON ACALL FOR HEATING, THE 6 LgTHERMOSTAT SHALL ENERGIZE THE ELECTRIC HEAT IN STAGES) TO MAINTAIN 6 6ULE-:�J 6 � j SET POINT. SUPPLY FAN SHALL RUN CONTINUOUSLY DURING OCCUPIED HOURS. RIGHT 1 Mechanical Roof Plan Scale 1/8"=1'-0" �N FRONT OUTSIDE AIR CALCULATION RETAIL FLOOR AREA AREA (SF) CFM/S.F. (1) CFM REQUIRED CFM SUPPLIED RETAIL B 15,066 0.3 4520 4520 (1) PER TABLE 403.3 - FLORIDA BUILDING CODE- MECHANICAL 2004 17111■ Gi111■ DRAWING LIST NO. TITLE M001 Mechanical Roof Plan, Notes, Schedules & Details Imo n-mmmmr 1 r r r F'11_11 S Hwy 301 ' Key Plar Fj F_ x CD a U N 7b a0) w U � g� o H� �.b .0 o U �w w �o .� o do0 w a o3 U o� I � � U v� 3 CU C 0 Q m 0 C� C:ao (� m ca CD .i Cc CM C V W-0J' g N N .L N E w Cl) 1- fA J U C 0 E E 0 L co N Co CD m 7) w 06� ` U F- Uj 70�Lo a cn 0 FnYNa a Cn 0 06 U) U) 0 z co 0- 4_ ��0/ LL 0 .CU w 0 w w LLI tZ u.i A_ W N M 0144. CD LL: ca aw w O 3 z 0 V) m U) w al 0 ti w o Cn j J w o z rn o F-- LU M N wUj Ch O w (Y,) MOW HPD-21:2: 14 1 Site Wiring SCALE: 1' = 50'-0" Site Lighting Luminaire Schedule SYMBOL LABEL QTY MANUF. CATALOG NUMBER DESCRIPTION LAMP MOUNTING LUMENS LLF WATTS a{ A 11 KIM WD18D4- WALL DIRECTOR 40OW MH ED-28 CLEAR WALL @ 40,000 0.72 400 LIGHTING 40OMH-277 HORIZ. POS, 21' AFG KVF 1000M (2 @ 180A) SQUARE AREA ONE EACH 1000W CLEAR POLE @ 000 C 43 LITHONIA SYMFL LIGHTS, FLAT LENS, METAL HALIDE, BT-56 35' AFG 110,000 0.72 2160 SYMETRIC DISTRIBUTION VERT, BASE UP POS. p KVF 1000M (3 @ 90A) SQUARE AREA ONE EACH 1000W CLEAR POLE @ Q�0 D 5 LITHONIA SYMFL LIGHTS, FLAT LENS, METAL HALIDE, BT-56 35' AFG 110,000 0.72 3240 SYMETRIC DISTRIBUTION VERT, BASE UP POS. KVF 1000M (3 @ 120A) SQUARE AREA ONE EACH 1000W CLEAR POLE @ 7 E 2 LITHONIA SYMFL LIGHTS, FLAT LENS, METAL HALIDE, BT-56 35' AFG 110,000 I 0.72 3240 i SYMETRIC DISTRIBUTION VERT, BASE UP POS. I HPO$:8 ----------- —A K11 i HPF-21:23 R HPF-18:20 16 d. i � I I I I I \ I � NL INDICATES NON - SHADE TREE INDICATES SHADETREE CONCRETE POLE WITH HAND HOLE. (PROVIDE FUSING AT BASE OF POLE) GRADE OR 12 BARE COPPER PAVING. GROUND WIRE. III I — 0 3/4'C.MIN. 9—m =I _I (PVC) _—✓g°}g'-0" COPPER C;UND ROD (DRIVEN). Lighting Concrete Pole Detail SCALE: NTS WIRE SIZE UP THE POLE SHALL BE (AT MINIMUM) THE SAME SIZE AS THE WIRE FEEDING THE POLE POLE SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF SECTION 1606 IN THE FLORIDA BUILDING CODE 2004 W/ 2005 AMENDMENTS. THE POLE SHALL BE DESIGNED AT 3 SECOND GUST WITH MINIMUM EPA FOR POLE = 11.2 SFT MINIMUM WEIGHT LOADING CAPACITY OF POLE = 212 LBS I Site Liahtina Notes KEY NOTES 1O CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE (2) 3' PVC SCHEDULE 40 CONDUITS WITH PULL STRINGS TO WITHIN 5' OF PUBLIX STORE FOR COMMUNICATION LINES. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF CONDUIT ROUTING WITH PUBLIX DRAWINGS, PUBLIX FIELD REPRESENTATIVE, AND WITH THE LOCAL UTILITY PROVIDER. O PROPOSED LOCATION OF PUBLIX DEDICATED ELECTRICAL TRANSFORMER. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH PUBLIX DRAWINGS, PUBLIX FIELD REPRESENTATIVE, AND WITH LOCAL UTILITY PROVIDER. REFER TO PUBLIX ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR INFORMATION ABOUT THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE ELECTRICAL SERVICE FOR THE PUBLIX BUILDING. O3 PROVIDE UNDER GROUND SERVICE FROM LOOP FEED UTILITY SYSTEM TO DEDICATED PUBLIX TRANSFORMER (APPROXIMATE LOCATION). COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF CONDUITAND WIRING WITH LOCAL UTILITY PROVIDER. ® PROPOSED LOCATION OF TRANSFORMER FOR BLDGS A & B. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH RETAIL DRAWINGS AND WITH LOCAL UTILITY PROVIDER. REFER TO RETAIL ELECTRICAL DWGS FOR THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE ELECTRICAL SERVICE FOR THE RETAIL BUILDING. O5 PROPOSED LOCATION OF TRANSFORMER FOR BLDGS C & D. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH RETAIL DRAWINGS AND WITH LOCAL UTILITY PROVIDER. REFER TO RETAIL ELECTRICAL DWGS FOR THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE ELECTRICAL SERVICE FOR THE RETAIL BUILDING. © PROPOSED LOCATION OF TRANSFORMER FOR BLDG F. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH RETAIL DRAWINGS AND WITH LOCAL UTILITY PROVIDER. REFER TO RETAIL ELECTRICAL DWGS FOR THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE ELECTRICAL SERVICE FOR THE RETAIL BUILDING. O7 RETAIL METER CENTER, HOUSE PANEL, & TELEPHONE TERMINAL CABINET FOR BLDG B. REFER TO RETAIL ELECTRICAL DWGS FOR EXACT LOCATION AND FOR THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE ELECTRICAL AND COMMUNICATION SERVICES FOR THE RETAIL BUILDING. ® LOCATION OF CONDUIT STUB OUTS FOR FUTURE ELECTRICAL AND TELEPHONE SERVICES FOR BLDG C. REFER TO RETAIL ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LOCATION AND FOR THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE ELECTRICALAND COMMUNICATION SERVICES. O RETAIL METER CENTER, HOUSE PANEL, & TELEPHONE TERMINAL CABINET FOR BLDG D. REFER TO RETAIL ELECTRICAL DWGS FOR EXACT LOCATION AND FOR THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE ELECTRICAL AND COMMUNICATION SERVICES FOR THE RETAIL BUILDING. 10 RETAIL METER CENTER, HOUSE PANEL, & TELEPHONE TERMINAL CABINET FOR BLDG F. REFER TO RETAIL ELECTRICAL DWGS FOR EXACT LOCATION AND FOR THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE ELECTRICALAND COMMUNICATION SERVICES FOR THE RETAIL BUILDING. IQ SITE LIGHTING WIRED ON REGULAR CIRCUIT TO BLDG B HOUSE PANEL. REFER TO RETAIL ELECTRICAL DWGS FOR CONDUIT SIZES, WIRE SIZES, AND EXACT CIRCUITING. 12 SITE LIGHTING WIRED ON REGULAR CIRCUIT TO BLDG C HOUSE PANEL. REFER TO RETAIL ELECTRICAL DWGS FOR CONDUIT SIZES, WIRE SIZES, AND EXACT CIRCUITING. 13 SITE LIGHTING WIRED ON NIGHT LIGHT CIRCUIT TO BLDG D HOUSE PANEL. REFER TO RETAIL ELECTRICAL DWGS FOR CONDUIT SIZES, WIRE SIZES, AND EXACT CIRCUITING. 14 SITE LIGHTING WIRED ON REGULAR CIRCUIT TO BLDG D HOUSE PANEL. REFERTO RETAIL ELECTRICAL DWGS FOR CONDUIT SIZES, WIRE SIZES, AND EXACT CIRCUITING. 15 SITE LIGHTING WIRED ON NIGHT LIGHT CIRCUIT TO BLDG F HOUSE PANEL. REFER TO RETAIL ELECTRICAL DWGS FOR CONDUIT SIZES, WIRE SIZES, AND EXACT CIRCUITING. 16 SITE LIGHTING WIRED ON REGULAR CIRCUIT TO BLDG F HOUSE PANEL. REFER TO RETAIL ELECTRICAL DWGS FOR CONDUIT SIZES, WIRE SIZES, AND EXACT CIRCUITING. 17 SHOPPING CENTER MONUMENT SIGN WIRED TO BLDG D HOUSE PANEL. REFER TO RETAIL ELECTRICAL DWGS FOR CONDUIT SIZES, WIRE SIZES, AND EXACT CIRCUITING. 18 SHOPPING CENTER MONUMENT SIGN WIRED TO BLDG F HOUSE PANEL. REFER TO RETAIL ELECTRICAL DWGS FOR OONDUIT SIZES, WIRE SIZES, AND EXACT CIRCUITING. 19 RETAIL METER CENTER, HOUSE PANEL, & TELEPHONE TERMINAL CABINET FOR BLDG A. REFER TO RETAIL ELECTRICAL DWGS FOR EXACT LOCATION AND FOR THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE ELECTRICAL AND COMMUNICATION SERVICES FOR THE RETAIL BUILDING. GENERAL NOTES 1. ALL NEW SITE LIGHTING TO BE WIRED TO THE RETAIL HOUSE PANEL. 2. ON POLES WHERE NIGHT LIGHTS (NQARE INDICATED. ONLY THE FIXTURE SPECIFIED IS ON THE NL CIRCUIT. THE OTHER FIXTURE(S) IS (ARE) ONAREGULAR CIRCUIT. 3. ALL NEW IRRIGATION CONTROLS TO BE WIRED TO THE RETAIL HOUSE PANEL. 4. REFER TO THE RETAIL ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR THE EXACT LOCATION OF THE RETAIL METER CENTER AND HOUSE PANEL. 5. REFER TO THE RETAIL ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FORALL RETAIL RISER DIAGRAMS, PANEL SCHEDULES, CONDUIT SIZES, AND WIRE SIZES. 6. ALL WORK PERTAINING TO THE RETAIL BLDG TO BE COORDINATED WITH THE RETAIL DWGS. 7. ALL WORK PERTAINING TO THE PUBLIX BUILDING TO BE COORDINATED WITH THE PUBLIX SHELL DRAWINGS AND THE PUBLIX FIELD REPRESENTATIVE. 8. ALL UTILITY WORK TO BE COORDINATED WITH THE LOCAL UTILITY PROVIDER. 9. ALL WORK SHOWN ON THE SITE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS TO BE COORDINATED WITH THE CIVIL, LANDSCAPE, AND IRRIGATION DRAWINGS AS WELLAS WITH ALL OTHER UTILITIES. O 5= i a 0 CU W O CL 0 r� V ca C 00 U_jm .L UCO CD M O O .J w LLcu LL E N Q CDz •nnL C*4CD E �+MHfn U cn 0 E E 0 U L C_ C M N -�+ CO LL c �Y(a W � O a °6 t U z A O U) a U) iU 0 � WYN� a } �\ Q Z N O v co U CD a cn J �w O �J J z O U) U m CO H Of w d til 0 ti w U o w� LU w O z rn o O N H c*� o z O W w m a o o v E002 ELECTRICAL PLAN NOTES: O J-BOX FOR FUTURE TENANT SIGN. PROVIDE 3/4" CONDUIT WITH PULL CORD TO REAR OF SPACE AND STUB IN CEILING NEAR FUTURE PANEL LOCATION. COORD. LOCATION OF J-BOX WITH ARCHITECTURAL. �� •n nnuni ur unr. � ni n � nnnn rn rri rn� inur rrn. n.�ei nnnwrr nri �n � in rn nn REAR LEFT :N' RIGHT FRONT LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE TYPE SYMBOL MANUFACTURER CATALOG NO. VOLT I LAMPS MOUNTING A THOMAS SL9421-7 120 (1) 60 W INCAND CLEAR GLASS WALL MOUNT I CLEAR GLASS ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLAN - BUILDING B Scale 1/8"=1'-0" ELECTRICAL LEGEND NOT ALL DEVICES SHOWN IN LEGEND ARE REQUIRED. REVIEW POWER & LIGHTING PLANS AND DETAILS FOR ITEMS WHICH APPLY TO THIS PROJECT. X EXIT LIGHT (SHADE AREA INDICATES DIRECTION) LETTER INDICATES TYPE SEE LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE TO CONFIRM TYPE AND MOUNTING. BATTERY POWERED EMERGENCY LIGHT TELEPHONE WALL OUTLET, PROVIDE SINGLE GANG BOX WITH 3/4" CONDUIT WITH PULL WIRE AND INSULATING BUSHING STUBBED INTO CEILING SPACE. MOUNT BOX 18" A.F.F. U.O.N. DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, MOUNT 18" A.F.F. U.O.N. DUPLEX RECEPTACLE MOUNTED ABOVE COUNTER HEIGHT U.O.N. cal GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER RECEPTACLE, LEVITON #6898-I, MOUNT ABOVE COUNTER HEIGHT U.O.N. I.G. DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, ISOLATED GROUND TYPE, LEVITON #5362-IGI MOUNTED ABOVE COUNTER HEIGHT. U.O.N. e TAMPER -RESISTANT DUPLEX RECEPTACLE PASS&SEYMOUR (TR63-HM) I.G. DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, ISOLATED GROUND TYPE, LEVITON #5362—IGI MOUNT AT 18" A.F.F. U.O.N. wPG DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, WEATHERPROOF GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER TYPE, LEVITON, MOUNT AT 18" A.F.G., U.O.N. DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, MOUNTED ABOVE STOREFRONT WINDOWS QUADRIPLEX RECEPTACLE, MOUNT AT 18" A.F.F. U.O.N. Q JUNCTION BOX (FLUSH MOUNT IN FINISHED AREAS U.O.N.) LIGHTING, POWER, OR SYSTEMS PANELBOARDS. MSB/MDP MAIN SWITCHBOARD OR MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL CONDUIT CONCEALED IN WALL, BELOW SLAB, OR ABOVE CEILING. A-1,3 CONDUIT RUN CONCEALED IN WALLS BELOW SLAB, OR CEILING SPACES. ARROWS INDICATE HOMERUN. SMALL HASHMARKS INDICATE NUMBER OF HOT CONDUCTORS, AND LARGE HASHMARK INDICATES NEUTRAL SUBSCRIPT INDICATES PANEL AND CIRCUIT NUMBERS. GROUND CONDUCTOR REQUIRED IN ALL CONDUITS BUT NOT INDICATED. A-37:39:41 SUBSCRIPT INDICATES PANEL -AND NUMBERS WITH COLONS INDICATE 2 OR 3 POLE CIRCUITS. L❑ DISCONNECT SWITCH 100/3/60 DISCONNECT DESIGNATION (SIZE/POLES/FUSE) "NF" INDICATES "DE" NON -FUSED; INDICATES DUAL ELEMENT FUSES. MOTOR PERMANENTLY CONNECTED WITH FLEXIBLE CONDUIT EF (HORSEPOWER OR EQUIPMENT INDICATED) THERMOSTAT. PROVIDE SINGLE GANG BOX WITH 1/2" C. STUBBED TO INTO CEILING SPACE, MOUNT 60" A.F.F. U.O.N. (COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL DRAWINGS PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN) ❑F FIRE ALARM PULL SWITCH [� HORN/STROBE OOR�SMOKE DETECTOR: EDWARDS #ISIGA—PS \&EF BATH ROOM FAN LIGHT (BROAN S150L) xo FIRE ALARM SPRINKLER TAMPER SWITCH FIRE ALARM SPRINKLER FLOW SWITCH ® OCCUPANCY SENSOR BY WATT STOPPER. EG ABBREVIATIONS EQUIPMENT GROUND NIL NIGHT LIGHT IG ISOLATED GROUND PC PULL CHAIN WP WEATHERPROOF C/T CURRENT TRANSFORMER EC EMPTY CONDUIT EX EXISTING DEVICE TO REMAIN EWH ELECTRIC WATER HEATER AFF ABOVE FINISH FLOOR EWC ELECTRIC WATER COOLER AFG ABOVE FINISH GRADE E/F-EF EXHAUST FAN U.O.N. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED A/H-AHU AIR HANDLING UNIT N.T.S. NOT TO SCALE ACC-CU CONDENSING UNIT NIC NOT IN CONTRACT RTU ROOF TOP UNIT TYP. TYPICAL FACP FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL VTC LB LOCK BREAKER GFI GROUND FAULTINTERRUPTER TTC TELEPHONE TERMINAL CABINET VIA TIME CLOCK NOTE: MOUNTING HEIGHTS NOTED ARE TO BOTTOM OF DEVICE SHOWN. U.O.N. 7 U C 0 Q" 0 r� V Cu c C: CO 0 Co "� N Co C U (� `) m U 2 E �p m (6 LL ¢ a a)z L 0) LuCND m 2 M H (A J U Cn 0 E E 0 U a �-o M N� ca��= m�`=o w w 0 0)a0) a WYNCL V z_ 0 Co I z Q J 0 0 J LL J Q Uorf Lu Lu J w w Lu C� \\ \v ^` \ 11 0 z N 0 CD � p O z O CD Cn m Cn w a 0 '- w En9 0 J w o z rn o W co Lu0 M 7 S J Lu U H 0 Lu O 0 U E101 2 SETS OF 4 #310, 1 #4 G, EACH IN 2"C WP PAINT ALL METERS, DISCONNECTS, AND WIREWAYS TO MATCH BUILDING EXTERIOR. (TYP.) WIREWAY B1: 8" x 8" (LENGTH AS REQUIRED) �fmmm 400 3 Pw 400 P TWO 2" C (EMPTY W/ PULL CORD FOR FUTURE) 4"-TO-2" REDUCERS Z ABOVE GRADE (TYP.) TWO 4" C (EMPTY W/ PULL CORD FOR FUTURE) OI 101 101 10 200 200 200 200 3 3 3 3 200 200 200 W) W) WP 200 WP 4 #3/0, 2"C (EMPTY 1 #4 G, W/ PULL 2"C CORD FOR FUTURE) 4"C (EMPTY W/PULL TO INDOOR TO INDOOR TO INDOOR TO INDOOR TO INDOOR CORDFOR STUB -UP STUB -UP STUB -UP STUB -UP STUB -UP FUTURE) SET B9 SET B8 SET B7 SET B6 SET B5 #310 —< MANUFACTURER: SQUARE-D NQOD MAIN BREAKER: N/A MAIN LUGS:. 225 K.A.I,C.: 65 MOUNTED: SURFACE NAME: PANEL'HPB' 3 PHASE 4 WIRE PROJECT NAME: ZEPHRY COMMONS RETAIL'B' 120/208 VOLTS PROJECT NUMBER: 206319 FED FROM: WIREWAY B2 O ENO. S CKT IDENTIFICATION WIRE/COND C O D E LOAD/PHASE (KVA) CIRCUIT BREAKER LOAD/PHASE (KVA) C O D E WIRE/COND IDENTIFICATION CKT NO O E S A B C TRIP P P TRIP A B C 1 1 FACP 2#12, 1#12EG., 1/2'C O 0.60 iw � e. ,�i��ik�' 20 1 1 20 0.05 ., � ��, L 2#12,1#12EG., 1I2"C EMRG, LTG, 2 3 RECEPT (QUAD i TTC) 2#12, 1#12EG., 1/2"C R --= 0.36 ter" 20 1 1 20 ': 0.07 == L 2#12, 1#12EG., 1/2"C LIGHTING 4 5 SPARE j'h'''i i'"s �),'" 2Q 1 1 20 ;I,I 0.47 m 0.47 L 2#12, 1#12EG., 1/2"C LIGHTING 6 2 7 SPARE T 20 111 20 L 2#12, 1#12EG., 1/2"C LIGHTING (RE: E002) 8 2 9 SPARE 1w `„j ,s 20 1111 20 0.96 mi.,. L 2#12, 1#12EG., 1/2"C LIGHTING (RE: E002) 10 12 11 SPACE ONLY ° "'' °' SPACE ONLY 12 13 SPACE ONLY I �$ WE SPACE ONLY 14 15.,, SPACE ONLY ;°„,Frkl'4 A f`q4 c`a 'xll r . cr SPACE ONLY 16 17 SPACE ONLY RIMSPACE ONLY 18 19 SPACE ONLY �dNl))k. wllp}11;p* '(sl., i�MS`�° SPACE ONLY 20 21 SPACE ONLY Y _ "- SPACE ONLY 22 23 SPACE ONLY ,I 3I w'l,"� `�y�'`' SPACE ONLY 24 25 SPACE ONLY k� 4 _`��T33 ". SPACE ONLY 26 27 SPACE ONLY SPACE ONLY 28 29 SPACE ONLY 1 ''�� -a SPACE ONLY 30 31 SPACE ONLY�� ,w .. �,n'' SPACE ONLY 32 33 SPACE ONLY h SPACE ONLY 34 35 SPACE ONLY µ SPACE ONLY 36 E E 37 SPACE ONLY SPACE ONLY 38 39 SPACE ONLY a -.502 ` '_ 1 20 0.03 L 2#12, 1#12EG., 1/2"C EMRG. LTG. (BLDG. C) 40 41 ISPACE ONLY p �l�p�,;�"" ( I,til �� ,�„ I 1 20 ,ii 1°� . ,�°��m fI 0,74 L 2#12, 1#12EG., 1/2"C LIGHTING (BLDG. C) 42 2 0.6 1 0.4 1 0.0 TOTAL KVA PHASE A: 1.11 TOTAL KVA PHASE B: 1.43 TOTAL KVA PHASE C: 1.21 LIGHTING (L,' RECEPTACLES (R,' A/C HEATING (H; A/C COOLING (Q KITCHEN EQUIPENT (K, LARGEST MOTOR (M; OTHER (O; CONN. LOAD (KVA) DBNA ND FACTOR DB IA ND LOAD (KVA) 2.784 1.25 3.48 0.36 NEC 0,36 0 1.00 0 0 1.00 0 0 NEC 0 0 1.25 0 0.6 1.00 0.6 NOTES: 1) PROVIDE LOCKED CIRCUIT BREAKER 2) VIA LIGHTING CONTACTOR INTERMATIC TYPE K4121 OR EQUIV. FACING NORTH. 4 #3/0, 1 #4 G, 2"C q>-4 SETS OF 4 #350MCM, #2G, EACH IN 3-1/2"C TO EXTERIOR TYPES "A" AND "D" WALL AND CANOPY LIGHTS 3 SETS OF 2#12, 1#12E.G., EACH IN 3l4"C FAULT CURRENT NOTE: FOR A 750 KVA TRANSFORMER WITH A SECONDARY SQUARE D TYPE LH40V02 OR INTERMATIC TYPE VOLTAGE OF 208 VOLTS, THE AVAILABLE SHORT-CIRCUIT EQUIV. IN NEMA 3R ENCL. ET70215CR OR EQUIV. 1200 IN NEMA 3R ENCL. 3 CURRENT IS LESS THAN 28,864 RMS SYMMETRICAL _ AMPERES AT WIREWAY B1 AND 25,212 RMS SYMMETRICAL 1200 AMPERES AT WIREWAY B2. (ASSUMES A NOMINAL 5.79% TC HOUSE WP TRANSFORMER IMPEDANCE, 105'OF SPECIFIED WP WP PANEL LIGHTNING CONDUCTORS TO WIREWAY B1,110' OF SPECIFIED HPB ARRESTOR CONDUCTORS TO WIREWAY B2, AND MOTOR WP CONTRIBUTION OF 4 TIMES RTU OVERCURRENT PROTECTION DEVICE RATING FOR ALL CONNECTED BUILDINGS.) CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ACTUAL AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT WITH THE UTILITY COMPANY. of CAP Z ABOVE GRADE 4" C (EMPTY W / PULL CORD FOR FUTURE) 4 SETS OF 4 #350MCM, EACH IN 4"C ELECTRICAL BUILDING RISER NTS 1 0.5 1 1.1 1 1.2 1 TOTAL CONNECTED KVA: 3.74 TOTAL CONNECTED AMPS: 10.39 TOTAL DEMAND KVA: 4.44 TOTAL DEMAND AMPS: 12.32 SQUARE FOOT: GENERAL LIGHTING LOAD: "LARGER A/C LOAD: 0 KVA WP PAINT ALL METERS, DISCONNECTS, AND WIREWAYS TO MATCH BUILDING EXTERIOR. (TYP.) WIREWAY 62: 8" x 8" (LENGTH AS REQUIRED) 3 SETS OF 4 #300MCM, �— -7 #2G, EACH IN 3-112"C 200 3 200 WP CAP Z ABOVE GRADE--n 4" C (EMPTY W / PULL CORD FOR FUTURE) 800 3 800 200 200 200 200 WP 3 3 3 3 LIGHTNING ARRESTOR L 200 WP 200 WP 200 WP 200 WP WP #1/0 3 SETS OF 4 #300MCM, EACH IN 4"C VA/SF 4 #3/0, 1 #4 G, 2"C 2" C (EMPTY W / PULL CORD FOR FUTURE) 4"-TO-2" REDUCER Z ABOVE GRADE (TYP.) 4" C (EMPTY W / PULL CORD FOR FUTURE) STUB -UP OOR�STOUB-UPOR�STOUB-UPOR OR STUB UP SET B4 SET B3 SET B2 SET B1 to� 0� p o V1 u /� Q{ 00 }, N M p ^�� r �o E .� o Qc0 V ct U o o I U Ln r U u U a) C 0 Q 0 V Co � co c cv "LcuMc U W -0 J U m ca neLL . a) L > w w CO cu M 1--U" ) U cn 0 E E 0 U L CIO CD co N �c� c �Z)cn0 Y U z CO w/ c`l) a (1)0 LLI Y N EL Ofa vie V _Z 0 J MD W N1 1..1_ W W L.L V Z 0 W J Q U_ L.C.. U W w J W Lu w w x U) v � v ui a \\ x p m U co >-LL Z 0 m m m M U) F- m Ix w (L 1- 9 I- w U) o o J W Q' O Z rn o ~ M to M 0 Y N o U 0 Q ��3 w~ a O U E301 BACK FLOW PREVENTER TAMPER SWITCH, ONLY IF IT REQUIRED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION REMOTE INDICATOR W / KEY RESET SHUTDOWN RELAY FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL �— PULL -STATIONS) SMOKE DETECTOR(S) PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE DETECTOR FLOW SWITCH: BY OTHERS TAMPER SWITCH: BY OTHERS I (2) HOUSE 120V FROM HOUSE PANEL PHONE LINES RTU IN 1 /2"C TO TELEPHONE BOARD 120V PLUS GRD, FROM HOUSE PANEL SD � DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR , FACP FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL IN SUPPLY DUCT DROP (TYP. FOR RTU) ❑K KNOX BOX SUPPLY FIRE ALARM RISER DIAGRAM N.T.S. 1:1 NEUTRALS 120 V TIME CLOCK PHOTO CONTROL WATER GONG (WEATHER PROOF): BY OTHERS PROVIDE 120 V. CIRCUIT SEPERATE FROM FACP LIGHTING CONTACTOR: SQUARE D TYPE LH40V02 OR EQUIV. IN NEMA 3R OR 12/3R ENCL. LIGHTING (SEE SHEET E101 FOR BLDG. C) LIGHTING (SEE SHEET E002) LIGHTING (SEE SHEET E002) LIGHTING (SEE SHEET E101 FOR BLDG. B) 2 LIGHTING CONTROL DETAIL N.T.S. 1. A MANUAL PHOTOCELL OVERRIDE SWITCH SHALL BE INCLUDED SO THAT MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL CAN EASILY OVERRIDE PHOTOCELL FOR TESTING DURING DAYLIGHT HOURS. 2. TIME CLOCK SHALL BE NON -DIGITAL TYPE (MECHANICAL CONTACTS). ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE 120 VOLT CIRCUIT FOR SMOKE DETECTORS PROVIDED BY MECHANICAL. VERIFY WITH MECH. FOR EXACT LOCATION. (TYP.) DISCONNECT 120 V WP STUB IN CEILING NEAR FUTURE PANEL LOCATION. RTU SCHEDULE 1" CONDUIT WITH PULL CORD TO REAR OF SPACE TYPE HEAT (Kw) TONS DISCONNECT CONDUIT RTU-1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 4.5 4.0 60/3/35 1" RTU-3, 9,10 9.0 5.0 60/3/50 1" RTU-11 13.5 6.0 60/3/60 1" MECH. EQUIPMENT POWER RISER DETAIL N.T.S. 1. VERIFY NAMEPLATE RATINGS, LOCATIONS, AND POINT OF POWER CONNECTIONS PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. 2. DO NOT LOCATE DISCONNECT SWITCHES OVER UNIT ACCESS PANELS. 3. PROVIDE A 3/4" EMPTY CONDUIT THROUGH INACCESSIBLE LOCATIONS (I.E. WALLS, UNDER SLAB) FOR CONTROL WIRING. COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL PLANS. 4. EQUIP. REQUIREMENTS ARE FOR MANUFACTURER AND MODEL NUMBER LISTED ON MECHANICAL PLANS. THE MECH. CONTRACTOR SHALL BARE ANY ADDITIONAL COST INCURRED IF ALTERNATE EQUIPMENT IS PROVIDED. 5. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL ALL STARTERS FURNISHED BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR AND SHALL MAKE ALL REQUIRED CONNECTIONS UNLESS STARTERS ARE SPECIFICALLY NOTED ON MECHANICAL PLANS TO BE FACTORY INSTALLED (SEE NOTE 4). TWO 3" EMF TO TELEPHI TURNED UP INSIDE. VERIFY LOCATION W/ TELEPHONE COMPANY. RUN 1" CONDUIT W/ PULL CORD TO EACH RETAIL SPACE. MAX. (2) 90 DEGREE BENDS PER RUN. RUN APPROX. 20 FT. OF #6 AWG INSULATED GROUND WIRE FROM TELEPHONE COMPANY PROTECTOR TO POWER GROUND ROD. TELEPHONE COMPANY INSTALLER TO VERIFY CONTINUITY FROM PROTECTOR TO SOURCE IF POWER GROUND SOURCE IS NOT AVAILABLE, CONSULT WITH THE TELEPHONE COMPANY REP. 4TELEPHONE TERMINAL CABINET DETAIL N.T.S. SERVICE EQUIPMENT NEUTRAL BUS BUILDING SIZE AS PER NEC STEEL 250.66 GROUNDING SIZE AS PER NEC TABLE 250.66 GROUNDING TABLE 3/4" x 20' COPPER '--SIZE AS PER NEC EQUIPMENT GROUNDING BUS UNDERGROUND METAL WATER PIPE CLAD GROUND 250.66 GROUNDING RODS. \ TABLE CONCRETE -ENCASED ELECTRODE GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR DETAIL N.T.S. 1. FULL SIZE GROUND MEANS THAT GROUND CONDUCTOR SIZE SHALL BE AS SHOWN ON SERVICE EQUIPMENT ON THE POWER RISER DIAGRAM. 2. AFTER GROUNDING SYSTEM IS INSTALLED, GROUND RESISTANCE SHALL BE MEASURED, TO ASSURE THAT GROUND VALUE OF 5 OHM MAXIMUM RESISTANCE IS ACHIEVED. IF NOT, ADDITIONAL GROUNDING SHALL BE PROVIDED TO MEET THE SPECIFIED VALUE. 3. ALL CONNECTIONS TO GROUND RODS SHALL BE EXOTHERMIC WELD CONNECTIONS. E 0 � U Y 0 0 U 0 0 CD (� 00 c cu r .L N M C ' U nm W J U w LL m 0)C6LL CD .L > W �mc� M 1-- U) J U 0 E E 0 U M N cu U) LL CD m 0 = 0 °6:EU U Lu N Q to m Y N IL 0 a �1 J_ D m vJ Q uj Q U_ Ld.. U w w J J H W w w U) w \\� N Z `v O U C.0 CL } u- ,ter O i` z 0 cn m D U) w al q w o J w o z rn o N `o Z O w U� w w �� ui E401 REFERENCES UTILIZE THE FOLLOWING ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS FOR DISCERNMENT WITHIN THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. NEC NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE 2005 OSHA OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ACT ANSI AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE NFPA NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION ASA AMERICAN STANDARDS ASSOCIATION IEEE INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS NEMA NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION UL UNDERWRITERS' LABORATORIES, INC. IES ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY ICEA INSULATED CABLE ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION ASTM AMERICAN SOCIETY OF TESTING MATERIALS ETL ELECTRICAL TESTING LABORATORIES, INC. CBM CERTIFIED BALLAST MANUFACTURERS EIA ELECTRONIC INDUSTRIES ASSOCIATION FBC FLORIDA BUILDING CODE SECTION 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS THE INTENT OF THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS IS TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE WORKING SYSTEM READY FOR THE OWNER'S OPERATION. ANY ITEM NOT SPECIFICALLY SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS OR CALLED FOR IN THE SPEC'S BUT IS NORMALLY REQUIRED TO CONFORM WITH THE INTENT, ARE TO BE CONSIDERED A PART OF THE CONTRACT. THE INTENT OF THESE DRAWINGS IS NOT TO SHOW EVERY MINOR DETAIL OF CONSTRUCTION. THE CONTRACTOR IS EXPECTED TO FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND ITEMS FOR A COMPLETE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. IF THE CONTRACTOR HAS QUESTIONS, OR IN THEIR OPINION FINDS OMISSIONS OR ERRORS ON THE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS, IT IS THEIR RESPONSIBILITY TO BRING IT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ELECTRICAL ENGINEER/ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY. IF CONTRACTOR PROCEEDS WITH ANY CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS WITHOUT WRITTEN PRIOR APPROVAL FROM THE ELECTRICAL ENGINEER/ARCHITECT THE CONTRACTOR WILL NOT BE COMPENSATED. ALL MATERIALS USED SHALL BEAR THE UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORY, INC. LABEL PROVIDED A STANDARD HAS BEEN ESTABLISHED FOR THE MATERIAL BEING USED. INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS SHALL CONFORM WITH THE LATEST EDITIONS (U.O.N.) OF THE LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES OF THE BUILDING DEPARTMENT, THE SERVING UTILITY COMPANIES, N.F.P.A., NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODES AND ORDINANCES, INCLUDING ALL AMENDMENTS TO THE N.E.C. EQUIPMENT, AND WHERE APPLICABLE, WILL BE LISTED WITH THE UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC., THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL SAFETY CODE, LIFE SAFETY CODE, AND THE OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ACT. THE WORKMANSHIP AND QUALITY ESTABLISHED BY THESE DRAWINGS AND SPEC'S SHALL NOT BE REDUCED BY THE ABOVE MENTIONED CODES. ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE EQUAL TO OR EXCEED THE MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS OF NEMA, IEEE, AND UL SHOULD ANY CHANGE TO THE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS BE REQUIRED TO COMPLY WITH GOVERNMENTAL REGULATIONS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER PRIOR TO ANY SUCH WORK BEING EXECUTED. ALL LOCAL FEES, PERMITS, AND REQUIRED INSURANCE FOR PROTECTION AGAINST PUBLIC LIABILITY OF PROPERTY DAMAGE OR THE DURATION OF THE WORK, AND SERVICES OF INSPECTION AND TESTING AUTHORITIES SHALL BE OBTAINED AND PAID FOR BY THE CONTRACTOR. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE IN HIS BID ANY COSTS TO BE INCURRED RELATIVE TO POWER SERVICE (PRIMARY AND/OR SECONDARY) AND TELEPHONE SERVICE. CONTRACTOR SHALL COOPERATE FULLY WITH THE LOCAL COMPANIES WITH RESPECT TO THEIR SERVICES. BIDDERS ARE TO SATISFY THEMSELVES AS TO THE NATURE AND SCOPE OF WORK BY VISITING THE SITE AND FAMILIARIZE THEMSELVES WITH THE EXISTING CONDITIONS. THE SUBMISSION OF A BID WILL BE EVIDENCE THAT SUCH AN EXAMINATION HAS BEEN MADE LATER CLAIMS FOR LABOR, EQUIPMENT, OR MATERIALS REQUIRED, OR FOR DIFFICULTIES ENCOUNTERED WHICH COULD HAVE BEEN FORESEEN BY AN EXAMINATION OF THE SITE PRIOR TO THE BID WILL NOT BE ALLOWED. ALL WORK TO BE PERFORMED IN A FIRST CLASS WORKMANLIKE MANNER, AND BE INSTALLED BY A LICENSED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. CERTAIN MATERIALS WILL BE PROVIDED BY OTHER TRADES. EXAMINE THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TO ASCERTAIN THESE REQUIREMENTS. CAREFULLY CHECK SPACE REQUIREMENTS WITH OTHER TRADES AND THE PHYSICAL CONFINES OF THE AREA TO INSURE THAT ALL MATERIAL CAN BE INSTALLED IN THE SPACES ALLOTTED THERETO INCLUDING FINISHED SUSPENDED CEILINGS MAKE MODIFICATIONS THERETO AS REQUIRED AND APPROVED. TRANSMIT TO OTHER TRADES ALL INFORMATION REQUIRED FOR WORK TO BE PROVIDED UNDER THEIR RESPECTIVE SEC11ONS IN AMPLE TIME FOR INSTALLATION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ORDER THE PROGRESS OF HIS WORK TO CONFORM TO THE PROGRESS OF THE WORK OF THE OTHER TRADES AND SHALL COMPLETE THE ENTIRE INSTALLATION AS SOON AS THE CONDITIONS OF THE BUILDING WALL PERMIT. ANY COST RESULTING FROM THE DEFECTIVE OF ILL-TIMED WORK PERFORMED UNDER THIS SECTION SHALL BE BORNE BY THE CONTRACTOR. ANY CORRECTIONS OF DEFECTS TO BE COMPLETED BY CONTRACTOR WITHOUT ADDITIONAL CHARGE AND TO INCLUDE REPLACEMENT OR REPAIR OF ANY OTHER PHASE OF THE INSTALLATION WHICH MAY HAVE BEEN DAMAGED THEREBY. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE TOTALLY RESPONSIBLE FOR THE SHIPPING AND STORING OF ALL PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS IN A MANNER THAT WILL PROTECT THEM FROM DAMAGE AND WEATHER. IF ITEMS ARE DAMAGED, TAKE IMMEDIATE STEPS TO OBTAIN REPLACEMENT OR REPAIR. ANY SUCH REPAIRS SHALL BE SUBJECT TO REVIEW AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR SHALL STORE MATERIALS IN SUITABLE SHELTER FROM THE ELEMENTS, BUT READILY ACCESSIBLY FOR INSPECTION BY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER UNTIL INSTALLED. STORE ALL ITEMS SUBJECT TO MOISTURE DAMAGE IN DRY, HEATED SPACES. PROVIDE SUPPORTS, HANGERS AND AUXILIARY STRUCTURAL MEMBERS REQUIRED FOR SUPPORT OF THE WORK. FURNISH AND SET ALL SLEEVES FOR PASSAGE OF RACEWAYS THROUGH STRUCTURAL MASONRY AND CONCRETE WALLS OF FLOORS AND ELSEWHERE AS WILL BE REQUIRED FOR THE PROPER PROTECTION OF EACH RACEWAY PASSING THROUGH BUILDING SURFACES. IF WALL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT IS TO BE SECURED TO WALLS THE USE OF STEEL BOLTS ARE TO BE USED TO MAINTAIN AT LEAST 1" AIR SPACE BETWEEN EQUIPMENT AND SUPPORTING WALL GROUPS OF EQUIPMENT MAY BE MOUNTED ON ADEQUATELY SIZED STEEL ANGLES, CHANNELS, OR BARS. PREFABRICATED STEEL CHANNELS PROVIDING A HIGH DEGREE OF MOUNTING FLEXIBILITY, SUCH AS THOSE MANUFACTURED BY GLOB-STRUTT, KINDORF, AND UNISTRUT, MAY BE USED FOR MOUNTING GROUPS OF EQUIPMENT. AN ACCURATE RECORD OF ALL DEVIATIONS SHALL BE KEPT AS TO THE WORK SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS AND THAT WHICH IS ACTUALLY INSTALLED SO THAT A SET OF AS BUILT DRAWINGS CAN BE MADE BY CONTRACTOR, WERE UPON COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE PROJECT BY THE OWNER, A NEAT AND LEGIBLE SET OF PRINTS CAN BE DELIVERED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL GUARANTEE ALL MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP FOR A PERIOD OF ONE (1) YEAR FROM DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE BY THE OWNER, EXCEPT THAT WHERE GUARANTEES OR WARRANTIES FOR LONGER TERMS ARE SPECIFIED. WITHIN 24 HOURS AFTER NOTIFICATION, CORRECT ANY DEFICIENCIES THAT OCCUR DURING THE GUARANTEE PERIOD AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER, ALL TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE OWNER. OBTAIN SIMILAR GUARANTEES FROM SUBCONTRACTORS, MANUFACTURERS, SUPPLIERS AND SUBTRADE SPECIALISTS. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE AT THE SITE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION WITH THE LOCAL POWER COMPANY TO RELATE WORK WITH THE UTILITY COMPANY'S RESPONSIBILITIES TO MEET THE OWNERS SCHEDULE. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE SUBMITTALS FOR SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS OR EQUIPMENT SUCH AS SITE LIGHTING, LIGHT FIXTURES, SWITCHGEAR, WIRING DEVICES, EMERGENCY GENERATOR/TRANSFER EQUIPMENT, AND ALL SYSTEMS (FIRE ALARM, SECURITY ETC.) TEN (10) DAYS PRIOR TO BID DATE (TWO COPIES) FOR ENGINEER'S APPROVAL TO SUBMIT. ENGINEER'S APPROVAL OF THE PRIOR APPROVAL PACKAGE WILL BE CONSIDERED PRELIMINARY. FINAL APPROVAL WALL BE CONTINGENT UPON REVIEW OF FINAL SHOP DRAWINGS. ALL PROPOSED ALTERNATES MUST BE INDUSTRY STANDARD EQUALS TO THE ITEMS SPECIFIED AS THE BASIS OF DESIGN; HOWEVER, IF THE ITEMS ARE NOT CONSIDERED EQUAL BY THE ENGINEER, IT SHALL BE DISAPPROVED FOR FINAL SUBMITTAL IF ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR/GENERAL CONTRACTOR DOES NOT SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS TO THE ELECTRICAL ENGINEER FOR ITEMS LISTED ABOVE, ELECTRICAL ENGINEER WILL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY AND OR OMISSIONS OR ERRORS DUE TO SHOP DRAWINGS NOT SUBMITTED. SHOP DRAWINGS WALL ONLY BE REVIEWED TWICE AS PART OF THIS CONTRACT. ADDITIONAL SHOP DRAWING REVIEWS SHALL BE INVOICED AT $85.00 PER HOUR, BILLABLE TO THE SUB -CONTRACTOR, C.O.D. ALTERNATE SITE FIXTURES SHALL INCLUDE A COMPUTER GENERATED POINT-TO-POINT PHOTOMETRIC CALCULATION BASED ON THE PLANS (FIXTURE CHARACTERISTICS AND POLE PLACEMENT SHALL NOT BE ALTERED). THIS DIAGRAM SHALL SHOW COMPOSITE VALUES OF THE ILLUMINANCE PROJECTED FROM THE ARRANGEMENT OF LIGHT SOURCES AS SHOWN ON PLAN. COMPUTER PLOT DIAGRAM SHALL ALSO SHOW THE LOCATIONS OF THE POLES, SPACING BETWEEN POLES, THE MOUNTING HEIGHT USED IN THE CALCULATIONS, AND THE FIXTURE CATALOG NUMBER BEING USED. A COMPLETE SET OF CONTRACT DRAWINGS SHALL BE MAINTAINED AT THE JOB SITE WITH COLORED MARKINGS INDICATING PROGRESS OR WORK. THIS SET OF CONTRACT DRAWINGS IS TO BE SEPARATE FROM AND IN ADDITION TO CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SET. EVERY UNIT OF EQUIPMENT, DEVICE, CONDUIT AND WIRE IS TO BE MARKED WHEN INSTALLED. USE GREEN TO INDICATE INSTALLATION AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS AND USE RED TO INDICATED FIELD CHANGES. UPON COMPLETION OF WORK, THIS SET OF CONTRACT DRAWINGS IS TO BE TURNED OVER TO, AND BECOME PROPERTY OF THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. THE OWNER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THE DRAWINGS FROM TIME TO TIME TO INDICATE CHANGES IN THE WORK. WHEN REVISED DRAWINGS AND/OR ANY REVISIONS ARE ISSUED, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL EVALUATE THE CHANGES PROMPTLY. BEFORE INSTALLATION OF ANY ITEM OR PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK INDICATED BY THE REVISED DRAWING OR REVISIONS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER IN WRITING THAT THE REVISED DRAWINGS INVOLVE AN ADDITION OR DEDUCTION OF A SPECIFIC AMOUNT OF MONEY TO THE CONTRACT PRICE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT PROCEED WITH THE REVISED WORK WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL BY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER/OWNER OF THE COST OF THE REVISED WORK. ALL LOAD DATA HAS BEEN BASED ON INFORMATION GIVEN ENGINEER/ARCHITECT AT THE TIME OF DESIGN. VERIFY ALL EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE RATINGS BEFORE ORDERING. FURNISH AND INSTALL DISCONNECT SWITCHES, WIRING AND CONNECTIONS ON AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS AS SHOWN ON PLANS. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY AND COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR REGARDING SUPPLY AND INSTALLA1ION OF ALL REQUIRED CONTROLS. SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS AND BOXES STANDARDS EXCEPT AS MODIFIED BY GOVERNING CODES AND BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, COMPLY WITH THE LATEST APPLICABLE PROVISIONS AND LATEST RECOMMENDATIONS OF THE FOLLOWING: 1. RIGID STEEL CONDUIT a U.L STANDARD UL-6 b A.N.S.I. C80-1 c FEDERAL SPECIFICATION WW-C-581E Y. INTERMEDIATE METALLIC CONDUIT a U.L STANDARD UL-1242 b FEDERAL SPECIFICATION WW-C-581E 3. ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING a) U.L STANDARD UL-797] b)) A.N.S.I. C80-3 c FEDERAL SPECIFICATION WW-C-563 4. FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT a) U.L STANDARD UL-1 5. LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT a) U.L STANDARD UL-360 6. NON-METALLIC CONDUIT a U.L STANDARD UL-651 b A.N.S.I. STANDARD F512 c N.EM.A. STANDARD TC-2 d FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS GSA-FSS AND W-C-1094-A . WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS a) U.L STANDARD UL-870 DO NOT USE ALUMINUM CONDUIT FOR ANY PURPOSES. SPECIFICATIONS HAVE BEEN WRITTEN WITH THE INTENT OF VARIOUS EQUIPMENT SING INSTALLED. NOT ALL EQUIPMENT MAY BE REQUIRED ON THIS PROJECT. RENEW POWER, LIGHTING PLANS AND DETAILS FOR ITEMS AND/OR EQUIPMENT THAT WILL APPLY TO THIS PROJECT. RACEWAY TYPES STANDARD THREADED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT. 1. RIGID CONDUIT HEAVY WALL GALVANIZED. 2. THREADED TYPE FITTINGS: ERICKSON COUPLINGS WHERE THREADED CANNOT BE USED. INTERMEDIATE METALLIC CONDUIT 1. LIGHT WEIGHT RIGID STEEL CONDUIT. 2. THREADED TYPE FITTINGS: ERICKSON COUPLINGS WHERE THREADED CANNOT BE USED. ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING 1. CONTINUOUS, SEAMLESS TUBING, GALVANIZED OR SHERADIZED ON THE EXTERIOR, COATED ON THE INTERIOR WITH A SMOOTH HARD FINISH OF LACQUER, VARNISH, OR ENAMEL 2. COUPLINGS AND CONNECTORS: a)) INDOOR AND TWO (2") INCHES IN SIZE AND SMALLER, SHALL BE STEEL SET -SCREW TYPE FITTINGS. b) 2 1/2" SIZE AND LARGER MUST EMPLOY STEEL COMPRESSION GLAND FITTINGS. c)) OUTDOOR SHALL BE RAINTIGHT STEEL COMPRESSION GLAND FITTINGS. 3. INDENT TYPE FITTINGS SHALL NOT BE USED. 4. ALL CONNECTORS SHALL HAVE INSULATED THROAT. 5. WHERE INSTALLED IN SLAB OR CONCRETE WORK, PROVIDE APPROVED CONCRETE TIGHT FITTINGS. FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT 1. SINGLE STRIP, CONTINUOUS, FLEXIBLE INTERLOCKED, DOUBLE -WRAPPED STEEL, GALVANIZED INSIDE AND OUTSIDE, FORMING SMOOTH INTERNAL WIRING CHANNEL 2. MAXIMUM LENGTH: (SIX 6) FEET. 3. EACH SECTION OF RACEWAY MUST CONTAIN AN EQUIPMENT GROUNDING WARE BONDED AT EACH END AND SIZED AS REQUIRED. PROVIDE CONNECTORS WITH INSULATING BUSHINGS. 4. STEEL SQUEEZE -TYPE OR STEEL SET SCREW TYPE FITTINGS. LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE ELECTRICAL CONDUIT 1. SAME AS FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT EXCEPT WITH TOUGH, INSERT WATER -TIGHT PLASTIC OUTER JACKET. 2. CAST MALLEABLE IRON BODY AND GLAND NUT, CADMIUM PLATED WITH ONE-PIECE BRASS GROUNDING BUSHINGS WHICH TREAD TO INTERIOR OF CONDUIT. SPIRAL MOLDED VINYL SEALING RING BETWEEN GLAND NUT AND BUSHING AND NYLON INSULATED THROAT. NON-MATALUC RACEWAY 1. COMPOSED OF POLYVINYL CHLORIDE SUITABLE FOR 90 DEGREES C. 2. RACEWAY, FITTINGS, AND CEMENT MUST BE PRODUCED BY THE SAME MANUFACTURER WHO MUST HAVE HAD A MINIMUM OF TEN (10) YEARS EXPERIENCE IN MANUFACTURING THE PRODUCTS 3. MATERIALS MUST HAVE A TENSILE STRENGTH OF 7,000-7.200 PSI AT 73.4 DEGREES F., FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF 12,000 PSI AND COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF 9,000 PSI. 4. ALL JOINTS SHALL BE SOLVENT CEMENTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE RECOMMENDATIONS OF THE MANUFACTURER. ALL UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 3/4" GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT OR SCHEDULE 40 PVC. ALL OTHER RACEWAYS TO COMPLY WITH GOVERNING CODES. WHERE RIGID STEEL CONDUIT IS USED, IT SHALL BE COMPLETELY COATED WITH AN ALKALI AND RUST RESISTANT BITUMASTIC PAINT, KOPPER NO. 50, AND THREADS SHALL BE COATED WITH ZINC CHROMATE. RIGID STEEL SHALL ALSO BE USED WHEN CONDUIT IS EXPOSED TO EXTERIOR ENVIRONMENT SUCH AS EXTERIOR OF BUILDING OR WHERE IT IS EXPOSED AND SUBJECT TO DAMAGE, INSIDE OF BUILDING. ALL BOXES SHALL BE RECESSED (FLUSH) IN WALLS OR CEILINGS WHENEVER POSSIBLE RACEWAYS IN HUNG CEILING SHALL BE RUN ON AND SECURED TO SLAB OR PRIMARY STRUCTURAL MEMBERS OF CEILING, NOT TO LATHING CHANNELS OR T-BARS, Z-BARS, OR OTHER ELEMENTS WHICH ARE THE DIRECT SUPPORTS OF THE CEILING PANELS. SECURE CONDUIT FIRMLY TO STEEL BY CUPS AND FITTINGS DESIGNED FOR THAT PURPOSE. INSTALL AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE BUT NOT LESS THAN 1'-0' ABOVE HUNG CEILINGS. SUPPORT RACEWAYS AT INTERVALS NO GREATER THAN TEN (10) FEET AND WITH ONE SUPPORT WITHIN THREE (3) FEET OF EACH COUPLING, BOX, FITTING, OR OUTLET BOX. PROVIDE ONE SUPPORT WITHIN THREE (3) FEET OF EACH ELBOW OR BEND. OUTLET, JUNCTION, AND PULL BOXES CAST TYPE CONDUIT BOXES, OUTLET BODIES AND FITTINGS 1. PROVIDE SURFACE MOUNTED OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES, IN INDOOR LOCATIONS, WHERE EXPOSED TO MOISTURE AND IN OUTDOOR LOCATIONS. 2. USE FERROUS ALLOY BOXES AND CONDUIT BODIES WITH RIGID STEEL OR IMC. 3. COVERS: CAST OR SHEET METAL UNLESS OTHERWISE REQUIRED. 4. TAPERED THREADS FOR HUBS. GALVANIZED PRESSED STEEL OUTLET BOXES 1. GENERAL a) PRESSED STEEL, GALVANIZED OR CADMIUM -PLATED, MINIMUM OF FOUR (4") INCHES, OCTAGONAL OR SQUARE, WITH GALVANIZED COVER OR EXTENSION RING AS REQUIRED. 2. SWITCH AND RECEPTACLE BOX, INDOORS a) NOMINAL FOUR (4') INCH SQUARE, 1-1/2' OR 2-1/8" DEEP AS REQUIRED, WITH RAISED COVER UNLESS OTHERWISE INCITED I ON DRAWINGS. GANGABLE BOXES SHALL NOT BE USED. INDICATED 3. TELEPHONE OUTLET BOX, INDOORS a) NOMINAL FOUR (4") INCH SQUARE, 2-1/8' DEEP, WITH RAISED COVER UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED ON DRAWINGS, GANGABLE BOXES SHALL NOT BE USED. 4. LIGHTING FIXTURE BOX a FOUR (4") INCH OCTAGON WITH 3/8' FIXTURE STUD. b) FOR SUSPENDED CEILING WORK, FOUR (4') INCH OCTAGON WITH REMOVABLE BACKPLATE WHERE REQUIRED, AND TWO (2) PARALLEL BARS FOR SECURING TO THE CROSS -FURRING CHANNELS AND EXTEND FLEXIBLE CONDUIT TO EACH FIXTURE. 5. PLUG ANY OPEN KNOCKOUTS NOT UTILIZED. BACK-TO-BACK OUTLETS IN THE SAME WALL, OR "THRU-WALL" TYPE BOXES ARE NOT PERMITTED. PROVIDE TWELVE (12') INCHES (MINIMUM) SPACING FOR OUTLETS SHOWN ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF A COMMON WALL TO MINIMIZE SOUND TRANSMISSION. PROVIDE TWENTY FOUR (24') INCH (MINIMUM) HORIZONTAL SPACING FOR OUTLETS SHOWN ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF A FIRE RATED WALL TO MAINTAIN FIRE RATING. ALL ELECTRICAL CONDUCTORS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN AN APPROVED RACEWAY, EMT, IMC, RIGID GALVANIZED CONDUIT OR SCHED. 40 P.V.C. THERE SHALL BE NO TYPE NM, MC, ELECTRICAL NON-MATALUC TUBING, AND FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT USED FOR BRANCH CIRCUITING. MAXIMUM NUMBER OF 120V CIRCUITS ALLOWED IN A COMMON CONDUIT SHALL BE SIX (6). THE CONTRACTOR SHALL STRICTLY CONFORM TO THE N.E.C. REQUIREMENTS OF DERATING FOR CONDUCTOR AMPACITY AND CONDUIT FILL NO CONDUITS SHALL BE INSTALLED EXPOSED ON ROOF. SECTION 16120 WIRE AND CABLE PRODUCTS CONDUCTOR 1. ELECTRICAL GRADE ANNEALED COPPER, TINNED IF RUBBER INSULATED, AND FABRICATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM STANDARDS. MINIMUM SIZE #12 FOR BRANCH CIRCUITS AND #14 FOR CONTROL RARING. 2. THE CONDUCTORS ILLUSTRATED ON THE DRAWINGS ARE COPPER. STRANDING 1. #12 AND #10 SOLID. 2. CABLES LARGER THAN #10, STRANDED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM CLASS B STRANDING DESIGNATIONS. 3. CONTROL WIRES STRANDED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM CLASS B STRANDING DESIGNATIONS INSULATED SINGLE CONDUCTORS 1. TYPE TIHHN/THWN - FLAME RETARDANT. HEAT -RESISTANT THERMOPLASTIC INSULATION. NYLON JACKET RATED FOR 90 C DRY/75C WET OPERATION. USE FOR BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING. 2. USE TYPE THHN/THWN OR RHW OR XHHW, RATED FOR 90 C. FOR FEEDER CIRCUITS. COLOR CODING 1. PROVIDE CONSISTENT COLOR CODING OF ALL CIRCUITS AS FOLLOWS: a) 0/2PHASE A C ODE 1) BLACK ti) PHASE B - RED iii) PHASE C -BLUE T l NEUTRAL - WHITE v) GROUND -GREEN b) 277/480 VOLT CODE 1) PHASE A - BROWN III) PHASE B - ORANGE TII PHASE C - YELLOW iv NEUTRAL - WHITE v) GROUND - GREEN 2. COLOR -CODE WIRING FOR CONTROL SYSTEMS INSTALLED IN CONJUNCTION WITH MECHANICAL AND/OR - MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE WIRING DIAGRAMS FURNISHED WITH THE EQUIPMENT. FACTORY COLOR CODE WIRE NUMBER 6 AND SMALLER. WIRE NUMBER 4 AND LARGER MAY BE COLOR CODED BY COLOR TAPPING OF THE ENTIRE LENGTH OF THE EXPOSED ENDS. CONNECTORS 1. MAKE CONNECTIONS, SPLICES, AND TAPS AND JOINTS WITH SOLDERLESS DEVICES, MECHANICALLY AND ELECTRICALLY SECURE PROTECT EXPOSED WIRES AND CONNECTING DEVICES WITH ELECTRICAL TAPE OR INSULATION TO PROVIDE PROTECTION NOT LESS THAN THAT OF THE CONDUCTOR. 2. ELECTRICAL TAPE SHALL BE SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED FOR USE AS INSULATING TAPE SUPER 33+ SCOTCH VINYL ELECTRICAL TAPE AS MANUFACTURED BY 3M SHALL BE EQUAL 3. USE LUBRICANT WHERE THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE TO CONDUCTORS EXISTS. USE ONLY A LUBRICANT APPROVED BY THE CABLE MANUFACTURER AND ONE WHICH IS COMPATIBLE WITH CABLE AND RACEWAYS. EXECUTION WIRE AND CABLE 1. USE #12 AWG MINIMUM FOR BRANCH CIRCUITS WHOSE LENGTH FROM THE PANEL TO FURTHEST OUTLET DOES NOT EXCEED 100 FEET (HORIZONTAL RUN) FOR 120-VOLT CIRCUITS OR 200 FEET FOR 277-VOLT CIRCUITS. USE #10 AWG OR LARGER FOR LONGER RUNS. 0 THAT 0 TH T F 2. FLASHOVER OR INSULATION VALUE OF JOINTS SHALL BE EQUAL T E CONDUCTOR. PROVIDE UNDERWRITERS' LABORATORIES LISTED CONNECTORS RATED TO 600 VOLTS FOR GENERAL USE AND 1,000 VOLTS FOR USE BETWEEN BALLASTS AND LAMPS OR GASEOUS DISCHARGE FIXTURES. 3. USE TERMINATING FITTINGS, CONNECTORS, ETC., OF A TYPE SUITABLE FOR THE SPECIFIED CABLE FURNISHED. MAKE BENDS IN CABLE AT TERMINATION PRIOR TO INSTALLING COMPRESSION DEVICE MAKE FITTINGS TIGHT. 4. EXTEND WIRE SIZING FOR THE ENTIRE LENGTH OF A CIRCUIT, FEEDER, ETC. UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE GENERAL INSTALLATION 1. PROVIDE TOOLS, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIALS TO PULL ALL WARE AND CABLE INTO PLACE AND TO MAKE REQUIRED SPLICES AND TERMINATION. 2. WIRE AND CABLE IN CONDUIT, DUCT OR WIREWAY a UTIUZE ROLLER BEARING SWIVEL TO PREVENT TWISTING OF CABLE ENTERING CONDUIT OR DUCT. b TAKE PRECAUTIONS TO AVOID ENTRANCE OF DIRT AND WATER INTO CONDUIT AND DUCTS. c CLEAN EXISTING CONDUITS AND DUCTS TO REMOVE ANY PULLING COMPOUND PRIOR TO PULLING NEW CABLES. d DO NOT DAMAGE CONDUCTOR INSULATION, BRAID JACKET OR SHEATH. e DO NOT BEND CONDUCTOR TO LESS THAN MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED RADUIS. MAKE SPLICES ONLY IN PULL BOXES, JUNCTION BOXES AND OUTLET BOXES. g) UTILIZE CABLE REELS ON JACKS FOR PULLING THROUGH PULL BOXES, DUCTS AND CONDUITS SO BENDS WILL NOT BE EXCESSIVE AND CONDUCTORS WILL NOT TOUCH SHARP EDGES; USE FEEDING TUBE WHERE REQUIRED. h) FOR LARGE DIAMETER CABLES, UTILIZE PROPERLY SIZED PULLING GRIPS. I) DO NOT EXCEED MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED PULLING TENSION OF WIRE AND CABLE FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. TEST SYSTEM WIRING FOR CONTINUITY, GROUNDS AND SHORT CIRCUITS PRIOR TO CONNECTION OF ANY EQUIPMENT. 2. TEST FINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS FOR CONTINUITY OF GROUNDS AND SHORT CIRCUITS. 3. INSULATION RESISTANCE OF FEEDERS AND SUBFEEDERS. a) TEST WITH MEGGER FOR INSULATION RESISTANCE b CORRECT FAULTS AND REPLACE SECTIONS WITH FAULTY INSULATION. c DEMONSTRATE INSTALLATION IS FREE OF GROUNDS AND SHORT CIRCUITS AND THAT INSULATION RESISTANCE COMPLIES WITH ICEA VALUES 4. TEST DIRECT BURIAL CABLES AFTER COMPLETION OF BACKFIWNG. SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES EXECUTION SWITCHES 1. PROVIDE SPECIFICATION GRADE, FLUSH MOUNTING, QUIET -OPERATING AC TYPE, WITH TOGGLE OPERATOR, HEAT -RESISTANT PLASTIC HOUSING AND SELF GROUNDING METAL STRAP. SILVER OR SILVER ALLOY CONTACT. DESIGN FOR SIDE OR BACK WIRING WITH UP TO NUMBER 10 WIRE. VERIFIED BY UL TO MEET OR EXCEED FEDERAL SPECIFICATION WS-896E. USE SINGLE -POLE, DOUBLE -POLE, 3-WAY, 4-WAY, LIGHTED, PILOT OR KEYED TYPE, AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS OR REQUIRED. PROVIDE IVORY COLOR UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 2. WHERE SWITCHES ARE INDICATED TO BE INSTALLED NEAR DOORS, CORNER WALLS, ETC. MOUNT SAME NOT LESS THAN 2" AND NOT MORE THAN 18" FROM TRIM. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION WITH THE ARCHITECT. 3. CAREFULLY COORDINATE THE LOCATION OF SWITCHES TO INSURE LOCATIONS AT THE STRIKE SIDE OF DOORS. 4. FURNISH AND INSTALL AN ENGRAVED LEGEND FOR EACH SWITCH THAT CONTROLS EXHAUST FANS, MOTORS, EQUIPMENT SYSTEMS, ETC., NOT LOCATED WITHIN SIGHT OF THE CONTROLLING SWITCH. RECEPTACLES 1. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, MOUNT RECEPTACLE VERTICALLY WITH U-SHAPED GROUND POSITION ON BOTTOM. ALL GENERAL PURPOSE SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES SHALL BE THE PRODUCT OF A SINGLE MANUFACTURER. CATALOG NUMBERS LISTED ARE LEVITON: HOWEVER, COMPARABLE DEVICES BY PASS & SEYMOUR. BRYANT, OR ARROW HART WILL BE ACCEPTED. COLOR OF DEVICES AND PLATES SHALL BE DICTATED BY ARCHITECT/OWNER. A. SWITCHES: LEVITON ¢CS81-201 B. RECEPTACLES: LEVITON #BR20-1 C. COVER PLATES: SMOOTH PLASTIC NOTE: ALL OTHER REQUIRED DEVICES SHALL MATCH IN COLOR AND STYLE. GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTERS 1. SWAB ALL CONDUITS CLEAR OF MOISTURE 2. DO NOT COMBINE G.F.I. PROTECTED CIRCUITS WITH OTHER CIRCUITS IN SAME RACEWAY. 3. LIMIT MAXIMUM NUMBER OF G.F.I. PROTECTED CIRCUITS IN ANY ONE RACEWAY TO A MAXIMUM OF ONE CIRCUIT. 4. GFCI DEVICES SHALL BE ARRANGED TO BE EASILY LOCATED a) LABEL DOWNSTREAM RECEPTACLES TO INDICATE THE GFCI LOCATION WHERE RECEPTACLES ARE MORE THAN 20' FROM THE GFCI DEVICE. b) GFCI DEVICES LOCATED IN RESTROOMS SHALL NOT FEED THROUGH TO PROTECT DEVICES IN OTHER ROOMS. SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS NAMEPLATES 1. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, NAMEPLATES SHALL BE BLACK LAMACOID PLATES WITH WHITE ENGRAVED UPPER CASE LETTERS ENCLOSED BY WHITE BORDER ON BEVELED EDGES. 2. NAMEPLATES FOR EQUIPMENT, SUPPLIED BY THE EMERGENCY SYSTEM, SHALL BE RED LAMACOID WITH WHITE LETTERING. 3. ALL NAMEPLATES SHALL BE ENGRAVED AND MUST BE SECURED WITH RIVETS, BRASS OR CADMIUM PLATE SCREWS. THE USE OF DYMO TAPE OR THE LIKE IS UNACCEPTABLE CABLE TAGS AND WIRE IDENTIFICATION LABELS 1. CABLE TAGS SHALL BE FLAMEPROOF SECURED WITH NYLON TIES. 2. WIRE MARKERS SHALL BE PREPRINGTED CLOTH TAPE TYPE OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT. 3. LABEL DESIGNATIONS, NOMINAL SYSTEM VOLTAGES APPLIED TO THE COVERS OF ALL MEDIUM AND LOW VOLTAGE PULL, SPLICE AND JUNCTION BOXES. EXECUTION SWITCHBOARDS. 1. FURNISH AND INSTALL AMASTER NAMEPLATE FOR EACH SWITCHBOARD, ENGRAVED WITH THEEQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. MOUNT AT TOP OF INCOMING SECTION. 2. PROVIDE ON EACH MAIN SWITCH AN IDENTIFYING NAMEPLATE PANELBOARDS 1. FURNISH AND INSTALL A NAMEPLATE FOR EACH PANELBOARD AND LOAD CENTER ENGRAVED WITH THE IDENTIFICATION INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. MOUNT AT TOP OF PANEL DISCONNECT SWITCHES 1. FURNISH AND INSTALL A NAMEPLATE FOR EACH DISCONNECT SWITCH ENGRAVED WITH EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION WHICH THE DISCONNECT SERVES. SECTION 16431 SWITCHBOARDS PRODUCTS APPROVED MANUFACTURERS 1. ALL SWITCHBOARDS ARE TO BE OF THE SAME MANUFACTURER AS THE PANELBOARDS 2. SUBJECT TO COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS, PROVIDE PRODUCTS BY ONE OF THE FOLLOWING MANUFACTURERS: a SQUARE D b CUTLER -HAMMER c GENERAL ELECTRIC d SIEMENS ITE RATINGS 1. THE ASSEMBLY SHALL BE RATED TO WITHSTAND MECHANICAL FORCES EXERTED DURING SHORT CIRCUIT CONDITIONS WHEN CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO A POWER SOURCE HAVING AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. ENCLOSURES 1. PROVIDE NEMA 1 ENCLOSURES WHERE LOCATED INDOORS IN DRY LOCATIONS. 2. PROVICE NEMA 3R ENCLOSURES WHERE LOCATED OUTDOORS AND LOCATIONS SUBJECT TO THE ELEMENTS. FINISH 1. ALL EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR STEEL SURFACES OF THE SWITCHBOARD SHALL BE PROPERLY CLEANED AND PROVIDED WITH A RUST -INHIBITING PHOSPHATIZED COATING. COLOR AND FINISH OF INDOOR SWITCHBOARDS SHALL BE ANSI 61 LIGHT GRAY. 2. OUTDOOR SWITCHBOARD SHALL BE PAINTED TO MATCH THE BUILDING. SECTION 16450 GROUNDING SUBMTTALS 1. SUBMIT TEST REPORTS CERTIFYING RESISTANCE VALUES FOR BURIED OR DRIVEN GROUNDS AND WATER PIPE GROUNDS. PRODUCTS MATERIALS 1. GROUND CABLES: GREEN COLOR CODED, INSULATED, ANNEALED STRANDED TINNED COPPER WIRE AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. 2. GROUND RODS: a) COPPER -CLAD STEEL FABRICATED BY MOLTEN WELDING PROCESS. b DIAMETER: 5/8 INCH. USE 3/4 INCH FOR ROCKY SOIL c LENGTH: 10 FEET. GENERAL 1. ALL GROUND WARES AND BONDING JUMPERS SHALL BE STRANDED COPPER INSTALLED IN CONDUIT. ALL GROUND WIRES SHALL BE WITHOUT JOINTS AND SPLICES OVER ITS ENTIRE LENGTH. 2. THE SYSTEM NEUTRAL SHALL BE GROUNDED AT THE SERVICE ENTRANCE ONLY, AND KEPT ISOLATED FOR GROUNDING SYSTEMS THROUGHOUT THE BUILDING. 3. EACH SYSTEM OF CONTINUOUS METALLIC PIPING AND DUCTWORK SHALL BE GROUNDED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE. 4. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE BONDED TO THE BUILDING DQUIPMENT GROUNDING SYSTEM. THIS SHALL INCLUDE BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO, FANS, PUMPS, CHILLERS, ETC. 5. PVC CONDUITS AND PORTIONS OF METALLIC PIPING AND DUCT SYSTEMS WHICH ARE ISOLATED BY FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS, INSULATED COUPLINGS, ETC., SHALL BE BONDED TO THE EQUIPMENT GROUND WITH A FLEXIBLE BONDING JUMPER, OR SEPARATE GROUNDING CONDUCTOR. SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS 1. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS AND SHALL BE GROUNDED TO BUILDING STEEL, COLD WATER PIPES, ETC., OR AN ALTERNATE GROUNDING MEANS. 2. A SEPARATE, GREEN TYPE THW COPPER GROUND CONDUCTOR SHALL BE RUN FROM GROUND LUG OF EACH GROUNDED RECEPTACLE TO AN APPROVED CONNECTION INSIDE THE ENCLOSING STEEL OUTLET BOX. DEVICE MOUNTING SCREWS SHALL NOT BE CONSIDERED AN APPROVED GROUND. 3. A SEPARATE GROUND CONDUCTOR SHALL BE INSTALLED IN EVERY CONDUIT AND RACEWAY AND SECURELY BONDED IN AS APPROVED GROUNDING TERMINAL AT BOTH ENDS OF THE RUN. THE GROUNDING CONDUCTOR SHALL BE SIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITH TABLE 250 OF THE N.E.C.. CONTRACTOR SHALL SIZE CONDUIT TO ACCOMMODATE ADDITIONAL CONDUCTOR. ISOLATED GROUND RECEPTACLES 1. ISOLATED GROUND RECEPTACLES GROUND LUG SHALL NOT BE CONNECTED TO THE RESPECTIVE OUTLET BOXES. 2. PROVIDE INSULATED GROUND WIRE FOR EACH ISOLATED GROUND RECEPTACLE. GROUND WIRE SHALL SERVE ONLY THOSE RECEPTACLES WHICH ARE ISOLATED. ROUTE GROUND CONDUCTOR TOGETHER WITH PHASE AND NEUTRAL CONDUCTORS IN A COMMON RACEWAY. 3. TERMINATE ISOLATED GROUND WIRE AT THE GROUND FROM THE SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEM SERVING THE RECEPTACLES. GROUND CONDUCTORS 1. SIZE AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS OR AS REQUIRED BY NA11ONAL ELECTRICAL CODE SECTION 16460 NOT USED ON THIS PROJECT PANELBOARDS GENERAL 1. ALL SWITCHGEAR, PANELS, STARTERS, CONTACTORS ETC., SHALL BE THE PRODUCT OF A SINGLE MANUFACTURER, THE SYSTEM DESIGN IS BASED ON SQUARE "D"; HOWEVER, COMPARABLE EQUIPMENT BY G.E., & SEIMENS ONLY WALL BE ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATES. TANDEM AND HALF -SPACE CIRCUIT BREAKERS SHALL NOT BE USED. 2. ALL ELECTRICAL PANELS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS ARE DESIGNED AND SERIES RATED, AS PER SQUARE 'D" SPECIFICATIONS. IF AN ALTERNATE MANUFACTURER IS SUBSTITUTED, IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROPERLY SERIES RATE ALL PANELS. 3. TYPEWRITTEN CIRCUIT INDEX SHALL BE AFFIXED TO INSIDE SURFACE OF EACH PANELBOARD DOOR, CLEARLY INDICATING AREA AND TYPE OF LOAD SERVED BY EACH BRANCH CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICE, INCLUDING SPARES. HAND PRINTED WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED. 4. ENGRAVED, LAMINATED PLASTIC IDENTIFICATION PLATES SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED ON ALL PANELS AND SWITCHGEAR. PLATES SHALL BE AFFIXED TO FRONT OF PANELS, INDICATING PANEL NAME, VOLTAGE AND AMPERAGE. EXECUTION INSTALLATION 1. MOUNT ALL PANELS AT A MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF 6 FEET 6 INCHES TO TOP UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 2. WHERE FLUSHED MOUNTED, THE FIRE INTEGRITY OF THE WALL IN WHICH IT IS INSTALLED MUST BE MAINTAINED. 3. NEATLY ARRANGE BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRES AND TIE TOGETHER IN EACH GUTTER WITH THOMAS & BETTS NYLON 'TY-RAPS', OR APPROVED EQUAL AT MINIMUM 4 INCH INTERVALS. 4. PLUG ALL KNOCKOUTS REMOVED AND NOT UTILIZED. 5. PROVIDE NAMEPLATE AND FILL OUT PANEL DIRECTORY. FOR REMODAL WORK OR CHANGES, TRACE CIRCUITS TO DETERMINE LOADS AND PROVIDE NEW UPDATED DIRECTORY. TOUCH UP AND CLEANING 1. VACUUM ALL BACKBOXES CLEAN OF DEBRIS AFTER INSTALLATION AND PRIOR TO CONTRACT CLOSEOUT. 2. TOUCH UP SCRATCH MARKS, ETC. WITH MATCHING PAINT. SECTION 16475 FUSES 600V AND LESS GENERAL 1. ALL FUSES FOR SAFETY SWITCHES SHALL BE DUAL ELEMENT, CARTRIDGE TYPE. FUSES SHALL BE THOSE MANUFACTURED BY EITHER BUSSMAN OR UTTLEFUSE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH TO THE OWNER ONE SPARE FUSE FOR EACH SIZE AND TYPE OF FUSE INSTALLED. FUSES 600 AMPS OR LESS SHALL BE CLASS RK1, TYPICAL UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. FUSES OVER 600 AMPS SHALL BE CLASS 'L'. INSTALLATION 1. FUSES SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED UNTIL EQUIPMENT IS READY TO BE ENERGIZED. 2. PROVIDE AND INSTALL FUSES OF PROPER TYPE, VOLTAGE AND AMPERE RATINGS FOR ALL FUSIBLE DEVICES FURNISHED. 3. LABELS a) APPLY APPROPRIATE LABEL WITHIN EACH SWITCH, MOTOR STARTER, OR PANEL BOARD DOOR OR AT LOCATION NEXT TO FUSE CUPS, WHERE FUSES SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THIS CONTRACTOR. FILL-IN IN INK BLANK SPACES ON LABELS FOR NON-STANDARD FUSES WITH APPROPRIATE FUSE DATA. SECTION 16476 DISCONNECT SWITCHES GENERAL 1. DISCONNECT SWITCHES SHALL BE H.P. RATED, GENERAL DUTY, QUICK -MAKE, QUICK -BREAK TYPE. ENCLOSURES SHALL BE AS REQUIRED BY N.E.C. AND LOCATION (WEATHERPROOF, EXPLOSIONS PROOF, ETC.). ENGRAVED LAMINATED PLASTIC IDENTIFICATION PLATES SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED ON ALL DISCONNECT SWITCHES, CONTACTORS AND STARTERS. SECTION 16500 LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES PRODUCTS LUMINAIRES 1. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ARE LISTED IN THE LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. 2. THE DESIGNATIONS INDICATED ON THE LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE ARE A DESIGN SERIES REFERENCE (NOT NECESSARILY A COMPLETE CATALOG NUMBER) AND DO NOT NECESSARILY REPRESENT THE NUMBER, SIZE, VOLTAGE, WATTAGE, TYPE OF LAMP, BALLAST, FINISH TRIM, CEILING TYPE, MOUNTING HARDWARE OF SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS AS SPECIFIED HEREINAFTER ON AS REQUIRED BY THE PARTICULAR INSTALLATION(S) AND CODE. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THESE REQUIREMENTS AND OTHER FIXTURES AS REQUIRED TO GIVE PROPER INSTALLATION PER THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND PER CODES. BALLASTS 1. IT IS PREFERRED THAT ALL BALLASTS SHALL BE OF THE SAME MANUFACTURER. EVERY EFFORT SHALL BE MADE TO ELIMINATE BALLASTS FROM MULTIPLE MANUFATURERS. BALLASTS WITHIN LUMINAIRES OF A GIVEN TYPE MUST HOWEVER BE OF THE SAME MANUFACTURER. MULTIPLE MANUFACTURERS WILL NOT BE PERMITTED. 2. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS. a) GENERAL ELECTRIC b MOTOROLA c MAGNETEK FABRICATION 1. PROVIDE LUMINAIRES, COMPLETE FACTORY -ASSEMBLED AND WIRED AND EQUIPPED WITH NECESSARY SOCKETS, BALLASTS, WIRING, REFLECTORS, CHANNELS, LENSES, ETC., AND DELIVER TO JOB READY FOR INSTALLATION. MATERIALS 1. PROVIDE BALLASTS WITH VOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS TO MATCH THAT OF ALL RELATED CIRCUITRY INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. NO EXTRA COMPENSATION WILL BE ALLOWED FOR FAILURE TO PROPERLY COORDINATE BALLAST VOLTAGE WITH CIRCUITRY. 2. BALLASTS FOR CONTROL OF LAMPS IN ONE HOUSING OR FIXTURE UNIT SHALL NOT CONTROL LAMPS OF AN ADJOINING UNIT. 3. GUARANTEE BALLAST FOR ONE FULL YEAR AND ONE YEAR PRORATED AS PER STANDARD MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY AGAINST DEFECTS FOR A PERIOD OF 2 YEARS. GUARANTEE TO INCLUDE REPLACING DEFECTIVE BALLAST WITH NEW BALLAST. LAMPS 1. PROVIDE A COMPLETE SET OF NEW LAMPS IN EACH FIXTURE 2. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE LAMPS MUST CONFORM TO THE FOLLOWING: a FLUORESCENT. T-8, 35K COLOR. b INCANDESCENT. "A" LAMPS TO BE INSIDE FROSTED RATED AT 130 VOLTS. c LOW VOLTAGE: MR-16. EXECUTION INSTALLATION 1. INSTALL LUMINAIRES IN MECHANICAL AND UNFINISHED AREAS AFTER DUCTWORK AND PIPING INSTALLATION. ADJUST FIXTURE LOCATIONS TO PROVIDE THE BEST LIGHTING FOR EQUIPMENT ACCESS AND SERVICE LOCATIONS. LOCATE FIXTURES 8 FEET 6 INCHES ABOVE FLOOR, OR AT SUITABLE LOCATIONS WITHIN SPACE ON WALLS BUT NOT LOWER THEN 7'-O" A.F.F. 2. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROTECT LUMINAIRES FROM DAMAGE DURING INSTALLATION OF SAME AND UP TO THE TIME OF ACCEPTANCE ANY BROKEN LUMINAIRES, GLASSWARE, PLASTICS, LAMPS ETC., MUST BE REPLACED BY THE CONTRACTOR WITH NEW PARTS, WITHOUT ANY ADDITIONAL EXPENSE TO THE OWNER. 3. WHERE BALLASTS ARE FOUND TO BE PRODUCING EXCESSIVE NOISE THEY SHALL BE REPLACED. 4. INSTALL EXIT LIGHT AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS BUT NOT HIGHER THAN 10 FEET A.F.F. SIZE AND COLOR OF LETTERING SHALL COMPLY WITH LOCAL CODES. 5. TRACK LUMINAIRES, ADJUSTABLE LUMINAIRES, FLOODLIGHTS AND ACCENT LIGHTS SHALL BE AIMED AS DIRECTED BY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. OUTDOOR LIGHTING SHALL BE AIMED IN PERIODS OF DARKNESS. 6. PLUMB ALL OUTDOOR LIGHTING STANDARDS TO TRUE VERTICAL FOR BOLTED POLES, PROVIDE GALVANIZED ANCHOR BOLTS AND NUTS. PLUMB USING A NUT ABOVE AND BELOW THE BASE PLATE ON THE ANCHOR BOLTS. PACK GROUT BETWEEN BASE PLATE AND CONCRETE FOOTING AND PROVIDE DRAIN HOLE BELOW BASE PLATE TO PREVENT ACCUMULATION OF MOISTURE INSIDE POLE BASE. PROVIDE TWO PIECE OR INDIVIDUAL COVERS FOR NUTS EXPOSED ABOVE THE BASEPLATE OF THE SAME COLOR AS THE POLE. GROUND ALL METAL LIGHTING STANDARDS. SECTION 16610 SURGE PROTECTION I. PROVIDE MOV TYPE ARRESTER ON THE MAIN SERVICE DISCONNECT(S) PER NEC ART. 280 AND CENTRAL FLORIDA LOCAL AMENDMENTS. 2. POWER PANEL SURGE PROTECTORS, WHERE SHOWN ON THE PLANS SHALL BE MOV SINGLE -STAGE TYPE 50,000 KA PER PHASE EDCO OR EQUAL SECTION 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS SUB1QTfAL3 1. SUBMIT PRIOR TO ORDERING EQUIPMENT. a RARING DIAGRAMS SHOWING CONNECTIONS BETWEEN ALL SYSTEM COMPONETS. b DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM OPERATION. c ANNUNCIATOR SCHEDULE SHOWING TITLES FOR EACH FIRE ALARM AND SUPERVISORY ZONE. d MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE MARKED TO SHOW MODEL AND CATALOG NUMBER FOR ALL EQUIPMENT. e MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS, OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS. 1y A COMPLETE LAYOUT OF THE ENTIRE SYSTEM INCLUDING CONDUIT ROUTING, CONDUIT SIZES, WIRE SIZES AND TYPES. g PROVIDE A COLOR CODE SCHEDULE FOR WIRING. h BATTERY SIZING CALCULATIONS INDICATING CIRCUIT LOADING AND POWER SUPPLY LOADING. VOLTAGE DROP CALCULATIONS SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR ALL NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUITS EXCEEDING 1.5 AMPS OR 300' LENGTH. I) SUBMITTALS SHALL BE AS A COMPLETE SET. PARTIAL SUBMITTAL WALL NOT BE ACCEPTABLE DRAWINGS SHALL NOT BE ON LESS THAN 8 1/2" BY 11 INCH SHEETS AND SHALL IDENTIFY ALL SYMBOLS USED. 2. SUBMIT PRIOR TO BUILDING OCCUPANCY a) CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT, UPON COMPLETION OF SYSTEM VERIFICATION, A POINT -BY -POINT CHECK LIST INDICATING THE DATE AND TIME OF EACH ITEM INSPECTED AND ISSUE A RECORD OF COMPLETION CONFIRMING THAT THE INSPECTION HAS BEEN COMPLETED AND THE SYSTEM IS INSTALLED AND FUNCTIONING IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE SPECIFICATIONS. a z 2L E E B 2 0 m C/ � op aN L) u D 0 0 'o & Q?.0 U w.r • r"I o V i w M /� u tri rU u� 14 U C W c 0 0_ 0 rL V cu (1)CC)C (13 r "&_ co co C U ^, W co _ J 0 w coW ca Q w a a)z "L 0 > co m J co I- fA U cn 0 E E 0 0 L __ N 60 (� U LL C fn=TO z � �, o U :2 Tn CIL Tn 0 mYNa a 00 N 's M w �` 6� � Ao O`j- 0w a , �00 .F, 0 0 . CL " o" I aU 'n �� 3 Cl a 3 �m V Z 0 J_ M0 W 1 U) ) Z 0 U_ LL_ CU W 0- U) Jj ) LL w U J w tz w ww = U) (--, , \,, R t `,, � `'�\' \ �1\ \�� \, �'� � z T 1\1c N OU ` '�� ' 2�)\. co � � 2 J ^ w O `� , 2 ' �� \� - ) �,-" J z O U) U) 2 m U) F- 2 D_ w a_I r- 0 1- w o W o J W Of O � Z m o O Of N Lu H Q Cl J W w = ~ Or 0 - U E501 k r �cAy �q a